CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library...

Copyright © ALSTOM 2008. We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden

Template No.: CS-T-010 Rev.C (Procedure CS-P-009)

CONTROCAD

Machine Control Function Block Library

USER'S MANUAL

ACCESSIBILITY Free

DATE 2008-10-22 NAME SIGNATURE

CREATED BY C.BARTHOULOT C.B.

CHECKED BY P.BOURCET P.B.

APPROVED BY H.SABOT H.S.

DOCUMENT TYPE

ALSTOM DOCUMENT CODE

REFERENCE LG REV ORIGIN FormatSize

Status SH/SH END

N of SH

P T P 2 1 A 4 0 0 1 5 en S EMB/PCS/EE2/TC A4 GFE 1/420 420


CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.SUSER'S MANUAL 2/420

REVISION HISTORY REV CREATED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY DATE DESCRIPTION STAT.

yyyy-mm-dd

A C.BARTHOULOT M. DROUIN, Ph. CHARRON, D.CANTERO 2000-07-24 See page 3 GFE

B C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2001-04-12 See page 3 GFE

C C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2001-12-13 See page 4 GFE

D C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2002-03-13 See page 5 GFE

E C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2002-05-17 See page 5 GFE

F C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2002-08-26 See page 5 GFE

G C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2002-11-18 See page 5 GFE

H C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2003-03-24 See page 6 GFE

I C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2003-10-07 See page 6 GFE

J C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2004-01-22 See page 6 GFE

K C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2005-06-01 See page 6 GFE

L C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2005-06-29 See page 6 GFE

M C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2006-02-28 See page 6 GFE

N C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2006-05-19 See page 6 GFE

O C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET D.CANTERO 2006-08-17 See page 6 GFE

P C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2007-08-02 See page 7 GFE

Q C.BARTHOULOT Ph. MANIETTE, Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2007-09-07 See page 7 GFE

R C.BARTHOULOT Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2007-11-14 See page 7 GFE

R C.BARTHOULOT Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2008-05-20 New name of entity EMB GFE

S C.BARTHOULOT Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2008-10-22 See page 7 GFE



abcd

REVISION HISTORY

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS A 05/23/00 Integration block :

DBF,EA2,EQM,FOX,FOTD,GROUP,LTH_B,MAX_WB, MIN_WB,MO2,MVS_WB,OSL,PREF,SELM,SEQ, SH,SOL1, SOL2,TIME

A 06/07/00 Details correction for blocks : 1OF2MC, 2OF3MC, LELAGMC

A 06/13/00 Output added for block : LELAGMC A 06/14/00 Up dating bloc :

DER,FOTD,GAI,MAX_WB,MIN_WB,MVS_WB,OSL,PREF,SEQ,SELM,SOL1,SOL2,TIME

A 06/19/00 Up dating block : LPMC, PIDMC A 06/29/00 Up dating block : ANTIBUMP, PIDS A 07/03/00 Up dating bloc : ATT, DER, EA2, MO2, OSL, SELM, SEQ,

SOL1, SOL2, A 07/10/00 HL ; LL detection modification and details corrections in blocks :

ANTIBUMP ; CD ; INTGR ; PIDMC ; Details corrections in blocks 1OF2MC ; 2OF3MC ; LELAGMC ; LPMC ; PIDS ; SCI8K ; SCO8k ; 2 blocks added : DIVMC; MULMC.

A 07/13/00 Up dating block : DBF, EA2 , FOX, GROUP, LTH_B, MO2, SOL1, SOL2 Rename block FOTD to PT 4 blocks added : OSC, SL2, SL3, SP

A 07/13/00 Rename block ANTIBUMP to FI ; INTGR to IT. A 07/19/00 Up dating block : ATT, CD, DBF, EQM, FOX, GAI, GROUP,

MED, PIDMC, PIDS, SELM A 07/20/00 Details correction for blocks : CD, FI A 07/21/00 Integration block : PM B 08/24/00 Integration blocks : SCSTI1, SCSTI2 B 08/31/00 Integration blocks : SCMPA and corrections details for blocks

SCSTI1, SCSTI2, and caracteristic modification on HI/LO limits for blocks CD, FI, IT, PIDMC, PIDS.

B 09/11/00 Integration block : AOC8K. B 09/13/00 Modification on HI/LO limits and choice type of slope for blocks

PT, SP. Modification on block THR.

B 09/28/00 Updating block : GROUP, MAX_WB, MIN_WB, MVS_WB, MO2, OSC, SL2, SL3.

B 10/04/00 Updating block : SCSTI1, SCSTI2. B 10/17/00 Updating block : EA2, SEQ. B 10/27/00 Updating block : SCMPA ; SCSTI1 ; SCSTI2 ; PIDMC.



abcd

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS B 10/31/00 Updating state variables for block : CD ; FI ;.IT ; LELAGMC ;

LPMC ; PIDS ; B 11/06/00 Integration block : CSAM. B 11/07/00 Updating block : IT. B 11/23/00 Updating block :

GAI,SEQ,SP,MO2,MED,SELM,MAX_WB,MIN_WB,MVS_WB ,SL2,SL3,EA2,SOL1,SOL2,LTH_B,PREF.

B 12/18/00 Updating name : ADL,DBF,DER,FOX,GAI,MAX_WB,MIN_WB,MVS_WB ,OSC,PREF,PT,SELM,SH,SP,THR. Updating block : EA2,MO2,SOL1,SOL2.

B 12/19/00 Integration block : PID. B 01/09/01 Integration block : MODBUS_M; COPY_TABLE; 3OF4MC.

Update block DIVMC; MULMC ; Cancel block : TESTP_B; TESTP_I.

B 01/19/01 Update block MVS_WB_D, MAX_WB_D, MIN_WB_D, PREF_D, SEQ, SL2, SOL1, SP. Cancel block : ATT.

B 01/25/01 Update Mandatory Data to make coherent Code and Blocks on the following blocks : DBF_D, EA2, EQM, GROUP, LTH_B, MAX_WB_D, MED_D, MIN_WB_D, MO2, MVS_WB_D, OSC_D, OSL, PID, PREF_D, PT_D, SEQ, SH_D, SL2, SL3, SOL1, SOL2, SP_D and THR.

B 02/07/01 Update block SOL1(Inputs OPD and CLD Mandatory Connection and Data).

B 02/13/01 Update block MODBUS_M B 02/14/01 Update block SELM_D ( Mandatory Data on SL1, SL2, SL3, SL4

and SL5) B 02/16/01 Update block CSAM (2 outputs Added) B 02/19/01 Optimization state variable number block IT, PIDMC, PIDS.

Integration block : ALCMC B 02/21/01 Update block : ALCMC B 03/01/01 Update block : ALCMC B 03/06/01 Update block : 3OF4MC B 03/09/01 Integration block : AVRBM, PT2. B 04/02/01 Integration block : R_L_FAULT ; PS_SPLIT_RANGE

Update blocks : LPMC; LELAGMC; IT B 04/04/01 Update blocks : SCI8K; SCO8K ;AOC8K B 04/10/01 Rename block AVRBM in SCABM ; B 04/11/01 Update blocks : FOX, PT, THR on Mandatory Data; B 04/12/01 Integration block : Update IMPMC Specifications. C 04/13/01 Update blocks : SCI8K;AOC8K; SCSTI1; SCSTI2. C 05/02/01 Update block : MVS_WB and new block DOIO. C 05/29/01 Update block : PT2_D



abcd

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS C 05/30/01 Update block : CSAM ; R_L_FAULT, P_S_SPLIT_RANGE

Integration block : SPEED_C C 05/31/01 Update block : ALCMC C 06/05/01 Update block : CSAM C 06/13/01 Integration block : ASLMC C 06/25/01 Update blocks : ALCMC; ASLMC C 07/03/01 Update blocks : ASLMC C 07/05/01 Introducing of EVLOG bloc C 08/08/01 Update of EVLOG bloc specification for operators and FAULT_1 C 08/08/01 Introducing of IMPMCUP_W bloc C 08/08/01 Introducing of IMPMCDWN_W bloc C 09/05/01 Changing to mandatory data for DBF and DER blocs C 09/18/01 Integration block : ENTHALPY, FTF_1L, and SNP_CONF C 10/01/01 Integration block : FTF_2L C 10/03/01 Update block : PIDMC C 10/29/01 Update block : MO2, SL2 C 11/06/01 Pseudo-code correction on block : THR C 11/13/01 Update block : PIDMC C 12/03/01 General update for all blocks before C release : screen copy of

the block display under Controcad and updating number of internal variables (with state variables).

D 02/08/02 Introducing version 1.4 of EVLOG block D 03/01/02 Introducing version 1.6 of GROUP block (default values for

INIT_ON/OFF). D 03/08/02 Updating blocks : SME, PT_D, DOIO and EVLOG. D 03/13/02 Updating blocks : ITT_D, P_STEP and D release. E 04/08/02 Updating block : P_STEP. E 04/18/02 Updating block : CD_D, PIDS, ASLMC, MVS_WB. E 04/23/02 Updating block EVLOG. E 04/26/02 Updating block : SPEED_C, P_S_SPLIT_RANGE. E 05/03/02 New block : LEADLAG_D. E 05/14/02 Updating blocks : CD_D, MVS_WB_D and PIDS_D on the size of

the images (Translating bitmap image in JPEG image). E 05/15/02 Updating block : P_STEP. F 05/29/02 Change MEM output type from Integer to Word on EVLOG block.F 07/10/02 Updating block : PT_R (on mandatory data). F 07/12/02 Updating block : PID_D (on documentation errors without

updating specification version). F 07/16/02 Updating block : SME_D and PID_D. F 07/22/02 Updating block PID_D. F 08/26/02 Updating block SCI8K_D. G 08/29/02 Remove ‘..’ of blocks title for export to HTML (MAX, MIN, MVS) G 09/04/02 Updating block LEADLAG_D on inputs



abcd

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS G 09/05/02 Updating all diagrams (group all components of the diagram) for

HTML export G 09/10/02 Updating block SME G 09/10/02 Updating all diagrams for HTML exportation (group components

of a diagram) and format all titles G 09/26/02 Updating EVLOG block (LONG type management & shift bug) G 10/03/02 Updating block SCI8K_D. H 12/20/02 EVLOG Evolution to manage 9 analogue variables. H 02/11/03 Update block : ALCMC, MODBUS_M, SCI8K. H 03/24/03 Update blocks : SL2 and SL3 on state variables. H 03/24/03 Update block : ITT_D on the maximum limit of I1 and/or I2. H 03/24/03 Update EVLOG block to handle other types of registers. I 04/15/03 Updating block : P_STEP. I 04/25/03 Introducing SAL_D block. I 07/03/03 Introducing V_VIEW block. J 11/07/03 Updating block SCI8K_D. J 12/03/03 Introducing DMOF, DMOS and GRP blocks for TGC-S V2. J 01/19/04 Introducing COPY_TBL7 ; MODBUS7_M ; Upgrade

COPY_TABLE. K 04/13/04 Upgrade COPY_TBL7. K 05/18/04 Updating FOX4_DI for TGS-S V2 K 02/06/04 Updating SME_D K 10/11/04 Updating ITT_D documentation K 12/02/04 Updating SCSTI1 and SCSTI2 documentation L 02/01/05 Introducing SC1STI171_DR and SC2STI171_DR blocks. L 06/13/05 Introducing SCMPM_D block. L 06/29/05 Updating SC1STI171_DR only, (SC2STI171_DR deleted), with

new specification. M 09/29/05 Updating FOX1_DI, FOX2_DI, FOX3_DI for TGS-S V2. M 09/30/05 Introducing GAIN_R block for Stress Monitor ALSTOM. M 09/30/05 Introducing SH_R block for Stress Monitor ALSTOM. M 09/30/05 Introducing MED_R block for Stress Monitor ALSTOM. M 09/30/05 Introducing SELM_R block for Stress Monitor ALSTOM. M 10/06/05 Updating PT_D block for RX3i AVR target. M 10/06/05 Introducing PT_DR block for RX3i AVR target. M 10/11/05 Introducing SCIWG_D and SCOWG_D blocks for Distributed

analog Input/Output of WAGO. M 12/26/05 Introducing MODBUS3I_M block for RX3i target. M 12/26/05 Updating SCMPM_D block for MPM123 module. M 01/02/06 Introducing SCIX2X_D and SCOX2X_D blocks for ACS Project. M 02/21/06 Introducing PID_DR block for RX3i TGC target. M 02/21/06 Updating SAL_D block following the DOEL Project.



abcd

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS M 02/28/06 Updating SC1STI171_DR and SME1_DR blocks following the

BM on adaptative factor above half of nominal speed. N 03/06/06 Introducing EVLOK_20K block for AVR-V2 needs. N 04/03/06 Introducing RTU_CONF block for Modbus needs on RX3i. N 05/15/06 Updating SME_D documentation on defaults 20 and 50. N 05/17/06 Introducing MOVE2W_R and MOVER_2W blocks for Modbus

needs. N 05/17/06 Introducing COPY_TBLRX3I block for Modbus needs. O 08/17/06 Introducing MED2_D and MED2_R blocks for diagram needs. O 09/26/06 Introducing CLEAR_CTL_FAULTS block for HMI needs. P 02/08/07 Updating SCMPM_D block : Negative logic for outputs TRIP,

TCh1/2/3/4. Q 07/09/07 Updating SC1STI171_DR to avoid unsteadiness on division

factor change ; Updating SCMPM_D on the new name of TRIP connexion : N-TRIP according to the new function of the block ; Updating SME1_D and SME1_DR documentations on the FREQMF variable ; New MVM MPM_TGC_CH1 for MPM123 parameter reading without the use of VISUREC software : Read GestEve 13 406 to use OPC Modbus ).

R 09/29/07 Introducing RED_MOVE_B, RED_MOVE_I and RED_MOVE_R blocks for Redundant Setpoints and Modbus variables needs ; Introducing MOVE_SP block for MFC3000 needs ;

S 08/22/08 Introducing MODBUS3I_PORT1_M and MODBUS3I_PORT2_M blocks for TGC-S needs ; Updating MVM of TPC for AVR needs ; Updating SME1_DR for TGC-S needs ; Updating MODBUS3I_PORT1_M and MODBUS3I_PORT2_M after the mail of P.Chauvin of October 21 th, 2008 for TGC-S needs ; Introducing TIME_METER_M block for TGC-S needs ;



abcd

TABLE OF CONTENTS

REVISION HISTORY.........................................................................................................................3 Section 1 PRESENTATION OF THE DOCUMENT .................................................................11 Section 2 1OF2MC_(I,D) : 2 INPUTS VOTATION ...................................................................18 Section 3 2OF3MC_(I,D) : 3 INPUTS VOTATION ...................................................................20 Section 4 3OF4MC_(I,D) : 4 INPUTS VOTATION ...................................................................23 Section 5 ADL_B : BLOCK DELAY ........................................................................................26 Section 6 ADL_(D,R) : BLOCK DELAY ..................................................................................29 Section 7 ALCMC : ACTUATOR LOGIC COMMAND.............................................................32 Section 8 AOC8K_(I,D) : ANALOG OUTPUT COMMAND .....................................................36 Section 9 ASLMC : ACCELERATION SPEED LIMITOR ........................................................40 Section 10 CD_(I,D) : AUTO / MANU FUNCTION.....................................................................45 Section 11 COPY_TABLE : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES ........................................49 Section 12 COPY_TBL7 : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES ...........................................53 Section 13 COPY_TBLRX3I : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES .....................................56 Section 14 CSAM_(I,D) : CONTROL STATION AUTOMATIC / MANUAL ...............................58 Section 15 CLEAR_CTL_FAULTS : CLEAR THE FAULTS OF CONTROLLER .....................61 Section 16 DBF_D : DEAD BAND FUNCTION .........................................................................63 Section 17 DER_D : DIFFERENTIATOR...................................................................................66 Section 18 DIVMC_(I,D) : DIVISION..........................................................................................69 Section 19 DMOF : DRIVE MODULE WITH OUTPUT THAT MAY DEPENDS ON

FEEDBACK..............................................................................................................71 Section 20 DMOS : DRIVE MODULE WITH OUTPUT STORED ..............................................79 Section 21 DOIO : DO_IO FUNCTION OF CTOOLKIT .............................................................86 Section 22 EA2 / EA2W : ELECTRIC ACTUATOR WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS COMMAND.....89 Section 23 ENTHALPY_D : ENTHALPY CALCULATION ........................................................97 Section 24 EQM : MULTIPLE EQUALITY...............................................................................103 Section 25 EVLOG_20K : EVENT LOG ..................................................................................105 Section 26 FI_(D,R) : FOLLOW-UP INTEGRATOR FUNCTION ............................................114 Section 27 FOX*_(D,DI,R) : FUNCTION GENERATOR..........................................................117 Section 28 FTF_1L : FIRST TRIPPING FAULT - FIRST LEVEL ............................................120 Section 29 FTF_2L : FIRST TRIPPING FAULT - SECOND LEVEL .......................................122 Section 30 GAI(_D,N_R) : ADJUSTABLE GAIN.....................................................................128 Section 31 GROUP : FUNCTION GROUP ..............................................................................131 Section 32 GRP : FUNCTION GROUP ( WITH OR WITHOUT TIME MONITORING ) ...........135 Section 33 IMPMC / IMPMCW : PULSE ON EDGE ................................................................140



abcd

Section 34 IMPMCDWN : PULSE ON FALLING EDGE..........................................................143 Section 35 IMPMCUP : PULSE ON RISING EDGE ................................................................147 Section 36 IT_(D,R) : INTEGRATOR.......................................................................................151 Section 37 ITT_D : IT_D INTEGRATOR WITH TIME IN SECONDS.......................................154 Section 38 LEADLAG_D : LEAD LAG FILTER ......................................................................157 Section 39 LELAGMC_(I,D) : LEAD LAG FILTER..................................................................159 Section 40 LPMC_(I,D) : LOW PASS FILTER ........................................................................162 Section 41 LTH_B : BOOLEAN LOGICAL THRESHOLD ......................................................165 Section 42 MAX_WB_D : MAXIMUM OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL....................169 Section 43 MED(2)_(D,R) : MEDIAN THRESHOLD................................................................173 Section 44 MIN_WB_D : MINIMUM OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL ......................176 Section 45 MODBUS_M : MODBUS MASTER INTERFACE MANAGEMENT ......................179 Section 46 MODBUS3I_M : MODBUS MASTER FOR RX3i...................................................183 Section 47 MODBUS7_M : MODBUS MASTER INTERFACE C8075 MANAGEMENT.........189 Section 48 MOVE2W_R : CONVERSION................................................................................194 Section 49 MOVER_2W : CONVERSION................................................................................196 Section 50 MOVE_SP : WRITE VARIABLE IN OTHER..........................................................198 Section 51 MO2 / MO2W : MOTOR WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS COMMAND...........................200 Section 52 MULMC_(I,D) : MULTIPLICATION........................................................................209 Section 53 MVS_WB_D : MEAN VALUE OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL..............211 Section 54 OSC_D : OSCILLATOR.........................................................................................215 Section 55 OSL : ONE-SHOT LIMITED...................................................................................218 Section 56 P_STEP : STEP OF SEQUENCE CONTROL .......................................................221 Section 57 PID : PROPORTIONAL INTEGRATED DERIVATED ...........................................228 Section 58 PIDMC_(I,D) : PID MACHINE CONTROL .............................................................235 Section 59 PIDS_(I,D) : PID CORRECTOR WITH STATISM..................................................241 Section 60 PM_(I,D) : PULSE MODULATION.........................................................................246 Section 61 PREF_D : PREFERRED VALUE SELECTION .....................................................250 Section 62 PS_SPLIT_RANGE : PARALLEL SERIAL SPLIT RANGE..................................253 Section 63 PT _(D, DR, R) : FIRST ORDER TIME DELAY.....................................................257 Section 64 PT2_D : SECOND ORDER TRANSFERT FUNCTION .........................................263 Section 65 R_L_FAULT : READ_LAST_FAULT ....................................................................265 Section 66 RED_MOVE_B : REDUNDANT MOVE FOR BOOLEAN, INTEGER AND REAL 268 Section 67 RTU_CONF : RTU CONF ......................................................................................270 Section 68 SAL_D : SPEED ACCELERATION LIMITOR .......................................................273 Section 69 SC1STI171_DR : SCAN STI171 MODULE FOR SINGLE SHAFT .......................279



abcd

Section 70 SCABM _D : UMT CARD INPUTS SCANNING ....................................................285 Section 71 SCI8k_(I,D) : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE INPUT ...............................................292 Section 72 SCIWG_D : SCALING FOR DISTRIBUTED ANALOG INPUT OF WAGO...........295 Section 73 SCIX2X_D : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE INPUT.................................................298 Section 74 SCMPA_(I,D) : SCAN MPA157 MODULE.............................................................301 Section 75 SCMPM_D : MEASUREMENT PROTECTION MODULE .....................................305 Section 76 SCO8K_(I,D) : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT.........................................311 Section 77 SCOWG_D : SCALING FOR DISTRIBUTED ANALOG OUTPUT OF WAGO.....313 Section 78 SCOX20_D : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT ...........................................315 Section 79 SCSTI1_(I,D) : SCAN STI161 MODULE FOR SINGLE SHAFT ...........................317 Section 80 SCSTI2_(I,D) : SCAN STI161 MODULE FOR DOUBLE SHAFT..........................323 Section 81 SELM_(D,R) : BINARY MULTIPLE SELECTION .................................................329 Section 82 SEQ : SEQUENCE FUNCTION.............................................................................332 Section 83 SH_(D,R) : SAMPLE AND HOLD..........................................................................337 Section 84 SL2 : SELECTOR 2 UNITS ...................................................................................339 Section 85 SL3 : SELECTOR 3 UNITS ...................................................................................347 Section 86 SME*_ (D, DR) : SPEED MEASURE ELABORATION .........................................360 Section 87 SNP_CONF : SNP CONF ......................................................................................366 Section 88 SOL1 / SOL1W : SINGLE COIL SOLENOID VALVE WITH 1 LOGIC ORDER

COMMAND ............................................................................................................369 Section 89 SOL2 / SOL2W : DUAL COIL SOLENOID VALVE WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS

COMMAND ............................................................................................................376 Section 90 SP_D : SET POINT CALCULATION.....................................................................383 Section 91 SPEED_C : SPEED CONSIGNATOR ...................................................................390 Section 92 TIME_METER_L : TIME METER IN SECONDS ...................................................411 Section 93 THR_(D,R) : THRESHOLD WITH HYSTERESIS ..................................................414 Section 94 V_VIEW : VARIABLE VIEWER .............................................................................418



abcd

Section 1 PRESENTATION OF THE DOCUMENT

This document describes the use of the function blocks belonging to the P320 Machine Control library. Each function block is described in a technical sheet enclosed in the following document. The technical sheets are presented in alphabetical order.

1.1 Presentation of the technical sheets.

The technical sheet includes the following items : - The name of the function block (on the left top of the sheet), - The graphical representation of the function block, - The table of arguments characteristics, - The FB function description ; - The function block use description that includes :

• an optional and specific argument description, • the parameters to be initialized, • some notes on particular use,

• The fast description of the state variables used inside the block ;

- The function block specification that includes :

• the description of the internal and state variables used in the FB,

• the basic function used by the FB.



abcd

1.2 Function Block graphical representation

A function block representation is given hereafter ;

1- Name of the function block, 2- Code name(10 characters ) ; name of the argument which is used in the FB code, 3- Display name (10 characters): name of the argument displayed in CONTROCAD, 4- ARROW :

- Full arrow : represent an input/output that must be wired to another FB, or

connected to a variable or an immediate value, (mandatory connection = ‘Y’); - Empty arrow : represent an optional input/output.

1.3 Table of arguments characteristics.

Name Description Type Neg Range Mand.

Connection Def. Value Mand.

Data Advised

parameters value

First scan value

Inputs

INPUT1 (IN1) IN2 IN3 IN4

Input Input Input Input

B B B B

Y Y Y Y

- - - -

Y Y N Y

- - 1 -

N N N N

- - - -

- - - -

Outputs

RE

Operator result

Boolean

Y - Y - Y

- -

Parameters

COS E S

IN

OUT

1

2 4 3



abcd

There are two names for an argument. The key name which is used into the code and the display which is displayed. Often, the names are the same, but sometimes they could be different. In this case, the display name is between round brackets.



abcd

The different columns contain : NAME : name of the argument

- input - output - parameters : it is an input often connected to a tuning variable which can have 2

levels ; - Configurator : the parameters can’t be changed online

(e.g.: mechanical characteristics as nominal speed, …). - User : the parameters can be changed online.

DESCRIPTION : description of the argument, TYPE : a variable can have one of the following types :

- (B)OOLEAN [1 bit, 0 or 1] - (W)ORD [16 bits integer, from 0 to 65535] - (I)NTEGER [16 bits integer, from –32768 to 32767] - (L)ONG [32 bits integer, from 0 to 4294967295] - (D)OUBLE [32 bits integer, from –2147483648 to 2147483647] - (R)EAL[32 bits, 3.4e +/-38] - (D)URATION [32 bits] - (C)URSOR[16 bit pointer]

ANY_INT : WORD, INTEGER, LONG, DOUBLE, CURSOR ANY_NUM : WORD, INTEGER, LONG, DOUBLE, REAL ANY_NUM* mean that all the arguments in the FB must be in the same type. For arguments representing an array of value, the length must be indicated. e.g. : an array of 8 boolean -> BOOLEAN[8].

RANGE : For each argument, the limit of the numerical value must be indicated according to its type sometimes it is important to give its physical value.

NEG : It is the possibility of negation for a boolean input (/) and of opposition for a numerical input (-). The choice between the negation and the opposition is in harmony with the connection type, which can be logical or numerical.

ANY_INT

ANY_NUM



abcd

MANDATORY CONNECTION : When it is set to “Y”, the argument must be wired to another FB, or connected to a variable or an immediate value.



abcd

DEFAULT VALUE : It is the default value of the signal on an argument if there is no signal associated with this argument. Another possibility to define a default signal is to declare a DEFAULT VARIABLE by using the pre-processing directives of the LEA language.

MANDATORY DATA : Obligation to affect a value or a variable to the argument.

ADVISED PARAMETER VALUE : Value used in normal condition during the execution of the FB. This value is an attribute of the connected variable.

FIRST SCAN VALUE : Value of the argument during the first execution cycle. It allows the

function block to be internally initialised.

1.4 General type of argument

HY : hysteresis HI : high limit LO : low limit HT : high threshold LT : low threshold DL : line validation DF : defaut validation TY : type of process SL : slope PT : period of time IN : input IC : init command IV : init value IS : init status RUN : run command BCL : busy for closed loop Bol : busy for open loop BSY : busy ME : measurement SP : set point FRZ : freeze OLC : open loop compaign TRK : tracking ENO : error output Gn : gain AT : attenuation TH : threshold BD : Dead Band



abcd

1.5 Redundancy

All the blocks have an implicit redundancy : for the 1oo2 applications, the users don’t be busy to make the redundancy of the functions (a set of blocks). This is automatic by the design of each block with the implicit redundancy, allows by the redundancy exchange of the state variables.

1.6 Controcad library display



abcd

Section 2 1OF2MC_(I,D) : 2 INPUTS VOTATION

1OF2MC _I Specification version : 1.1 (07/10/00) 1OF2MC _D Specification version : 1.1 (07/10/00)

2.1 Component representation

2.2 FunctioN

ENO=0 AND OV1=0 AND OV2=0 IF IV1=1 AND IV2=1

IF TY=1 : RE = MAX(IN1;IN2) ELSE IF TY=2 : RE = MIN(IN1;IN2) ELSE RE = (IN1+IN2)/2

IF |IN1-IN2|>EPSMAX THEN RE= BCK AND ENO=1 AND OV1= 1 IF IV1=1 AND IV2=0 : RE=IN1 AND OV1=1 IF IV1=0 AND IV2=1 : RE=IN2 AND OV1=1 IF IV1=0 AND IV2=0 : RE= BCK AND ENO=1 AND OV1=1 AND OV2=1

2.3 Arguments characteristics

Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Connection

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN1 Input # 1 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV1 Valid indicator

on Input #1 BOOL

. Y 0= INVALID N 1 Y

IN2 Input # 2 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV2 Valid indicator

on Input #2 BOOL

. Y 0= INVALID N 1 Y

BCK Backup I/D Y -32768 to+32767 N 0 Y Outputs

RE Output I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y Y 0



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

ENO RE= BCK BOOL.

Y 1 = IN1 AND IN2 Invalid OR |IN1-IN2|>MAX

RE= BCK

N Y 0

OV1 Indicator #1 on output

BOOL.

Y 1 = IN1 OR IN2 Invalid

N Y 0

OV2 Indicator #2 on output

BOOL.

Y 1 = IN1 AND IN2 Invalid

N Y 0

Parameters

TY treatment I/D N TY=0: RE=(IN1+IN2))/2 TY=1: RE=MAX(IN1;IN2) TY=2: RE=MIN(IN1;IN2) TY>2 => TY=0 (internal)

N 0 Y

EPSMAX Eps Max betwen inputs

I/D N 0 to+32000 N 32000 Y

2.4 Use

2.5 SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.1 Internal Variables and State Variables

NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

Internal variables : 5 booleans and 4 doubles.

2.5.2 Function Block Code

2.5.3 Basic Function used

1OF2MC_D().



abcd




3.2 Function

ENO=0 ; OV1=0 ; OV2=0 ; EC12 = 0 ; EC23 = 0 ; EC31 = 0 ; DF1 = 0 ; DF2 = 0 ; DF3 = 0 Case 1 : All IVx OK; IF( IV1=IV2=Iv3=1): TY = 0 : RE = (IN1+IN2+IN3)/3 TY =1 OR TY=2 : RE = Medium value (IN1;IN2;IN3) Input difference calculation : if | IN1 - IN2 | > EPSMax EC12 = 1 if | IN2 - IN3 | > EPSMax EC23 = 1 if | IN3 - IN1 | > EPSMax EC31 = 1 Input fault Discrimination with DF1, DF2, DF3 output if EC12 & EC23 DF2 = 1 if EC12 & EC31 DF1 = 1 if EC23 & EC31 DF3 = 1 IF ( all input are valid AND DFz)): OV1=1 TY =0 : RE = (INx+INy)/2 TY =1 : RE = MAX(INx;INy) TY =2 : RE = MIN(INx;INy) IF all input are valid AND [ (DF1 and DF2) or (DF1 and DF3) or (DF2 and DF3) ]



abcd

RE= BCK AND OV1=1;ENO = 1 Case 2 : 2 of 3 IVx OK IF two of the inputs are valid (ie IVx=IVy=1; Ivz=0; x&y valid; z invalid) OV1=1 if | INx - INy | <= EPSMax TY =0 : RE = (INx+INy)/2 TY =1 : RE = MAX(INx;INy) TY =2 : RE = MIN(INx;INy) else (only two values are valid AND | INx - INy | > EPSMax) RE= BCK AND ENO = 1 Cas3 : only 1 or 0 IVx OK IF all input are invalid OR only one value is valid RE= BCK AND OV1=1;OV2=1;ENO = 1



Connection

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN1 Input # 1 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV1 Valid Input 1 BOOL Y 1 = Input #1 valid N 1 Y IN2 Input # 2 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV2 Valid Input 2 BOOL Y 1 = Input #2 valid N 1 Y IN3 Input # 3 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV3 Valid Input 3 BOOL Y 1 = Input #3 valid N 1 Y


RE Output I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y Y 0 ENO Result Indicator BOOL

. Y 1 => RE = BCK N - Y 0

DF1 Indicator on input #1

BOOL Y 1 => Input #1 discarded N - Y 0


BOOL.

Y 1 => Input #2 discarded N - Y 0


BOOL.

Y 1 => Input #3 discarded N - Y 0

OV1 Indicator one or more input invalid

BOOL.

Y 1 => one or more input invalid (IVx) N - Y 0

OV2 Indicator two or more input invalid

BOOL.

Y 1 => two or more inputs invalid or discarted (IVx,DFy)

N - Y 0

Parameters TY treatment I/D N TY=0: RE average or (INx+INy))/2

TY=1: RE medium or MAX(INx;INy) TY=2: RE medium or MIN(INx;INy) TY>2 => TY=0 (internal)

N 0 Y

EPSMAX Eps Max betwen inputs

I/D N 0 to+32000 N 32000 Y



abcd

3.4 Use

3.5 SPECIFICATIONS






2OF3MC_D().



abcd




4.2 Function

ENO=0 ; OV1=0 ; OV2=0 ; EC12 = 0 ; EC23 = 0 ; EC31 = 0 ; EC42 = 0 ; EC43 = 0 ; EC41 = 0 ; DF1 = 0 ; DF2 = 0 ; DF3 = 0 ; DF4 = 0 Case 1 : All IVx OK; Input difference calculation : if | IN1 - IN2 | > EPSMax EC12 = 1 if | IN2 - IN3 | > EPSMax EC23 = 1 if | IN3 - IN1 | > EPSMax EC31 = 1 if | IN4 - IN1 | > EPSMax EC41 = 1. if | IN4 - IN2 | > EPSMax EC42 = 1 if | IN4 - IN3 | > EPSMax EC43 = 1 Input fault Discrimination with DF1, DF2, DF3, DF4 output if (EC12 & EC23) || (EC12 & EC42) || (EC42 & EC23) DF2 = 1 if (EC12 & EC31) || (EC12 & EC41) || (EC41 & EC31) DF1 = 1 if (EC23 & EC31) || (EC23 & EC43) || (EC31 & EC43) DF3 = 1 if (EC43 & EC41) || (EC43 & EC42) || (EC41 & EC42) DF4 = 1 IF( All Ivx AND No DFz): RE = (IN1+IN2+IN3+IN4)/4 ELSE

IF (All Ivx AND DFz):



abcd

OV1=1 RE = (Inw + Inx + INy)/3 IF all input are valid AND [ (DF1 and DF2) or (DF1 and DF3) or (DF1 and DF4) or (DF2 and DF3) or (DF2 and DF4) or (DF3 and DF4)] RE= BCK AND OV1=1; OV2=1; ENO = 1 Case 2 : 3 of 4 IVx OK IF three of the inputs are valid (ie IVw= IVx=IVy=1; Ivz=0; w&x&y valid; z invalid)

Input difference calculation : OV1=1 if | INw - INx | > EPSMax ECwx = 1 if | INx - INy | > EPSMax ECxy = 1 if | INy - INw | > EPSMax ECyw = 1. Input fault Discrimination with DF1, DF2, DF3, DF4 output if (EC12 & EC23) || (EC12 & EC42) || (EC42 & EC23) DF2 = 1 if (EC12 & EC31) || (EC12 & EC41) || (EC41 & EC31) DF1 = 1 if (EC23 & EC31) || (EC23 & EC43) || (EC31 & EC43) DF3 = 1 if (EC43 & EC41) || (EC43 & EC42) || (EC41 & EC42) DF4 = 1 IF ( DFw or DFx or DFy ): RE= BCK AND ENO = 1 ; OV2=1 ELSE RE = (Inw + Inx + INy)/3 Cas3 : less of 2 IVx OK IF all input are invalid OR only one value is valid RE= BCK AND OV1=1;OV2=1;ENO = 1



Connection

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN1 Input # 1 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV1 Valid Input 1 BOOL Y 1 = Input #1 valid N 1 Y IN2 Input # 2 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV2 Valid Input 2 BOOL Y 1 = Input #2 valid N 1 Y IN3 Input # 3 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV3 Valid Input 3 BOOL Y 1 = Input #3 valid N 1 Y IN4 Input # 4 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y IV4 Valid Input 4 BOOL Y 1 = Input #4 valid N 1 Y


RE Output I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y Y 0 ENO Result Indicator BOOL Y 1 => RE = BCK N - Y 0 OV1 Indicator one or

more input invalid BOOL Y 1 => one or more input

invalid (IVx) N - Y 0



abcd

Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Connectio

n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

OV2 Indicator two or more input invalid

BOOL Y 1 => two or more inputs invalid or discarted

(IVx,DFy)

N - Y 0

DF1 Indicator on input #1 BOOL Y 1 => Input #1 discarded N - Y 0 DF2 Indicator on input #2 BOOL Y 1 => Input #2 discarded N - Y 0 DF3 Indicator on input #3 BOOL Y 1 => Input #3 discarded N - Y 0 DF4 Indicator on input #4 BOOL Y 1 => Input #4 discarded N - Y 0

Parameters EPSMAX Eps Max betwen

inputs I/D N 0 to+32000 N 32000 Y

4.4 Use

4.5 SPECIFICATIONS






3OF4MC_D().



abcd

Section 5 ADL_B : BLOCK DELAY

Specification version : 1.0 (05/15/00)


5.2 Function

This block realises a delay from the input in accordance to the model activation period.

INITIALIZATION : the block output RE is set to IV (Initialization Value).

NORMAL OPERATION : the block output is established as follows :

RE (t) = IN (t-1).

Example : Model Sample time Ts

1

output : RE 0

1

input : IN 0

1

init value : IV 0

t0 t1 t’-1 t’ t’’-1 t’’



abcd


Name Description Type Neg Range Mandatory Connection

Default Value

Mandatory Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN

Input to delayed

Boolean

N

-

Y

N

-

-

Outputs

RE

Output or Result

Boolean

N

-

Y

Y

-

IV

Parameters

IV

Initialisation value

Boolean

N

-

N

0

N

-

-

The block ADL_B is boolean. IN, RE & IV are the same type (boolean).

5.4 Use

5.4.1 Parameters to initialize

- During initialisation, at PLC start-up : RE = IV. This is a User parameter.

5.4.2 Arguments Description

IN : INPUT : input, mandatory. RE : RESULT or OUTPUT : output, mandatory and memory. IV : INIT VALUE : input.

5.4.3 Recommandations

This block is an historical block. Associated FGT : NONE Scheme



abcd

5.5 Specification :


The ouput is a state variable. A redundant internal variable exist (1 boolean).


LEA.


None,FB ADL_B.

Z-1 IN RE



abcd

Section 6 ADL_(D,R) : BLOCK DELAY

ADL_D Specification version : 1.1 (12/18/00) ADL_R Specification version : 1.1 (12/18/00)


6.2 Function

This block realises a delay from the input in accordance to the model activation period.

INITIALIZATION : the block output is set to IV.

NORMAL OPERATION : the block output is established as follows :

RE (t) = IN (t-1).

Example : Model Sample time Ts

9

output : RE 0

9

input : IN 0

9

init value : IV 0

t0 t1 t’-1 t’ t’’-1 t’’



abcd



Default Value

Mandatory Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN

Input to delayed

ANY_NUM

N

] [+∞∞− ;

Y

N

-

-

Outputs

RE

Output or Result

ANY_NUM

N

] [+∞∞− ;

Y

Y

-

IV

Parameters

IV

Initialisation value

ANY_NUM

N

] [+∞∞− ;

N

0

N

-

-

The block ADL can be real, integer or double integer. IN, RE & IV are the same type for each type of block.

6.4 Use


- During initialisation, at PLC start-up : RE = IV. This is a User parameter.


IN : INPUT : input, mandatory. RE : RESULT or OUTPUT : output, mandatory and memory. IV : INIT VALUE : input.


This block is an historical block.

Associated FGT : NONE Scheme



abcd

6.5 Specification :


The ouput is a state variable. A redundant internal variable exist (1 double for ADL_D and 1 real for ADL_R).


LEA.


None, FB ADL_D and ADL_R.

Z-1 IN RE



abcd

Section 7 ALCMC : ACTUATOR LOGIC COMMAND

ALCMC Specification version : 1.5 (02/11/03)


7.2 Function

Motor logiq command function Inputs MON : Manual order to set ON ONIC : ON initials conditions ONPC : ON permanents conditions MOFF : Manual order to set OFF OFFIC : OFF initials conditions OFFPC : OFF permanent conditions AON : Auto order to set ON AOFF : Auto order to set OFF ACK : Acknowledge AF : Actuator in fault RUN : Actuator running Parameters PULS : Pulsed outputs (if =1) TEMP : Time delay for execution time too long Outputs ON : ON order OFF : OFF order DISC : Indication discrepancy



abcd

PROBLEM : Indication actuator in fault (set by AF; reset by ACK) IRUN : Actuator state (0=>not running ; 1=>running) IRUN(K) = RUN(K) DE=0 ;DH=0 IF (AF (K) = 1) THEN PROBLEM (K) = 1 ELSE IF (ACK = 1) THEN PROBLEM (K) = 0 ENDIF IF (PROBLEM (K) = 1) THEN ON(K) = 0; OFF(K) =0; CPT(K) = 0 ELSE IF (MON(K) = 1 AND ONIC(K) = 1) OR AON(K) = 1 THEN DE(K) = 1; DISC(K) = 0 ENDIF IF (MOFF(K) = 1 AND OFFIC(K) = 1) OR AOFF(K) = 1 THEN DH(K) = 1 ; DISC(K) = 0 IF (DE(K) = 1) DH(K) = 0 DE(K) = 0 ENDIF ENDIF (*** Time delay for discrepancy ***) IF DISC(K-1) = 1 THEN ON(K) = OFF(K) =0 ; CPT(K) =0 IF (ON(K-1) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 1) OR (OFF(K-1) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 0) THEN DISC(K) = 0 ENDIF ENDIF

IF ((ON(K-1) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 0) OR (OFF(K-1) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 1)) AND DISC(K-1) = 0 THEN CPT(K) = CPT(K-1) + CYC IF CPT(K) > TEMP THEN DISC(K) = 1 ENDIF ENDIF (*** Loss of permanents conditions ***) IF OFFPC(K) = 0 THEN OFF(K) = 0; DH(K) =0; DE(K) =1 ENDIF IF ONPC(K) = 0 THEN ON(K) = 0; DE(K) =0; DH(K) =1



abcd

ENDIF (*** Outputs treatment ***) IF DE(K) = 1 AND ON(K-1) = 0 THEN ON(K) = 1 ; DE(K) = 0 IF OFF(K-1) = 1 THEN OFF(K) = 0; CPT(K) = 0 ENDIF ENDIF IF DH(K) = 1 AND OFF(K-1) = 0 THEN OFF(K) = 1 ; DH(K) = 0 IF ON(K-1) = 1 THEN ON(K) = 0 ; CPT(K) = 0 ENDIF ENDIF IF PULS = 1 THEN IF ON(K) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 1 THEN ON(K) = 0; CPT(K) = 0 ENDIF IF OFF(K) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 0 THEN OFF(K) = 0; CPT(K) = 0 ENDIF ENDIF ENDIF If AF is set, outputs are reset and PROBLEM is set; After ACK, output PROBLEM is reset but old order output is not set until new command.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs MON Manual order to set ON BOOL Y N 0 Y ONIC ON initials conditions BOOL Y N 1 Y ONPC ON permanents conditions BOOL Y N 1 Y MOFF Manual order to set OFF BOOL Y N 0 Y OFFIC OFF initials conditions BOOL Y N 1 Y OFFPC OFF permanents conditions BOOL Y N 1 Y

AON Auto order to set ON BOOL Y N 0 Y AOFF Auto order to set OFF BOOL Y N 0 Y ACK Acknowledge BOOL Y N 1 Y AF Actuator in fault BOOL Y N 0 Y

RUN Actuator running BOOL Y N 0 Y Outputs

ON ON order BOOL Y Y Y 0 OFF OFF order BOOL Y Y Y 0 DISC Indication discrepancy BOOL Y N Y 0

PROBLEM Indication actuator in fault; treatment disabled.

BOOL Y N Y 0

IRUN Actuator state (0=> not running 1=> running)

BOOL Y N Y 0

Parameters PULS Pulsed outputs BOOL Y N 0 Y



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

TEMP Time delay for discrepancy D Y 0 to 32000 (0 to 32,000 s)

N 20 (20 ms)

Y

7.4 Use

7.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) CPT Tempo for discrepancy D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable ON ON memorization B 0 R OFF OFF memorization B 0 R DISC DISC memorization B 0 R PROBLEM PROBLEM memorization B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable Internal variables : 19 booleans(amongst which 4 state variables) and 2 doubles.



ALCMC()



abcd

Section 8 AOC8K_(I,D) : ANALOG OUTPUT COMMAND

AOC8K_I Specification version : 1.2 (04/13/01) AOC8K_D Specification version : 1.2 (04/13/01)


8.2 Function

Control station with manual increase and decrease command inputs. Inputs : IN : Analogue input to be copied into automatic mode output, MAS : Manual Auto mode selection logic Switch, MOVR : Manual mode Overrides, IND : Request logic input + manual, DED : Request logic input - manual,

IV : Analogue input of output initialisation, IC : initialisation Command of output, RST : Operator output reset logic input, GI : Galvanometer Input Value, GC : Galvanometer Command, Parameterization : SSL : Slow SLope value in manual mode before Temp, FSL : Fast SLope value in manual mode after Temp, TEMP : Temporisation before Fast Slope, HI : High limit value. LO : Low limit value.



abcd

Outputs : RE : Result AOC operator. ST : State Manual indication, 1=> Manual mode. SIG : Signalization : 0=> Auto; 1=> Manu; Alternate state => Manu override, HL : Logic output; High Limit, LL : Logic output; Low Limit, GO : Galvanometer output (with GI if GC = 1 and with RE if GC = 0), IF INIT THEN Re (K) = 0 ; HL=0 ; LL=0; REP(K)= 0 ;ST(K) = SIG =1 ELSE SIG = ST(K-1) ; HL=0; LL=0 IF HI<=LO THEN Re (K) = HI ; HL=1 ; LL=1; REP(K)= HI * 1000 ELSE IF (RST) THEN REP(K-1) = 0; SIG =ST(K) =1 ELSE IF (IC) THEN REP(K-1) = IV*1000; SIG =ST(K) =1 ELSE IF (MOVR) THEN ST(K) =1; SIG = Alternate state (with T=1s) ELSE IF (MAS(K) &! MAS(K-1)) THEN ST(K) = ! ST(K-1); SIG = ST(K) IF (!ST(K) ) THEN REP(K-1) = IN*1000; CPTI(K) =0; CPTD(K) =0 ELSE IF (IND !=DED) IF (IND ) THEN CPTD(K) = 0 IF (CPTI(K) < (TEMP*1000)) OR (TEMP = 0) THEN CPTI(K) = CPTI(K-1) + CYC REP(K) = REP(K-1) + SSL(CYC) ELSE REP(K) = REP(K-1) + FSL(CYC) ELSE IF (DED) THEN CPTI(K) = 0 IF (CPTD(K) < (TEMP*1000)) OR (TEMP = 0) THEN CPTD(K) = CPTD(K-1) + CYC REP(K) = REP(K-1) - SSL(CYC) ELSE REP(K) = REP(K-1) - FSL(CYC) ELSE CPTI(K) =0; CPTD(K) =0 ENDIF ENDIF RE(K) = REP(K)/1000 IF RE (K) >= HI THEN RE (K) = HI ; HL=1; REP(K)= HI * 1000 IF RE (K) <= LO THEN RE (K) = LO ; LL=1; REP(K)= LO * 1000 ENDIF ENDIF IF (GC) THEN GO = GI ELSE GO = RE



abcd


Name Description Type Neg

Range Mand. Connectio

n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN Analogue input to be copied

into automatic mode output I/D. Y -20000 to 20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) N 0 Y

MAS Manual Auto mode selection logic Switch (0->1 Swich mode)

BOOL. Y N 0 Y

MOVR Manual mode Overrides (1 Override manual mode)

BOOL Y N 0 Y

IND Request logic input + manual

BOOL Y N 0 Y

DED Request logic input – manual

BOOL Y N 0 Y

IV Analogue input of output initialisation

I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

IC Initialisation Command of output (=1)

BOOL Y N 0 Y

RST Operator output reset logic input (=1)

BOOL Y N 0 Y

GI Galvanometer Input Value I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

GC Galvanometer Command (=1 : GO=GI)

BOOL Y N 0 Y

Outputs RE Result AOC operator.

I/D. Y -20000 to 20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y Y 0

ST State Manual indication, 1=> Manual mode

BOOL. Y - N Y 1

SIG Signalization : 0=> Auto; 1=> Manu; Alternate state => Manu override

BOOL. Y - N Y 1

HL Logic output; High Limit (=1) BOOL. Y - N Y 0 LL Logic output; Low Limit (=1) BOOL. Y N - Y 0 GO Galvanometer output (with

GI if GC = 1 and with RE if GC = 0)

I/D N -20000 to 20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N Y 0

Parameters SSL Slow SLope value in

manual mode before Temp I/D N 0 to+32 000

(0 to 320 00%/s) Y Y

FSL Fast SLope value in manual mode after Temp

I/D N 0 to+32 000 (0 to 320 00%/s)

N 0 Y

TEMP Temporisation before Fast Slope (if TEMP =0 : only SSL)

I/D N 0 to 32000 (0 to 32 000s)

N 0 Y

HI High limit value.

I/D Y -20000 to 20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 20000 Y

LO Low limit value.

I/D Y -20000 to 20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N -20000 Y

8.4 Use

8.5 SPECIFICATIONS



abcd


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) REP RE (K-1) *1000 D 0 R CPTI Tempo for Fast Increase D 0 R CPTD Tempo for Fast Decrease D 0 R ALT Alternate state temporisation (K-1) D 0 R ST Manual mode memorisation (K-1) B 1 R

MAS MAS memorisation (K-1) B 0 R Internal variables : 12 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 12 doubles (amongst which 4 state variables).



AOC8K_D().



abcd

Section 9 ASLMC : ACCELERATION SPEED LIMITOR

ASLMC Specification version : 1.3 (04/18/01)


9.2 Function

This FB do the turbine acceleration speed limitation by logical or progressive output. ASLMC

NACC

IN

PASL

SFF

TA1

G1

TA2

G2

LASL

RE

STI

SLT; SLHY

ALT; ALHY

TSTOFF

AFF

T1 T2

T>=

Inputs: IN : input (Turbine Speed). Parameterization : SFF,: Speed Filter cut off Frequency. OFF : Offset added to filtered speed. STI : Speed turbine Threshold Inhibition. TST : Turbine Specific Time. AFF: Acceleration Filter cut off Frequency.



abcd

TA1 : First Threshold Acceleration for progressive action by G1. G1 : First Gradient for progressive action, TA2 : Second Threshold Acceleration for progressive action by G2. G2 : Second Gradient for progressive action, SLT: Speed turbine Logical action Threshold. SLHY: Speed turbine Logical action Hysteresis. ALT: Acceleration turbine Logical action Threshold. ALHY: Acceleration turbine Logical action Hysteresis. T1 : Time Threshold for prolongation by T2. T2 : prolongation Time if action duration is bigger than T1. Outputs: RE : output (progressive limitation) NACC: Normalised ACCeleration PASL: Progressive Acceleration Speed Limitation Indicator LASL: Logical Acceleration Speed Limitation output Double long Qa, Qs, R1, R2, R3, R4 IF (INIT ) THEN If SFF (K) != 0 Then Qs (K) =exp (-(CYC/1000)* SFF(K)*2*PI) Else Qs(K) =0 If AFF (K) != 0 Then Qa (K) =exp (-(CYC/1000)* AFF(K)*2*PI) Else Qa(K) =0 PASL = LASL = ALTP = SLTP =0; RE = NACC =0; R1(K)=IN IF (R1 (K) +OFF)> IN) THEN R2(K) = R1 (K) +OFF ELSE R2(K) = IN IF (STI > R2 (K)) THEN R2(K) = STI CPT1=CPT2=R4(K)=0 SFFP=SFF AFFP=AFF ELSE If SFF (K) != 0 Then If SFF (K) != SFF (K-1) Then Qs (K) =exp (- (CYC/1000)* SFF(K)*2*PI) Else Qs(K) = Qs (K-1). Else Qs(K) =0 If AFF (K) != 0 Then If AFF (K) != AFF (K-1) Then Qa (K) =exp (-(CYC/1000)* AFF(K)*2*PI) Else Qa(K) = Qa (K-1). Else Qa(K) =0 R1 (K) = IN (K) + Qs*( R1 (K-1)- IN (K)) IF (R1 (K)+OFF)> IN) THEN R2(K) = R1 (K) +OFF



abcd

ELSE R2(K) = IN IF (STI > R2 (K)) THEN R2(K) = STI R3(K)= (R2(K)- R2(K-1))*(1000/CYC) R4 (K) = R3(K) + Qa*( R4(K-1)- R3(K)) NACC (K)=R4(K)* TST IF (NACC(K)<= TA1) THEN RE= 0 PASL = 0 ELSE PASL = 1 IF (NACC(K)<= TA2) THEN RE= (NACC- TA1)* G1 ELSE RE= (TA2- TA1)* G1+(NACC- TA2)* G2* ENDIF ENDIF IF (ALTP!=0) IF (NACC(K)< (ALT-ALHY)); ALTP=0 ELSE (ALTP=1) ELSE IF (NACC(K)> ALT); ALTP=1 ELSE (ALTP=0) ENDIF IF (SLTP!=0) IF (IN (K)< (SLT-SLHY)); SLTP=0 ELSE (SLTP=1) ELSE IF (IN (K)> SLT); SLTP =1 ELSE (SLTP =0) ENDIF IF ((ALTP)OR(SLTP)) THEN IF (CPT1 =0) THEN CPT1 =T1 ELSE IF (CPT1>CYC) CPT1= CPT1-CYC ELSE CPT1 =0 CPT2 =T2 ENDIF ELSE CPT1 =0 ENDIF IF (CPT2>CYC) CPT2= CPT2-CYC ELSE CPT2 =0 ENDIF IF ((CPT2!=0)OR (CPT1!=0)) THEN LASL = 1 ELSE LASL =0 ENDIF ENDIF



abcd



Range Mand. Connection

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

Inputs IN input (Turbine Speed). D N 0 to+32000

(0 to 320,00 %) Y Y

Outputs RE : output (progressive

limitation) D Y 0 to+32000

(0 to 320,00 %) N Y 0

NACC: Normalised ACCeleration D Y 0 to+32000 (0 to 320,00 %)

N Y 0

PASL: Progressive Acceleration Speed Limitation indicator

BOOL Y 1 for Progressive Acceleration Speed Limitation Indicator

N Y 0

LASL: Logical Acceleration Speed Limitation output

BOOL Y 1 for Logical Acceleration Speed Limitation

N Y 0

Parame ters

SFF Speed Filter cut off Frequency.

D N 0 to 2500 (0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive)

N 0 Y

OFF Offset added to filtered speed.

D N 0 to+1000 (0 to 10,00 %)

N 0 Y

STI Speed turbine Threshold Inhibition.

D N 0 to+12000 (0 to 120,00 %)

N 0 Y

TST Turbine Specific Time. D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

N 100 Y

AFF Acceleration Filter cut off Frequency.

D N 0 to 2500 (0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive)

N 0 Y

TA1 First Threshold Acceleration for progressive action by G1.

D N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00%)

N 10000

Y

G1 First Gradient for progressive action,

D N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00)

N 0 Y

TA2 Second Threshold Acceleration for progressive action by G2.

D N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00%)

N 10000

Y

G2 Second Gradient for progressive action,

D N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00)

N 0 Y

SLT Speed turbine Logical action Threshold.

D N 0 to+12000 (0 to 120,00 %)

N 10400

Y

SLHY Speed turbine Logical action Hysteresis.

D N 0 to+2000 (0 to 20,00 %)

N 0 Y

ALT Acceleration turbine Logical action Threshold.

D N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00%)

N 10000

Y

ALTHY Acceleration turbine Logical action Hysteresis.

D N 0 to+2000 (0 to 20.00%)

N 0 Y

T1 Time Threshold for prolongation by T2.

D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

N 0 Y

T2 Prolongation Time if action duration is bigger than T1.

D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

N 0 Y

9.4 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) ALTP Acceleration Logical Threshold (K-1) B - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable



abcd

SLTP Speed Logical Threshold (K-1) B - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable R1P Turbine Speed filter output (K-1) D - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable R2P Turbine Speed Max selector output (K-1) D - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable R4P Turbine Acceleration filter output (K-1) D - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable SFFP Speed Filter cut off Frequency. (K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable Qs Pre-calculated coefficient Qs(K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable AFFP Acceleration Filter cut off Frequency. (K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable Qa Pre-calculated coefficient Qa(K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable CPT1 Internal count for T1 measurement D - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable CPT2 Internal count for T2 measurement D - Redundant Variable Internal variables : 2 booleans and 11 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).


Default array


ASLMC().



abcd

Section 10 CD_(I,D) : AUTO / MANU FUNCTION

CD_I Specification version : 1.6 (04/10/2002) CD_D Specification version : 1.6 (04/10/2002)


10.2 Function

SL TY ty=0 -> %/s; =1 ->%/min

LO, HIRST

INC0

INV

IND

DED 0 RE

AUTO

HL, LL

MAN

MAN=1 -> mode manu ; =0 ->mode auto

s

α

∆y=α∗∆n

+∆y

−∆y

s

s

s

s



abcd

Inputs : IN : Analogue input to be copied into automatic mode output, IND : Request logic input + manual, DED : Request logic input - manual, RST : Operator output reset logic input, MAN : Manual mode selection logic input, INC: Initial Command in MANUAL MODE INV: Initial Value for MANUAL MODE Parameterization : SL : Analogue input slope value in manual mode, TY: Logic input selecting slope units (0 : %/s ;1 : %/mn) HI : High limit value. LO : Low limit value. Outputs : RE : Result C/D operator. HL : Logic output; High Limit LL : Logic output; Low Limit If RST (K) = 1 Then RE (K) = 0 Else If MAN (K)= 0 (Auto Mode) Then RE (K) = IN (K). If(INC(K)==1) REP1000=INV(K) Else REP1000(K)=IN(K) Else If DED (K) =1 ET IND (K) =1 Then RE (K) = RE (K-1). Else If DED (K) =1 AND TY(K) =0 Then REP1000 (K) = REP1000 (K-1)- SL (K) ( %/sec, related to Te). RE(K)=REP1000(K) Else If DED (K) =1 AND TY(K) =1 Then REP1000 (K) = REP1000 (K-1)- SL (K) ( %/min, , related to Te). RE(K)=REP1000(K) Else If IND (K) =1 AND TY(K) =0 Then REP1000 (K) = REP1000 (K-1)+ SL (K) ( %/sec, , related to Te). RE(K)=REP1000(K) Else If IND (K) =1 AND TY(K) =1 Then REP1000 (K) = REP1000 (K-1)+ SL (K) ( %/min, , related to Te). RE(K)=REP1000(K) If RE (K) >= HI Then RE (K) = HI ; HL=1 If RE (K) <= LO Then RE (K) = LO ; LL=1 If HI<=LO Then Re (K) = HI ; HL=1 ; LL=1



Connection Def.

value Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN input I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) IND Increase demand BOOL Y N 0 Y DED Decrease demand BOOL Y N 0 Y MAN manual order BOOL Y Y Y INC Initial value selector BOOL Y N 0 Y INV Second initial value I/D Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) N 0 Y

RST Reset order BOOL Y N 0 Y Outputs

RE Result limited between LO and HI

I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

Y Y 0

HL High Limit BOOL Y N Y - 0 LL Low Limit BOOL Y N Y - 0

Parameters

LO © Minimum value for RE : RE>=LO

I/D Y -20000 to+ 20000 (-200,00 to 0 %)

N -20000 Y

HI © Maximum value for RE : RE<=HI

I/D Y 0 to+20000 (0 to 200,00 %)

N 20000 Y

TY Slope units selector BOOL Y 0 : %/s ;1 : %/mn N 0 Y SL Slope rate in manual

mode I/D N 0 to+32767

(0 to 327.67 %/s (if Ty =0) ; %/mn (if Ty =1)

Y Y

10.4 Use

10.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) REP1000 Internal counter Double 0 R

Internal variables : 6 booleans and 5 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).



CD_D().



abcd



abcd

Section 11 COPY_TABLE : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES

COPY_TABLE Specification version : 1.1 (01/19/04)


11.2 Function

This function copy Nb elements from input table to output table when it is validating. This copy works with offset in both tables It can be used between different table types (for ex Word table to Double table) No overflow check. Inputs : INP INPut table OFFIN OFFset for INput table

OFFRE OFFset for output table (RE) NB NumBer of element to copy VAL input for VALidate copy Outputs : RE : output table if VAL OR INIT then I = OFFIN J = OFFRE LIMIT = OFFIN + NB while {I < LIMIT} RE(J) = INP(I) I = I + 1 J = J + 1 endwhile



abcd

endif



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters value

First scan value

Inputs INP Input table (130

elements) TW/TI/TD N -32000 to+32000

Y - Y

OFFIN Offset in input table

D N 0-129 N 0 Y


D N 0-129 N 0 Y

NB Number of elements to copy

D N 1-130 N 130 Y

VAL Copy validating input

B Y N 1 Y

Outputs RE Output table (130


Y -

Y INP ( Whatever

VAL)

11.4 Use

11.5 SPECIFICATIONS



Internal variables : 1 boolean and 3 integers.


if VAL + INIT then cal OFFIN = I cal OFFRE = J cal OFFIN + NB = LIMIT while {I < LIMIT} cal INP(I) = RE(J) cal I + 1 = I cal J + 1 = J endwhile endif



abcd


none



abcd

Section 12 COPY_TBL7 : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES

COPY_TBL7 Specification version : 1.1 (04/13/04)


12.2 Function

This function copy Nb elements from input table to output table when it is validating. This copy works with offset in both tables It can be used between different table types (for ex Word table to Double table) This FB is the same as "COPY_TABLE" with INPut and RE tables of 119 Word lengths. Inputs : INP INPut table OFFIN OFFset for INput table

OFFRE OFFset for output table (RE) NB NumBer of element to copy VAL input for VALidate copy Outputs : RE : output table if VAL OR INIT then I = OFFIN J = OFFRE LIMIT = OFFIN + NB while {I < LIMIT} if {I < 119}

then if {J < 119} then cal INP(I) = RE(J)



abcd

endif endif

I = I + 1 J = J + 1 endwhile endif



Def. value

Mand. Data


First scan value



Y - Y


W/I/D N 0-118 N 0 Y


W/I/D N 0-118 N 0 Y


W/I/D N 1-119 N 119 Y


B Y N 1 Y



Y -

Y INP ( Whatever

VAL)

12.4 Use

12.5 SPECIFICATIONS





if VAL + INIT then cal OFFIN = I cal OFFRE = J cal OFFIN + NB = LIMIT while {I < LIMIT} if {I < 119}



abcd

then if {J < 119} then cal INP(I) = RE(J) endif endif

cal I + 1 = I cal J + 1 = J endwhile endif


none



abcd

Section 13 COPY_TBLRX3I : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES

COPY_RX3I Specification version : 1.0 (05/17/06)


13.2 Function

This function copy Nb elements from input table to output table when it is validating. This copy works with offset in both tables It can be used between different table types (for ex Word table to Double table) This FB is the same as "COPY_TABLE" with INPut and RE tables of 150 Word lengths. Inputs : INP INPut table OFFIN OFFset for INput table

OFFRE OFFset for output table (RE) NB NumBer of element to copy VAL input for VALidate copy Outputs : RE : output table if VAL OR INIT then I = OFFIN J = OFFRE LIMIT = OFFIN + NB while {I < LIMIT} if {I < 150}

then if {J < 150} then cal INP(I) = RE(J) endif



abcd

endif I = I + 1 J = J + 1 endwhile endif



Def. value

Mand. Data


First scan value



Y - Y


W/I/D N 0-149 N 0 Y


W/I/D N 0-149 N 0 Y


W/I/D N 1-150 N 150 Y


B Y N 1 Y



Y -

Y INP ( Whatever

VAL)

13.4 Use

13.5 SPECIFICATIONS






none



abcd

Section 14 CSAM_(I,D) : CONTROL STATION AUTOMATIC / MANUAL

CSAM_I Specification version : 1.3 (06/05/01) CSAM _D Specification version : 1.3 (06/05/01)


14.2 Function

Description : Control and set point station with CENTRALOG interface. Inputs : INM : Analogue input for manual mode (from CENTRALOG), INA : Analogue input for automatic mode, MS : Manual mode selection, (pulse from CENTRALOG) AS : Automatic mode selection, (pulse from CENTRALOG) MFC : Manual/Auto mode Forcing command,

SMF : Selection of Mode to be Forced, FV : Forcing Value, FVC : Forcing Value command, GI : Galvanometer Input Value, Outputs : RE : Result CSAM operator. ST : State Manual indication, 0=> Auto; 1=> Manu AMFS : Auto Manual Forcing State, 0=> No; 1=> Forced FVS : Forcing Value State, 0=> No; 1=> Forced GO : Galvanometer output



abcd

IF INIT (System INIT) ST = 1 ;RE = 0;GO = 0; FVS =0; AMFS =0;INM_P=INM. ELSE GO = GI; FVS =0; AMFS =0 IF (MS !=AS) THEN (Pulse from CENTRALOG) IF (MS !=0) THEN ST(K) = 1 (Manual selection pulse from CENTRALOG) ELSE IF (AS !=0) THEN ST(K) = 0 (Auto selection pulse from CENTRALOG) IF (ST(K) !=0) THEN (Manual mode)

IF (INM_P != INM ) THEN RE = INM (Manual input valid); INM_P=INM;

ELSE RE = INA (Auto mode) IF (MFC !=0) THEN AMFS=1 IF (SMF !=0) THEN

ST(K) = 1 ; IF (INM_P != INM ) RE = INM (Forcing manual mode) ; INM_P=INM;

ELSE RE = INA (Forcing Auto mode) ; ST(K) = 0; IF (FVC !=0) THEN RE = FV; FVS = 1



Range Mand. Connec

tion

Def. value Mand.

Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs INM Analogue input for manual mode

output. (from CENTRALOG) I/D. Y -20000 to 20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %)N 0 Y

INA Analogue input for automatic mode output.

I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

MS Manual mode selection, (pulse from CENTRALOG)

BOOL Y N 0 Y

AS Automatic mode selection, (pulse from CENTRALOG)

BOOL Y N 0 Y

MFC Manual/Auto mode Forcing command,

BOOL Y N 0 Y

SMF Selection of Mode to be Forced, BOOL Y N 0 Y FV Forcing Value I/D. Y -20000 to 20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %)N 0 Y

FVC Forcing Value command BOOL Y N 0 Y GI Galvanometer Input Value I/D. Y -20000 to 20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %)N 0 Y

Outputs RE Result CSAM operator. I/D. Y -20000 to 20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %)Y Y 0

ST State Manual indication,1=> Manual mode

BOOL. Y - N Y 1

AMFS Auto Manual Forcing State, 0=> No; 1=> Forced

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

FVS Forcing Value State, 0=> No; 1=> Forced

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

GO Galvanometer output with GI value

I/D N -20000 to 20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N Y 0

Parameters



abcd


Range Mand. Connec

tion

Def. value Mand.

Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

14.4 Use

14.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) ST State Manual indication,1=> Manual mode BOOL. 1 R

INM_P Last Analogue input for manual mode output. (from CENTRALOG) D INM R

Internal variables : 3 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 2 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).



CSAM_D().



abcd

Section 15 CLEAR_CTL_FAULTS : CLEAR THE FAULTS OF CONTROLLER

CLEAR_CTL_FAULT Specification version : 1.0 (09/26/06)

15.1 REPRESENTATION

15.2 FUNCTION

This function block will clear the fault table, (like P80 software), according the value of CL_PLC (1) and/or of CL_IO (1) variables. The output DF will return 1 if successful and 0 if unsuccessfull.

15.3 ARGUMENTS CHARACTERISTICS


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

CL_PLC Input D Y - N - N - -

CL_IO Input D Y - N - N - -

Outputs

DF Default D N - N - Y - -

15.4 USE :

• Parameters to initialize : None

• Scheme : It is necessary to use a TP_D block on the inputs CL_PLC et CL_IO, (with 1 second like parameter) to avoid a re-triggering more than once per second.



abcd

• Associated FGT : None

15.5 SPECIFICATION

15.5.1 Internal Variables and State variables

• 5 booleans.

15.5.2 Function block code

15.5.3 Basic function used

CLEAR_CTL_FAULTS().



abcd

Section 16 DBF_D : DEAD BAND FUNCTION

DBF_D Specification version : 1.4 (01/25/01)

16.1 REPRESENTATION

16.2 FUNCTION

This function block calculates the value of output RE based on the standardized input IN.

There is two type of dead band, and for the both types the MAX corresponds at the positive gap and MIN corresponds at the negative gap:

The first is : The output RE is equal to VAL if input IN is inside the range of (VAL - | MIN | ) and (VAL - | MAX | ), and outside this range the output RE is equal input IN.

The second is : The output RE is equal to VAL if input IN is inside the range of (VAL - | MIN | ) and (VAL - | MAX | ). Outside this range the output RE is equal to (IN + | MIN | ) if input IN is lower than (VAL - | MIN | ) and output RE is equal to (IN - | MAX |) if input IN is higher than (VAL + | MAX | ).

TY 1

IN RE

MIN

VAV

MAX

TY <>1

IN RE

MIN

VAV

MAX



abcd

Case of TY = 1

If VAL - | MIN| ≤ IN ≤ VAL + | MAX| Then RE = VAL Else RE = IN Endif

Case of TY <> 1

If IN < VAL - | MIN| Then RE = IN + | MIN| Else If VAL - | MIN| ≤ IN ≤ VAL + | MAX| Then RE = VAL Else RE = IN - | MAX| Endif Endif



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN Input W,I,L,D N - Y - Y - -

Outputs

RE Result W,I,L,D N - Y - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

TY Type of dead band B N - N 1 Y - -

MIN Negative gap related to VAL

W,L N ≥ 0 Y - Y - -

MAX Positive gap related to VAL

W,L N ≥ 0 Y - Y - -

VAL Value of RE inside the dead band

W,I,L,D N - N 0 Y - -



abcd

16.4 USE :


• Scheme : None


16.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 1 boolean and 1 double.



DBF_D().



abcd

Section 17 DER_D : DIFFERENTIATOR

DER_D Specification version : 1.1 (12/18/00)


17.2 Function

This block has the Laplace Transfer Function as follows :

sTfsTdsF*1

*)(+

=

• INITIALIZATION : The Init value of the output is 0, like the state variable.

• NORMAL OPERATION : The block output is positioned in accordance with the normal operation of the Laplace Transfer Function : the derivative action time constant Td may be written as a variable above the symbol or as an optional input parameter to the function block. The filtering time constant Tf is an optional parameter. If no value is specified, it is assumed to be 3*Ts(Tsampling).



Default Value

Mandatory Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN

Input

ANY_NUM

Y

] [+∞∞− ;

Y

-

N

-

-

Outputs RE

Output or Result

ANY_NUM

N

] [+∞∞− ;

Y

-

Y

-

0

Parameters INT

DINT

Td

Derivative time constant REAL

N

[ [∞;0 100 = 1s

[ [∞;0 100 = 1s

[ [∞;0

Y

-

N

-

-

INT Tf

Filtering time DINT

N

[ [∞;0 100 = 1s

[ [∞;0 100 = 1s

N

3 x Ts

Y

Ts×≥ 3

-



abcd

constant REAL [ [∞;0

This block can be real, integer or double integer. IN, Re, Td & Tf are the same type for each type of block.

17.4 Use


• Tf to 3 Tsampling if Tf doesn’t exist.


IN : INPUT : ANY_NUM input, IN1 mandatory. RE : OUTPUT : ANY_NUM output, mandatory. Td : DERIVATIVE ACTION TIME CONSTANT: ANY_NUM input. Tf : FILTERING TIME CONSTANT: ANY_NUM input.


- Td and Tf are User parameters : Td is mandatory, but not Tf. This block is not an historical block.

Associated FGT :

None. Scheme

z1

0

++

*

-+*

IN

Ts

Gain

1/x

RE

TdTf

*



abcd

17.5 Specification :


The output of Z-1 block is a state variable. Internal variables : 4 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).


None.


DER_D().



abcd

Section 18 DIVMC_(I,D) : DIVISION

DIVMC _I Specification version : 1.1 (12/04/00) DIVMC _D Specification version : 1.1 (12/04/00)


18.2 Function

Inputs : NU : Numerator, DE : Denominator, Outputs : RE : Analogue output ENO : Output Error ENO = 0 IF ( NU<-32000 ) THEN ENO = 1 ; NU=-32000 ENDIF IF ( NU > 32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; NU= 32000 ENDIF IF ( DE<-32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; DE=-32000 ENDIF IF ( DE > 32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; DE= 32000 ENDIF IF (NU=0) RE = 0 ELSE

IF (DE=0) ( forbiden case ) THEN ENO = 1 RE = (signe of NU)*32000

ELSE RE = (NU*10000)/ DE ( in double length)

IF (RE < -32000 ) THEN ENO = 1; RE = -32000 ENDIF IF (RE > 32000 ) THEN ENO = 1; RE = 32000 ENDIF ENDIF

ENDIF



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs NU Numerator I/D Y -32000 to+32000

(-320,00 to 320,00 %) Y - Y

DE Denominator

I/D Y -32000 to+32000 (-320,00 to 320,00 %)

Y - Y

Outputs RE Output I/D N -32000 to+32000

(-320,00 to 320,00 %) Y -

Y 0

ENO Output Error BOOL N 1 = Output Error or input out of range

N - Y 0

18.4 Use

18.5 SPECIFICATIONS



Internal variables : 1 boolean and 2 doubles.



DIVMC_D().



abcd

Section 19 DMOF : DRIVE MODULE WITH OUTPUT THAT MAY DEPENDS ON FEEDBACK

DMOF Specification version : 1.0 (10/24/03)

19.1 REPRESENTATION

19.2 FUNCTION

This treatment controls an electrical actuator with 1 or 2 logic orders commands without intermediate position feedback but with possibility to stop moving at any position in middle travel.The commande are reset when the corresponding feedback is reached.

• INITIALIZATION : The treatment is set in accordance to [INIT] parameter :

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set in actuator OFF state with the output [OFF_C] set to 1.



abcd

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set in actuator ON state with the output [ON_C] set to 1.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 2, then the treatment is initialized in accordance with the actuator position (the actuator stays ON or OFF without OFF or ON orders).

• NORMAL OPERATION :

After an ON demand (non-latched) [A(M)_ON_DMD] and if release ON [REL_ON] is present, the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C]. The ON feedback [ON] confirms the actuator ON [ON_ST] and resets ON order [ON_C] .

After a OFF demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OFF_DMD] and if release OFF [REL_OFF] is present, the actuator OFF order is transmitted [OFF_C]. The OFF feedback [OFF] confirms the actuator OFF [OFF_ST] and resets OFF order [OFF_C].

If the two demands (non-latched) [A(M)_ON_DMD] and [A(M)_OFF_DMD] are present at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_OFF_DMD] have priority.

If the treatment releases a OFF or ON demand, it is possible to have the reverse demand before the end of current stroke.

The orders [ON ORD] and [OFF_C] are exclusives.

During ON or OFF moving it’s possible to send stop [STOP]. In this case, the ON order [ON_C] and OFF order [OFF_C] are reset and stop state is active [STP_ST] then ON time [ON_T] and OFF time [OFF_T] are suspended. After taking away the stop request the function will react again, ON order, OFF order and monitoring time are unlocked and it’s possible to reverse the moving, in this last case, the time are reinitiated and stop state is deactivated [STP_ST].

• SAFETY OPERATION :

The SAFETY OPERATION has highest priority and does no need release condition even if disturb [DIST] input is present. - ACTUATOR SAFETY POSITION

If safety ON (latched) [SAF_ON] is set, the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C] and the treatment becomes in safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST].

If safety OFF (latched) [SAF_OFF] is set, the actuator OFF order is transmitted, [OFF_C] and the treatment becomes in safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST].

If the two demands [SAF_ON] and [SAF_OFF] are present at the same time, it’s [SAF_OFF] priority.

During the safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST] the actuator ON order is permanent [ON_C].

During the safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST] the actuator OFF order is permanent [OFF_C].

- SAFETY POSITION ACKNOWLEDGES :



abcd

If the treatment is in safety [SAF_ON_ST] or [SAF_OFF_ST], and the [SAF_ON] and [SAF_OFF] are no more existing then after acknowledge [ACK_DMD] the actuator returns to normal operation.

• DEGRADED OPERATION :

- ACTUATOR IN PROBLEM

The state problem [PROBLEM] lock the AUTO and MANUAL command.

If the control cell is disturbed [DIST] presence the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM] and both orders [ON_C] and [OFF_C] are reset.

- ACTUATOR DISCREPANCY

The states discrepancy [DISC_ON] and [DISC_OFF] is just information and has no infuence on the command.

If the actuator is in ON state [ON_ST] or safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST] and [ON] is lost or [OFF] is present, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON].

If the actuator is in OFF state [OFF_ST] or safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST] and [OFF] is lost or [ON] is present, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_OFF].

If the real ON time (contactor response time [ON]) is superior to the ON time [ON_T] parameter then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON].

Ifthe real OFF time (contactor response time [OFF]) is superior to the OFF time [OFF_T] parameter, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_OFF].

[DES_T] corresponds to the maximum time allowed to loose the feedback after ON or OFF order. If the real feedback disengaging time is superior to the [DES_T] parameter then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON] or [DISC_OFF] in function of the current command.

- ACTUATOR IN STOP ( e.g :Torque limitswitch )

The torque limitswitch should be connected on stop input [STP].

If the feedback stop input [STP] is present then both orders [ON_C] and [OFF_C] are reset ( pulse 1s ) after the dirve is able to take in account new command even if the stop input [STP] is always present.

- PROBLEM ACKNOWLEDGES :

If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DIST] and not [STP] combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the actuator in problem state and allows a return to normal operation.

• ONE OUTPUT ODER CONFIGURATION :

If the parameter [SOL1] is set then the drive can be used for the actuator with only one order. This single order is [ON_C] like monostable output. It is set when the normal command ON or safety ON are fullfilled and it’s only reset by reverse command OFF or safety OFF when fullfilled.



abcd

The problem state [PROBLEM], the discrepancy state [DISC_ON], [DISC_OFF] the torque function [STP] have no action on this output.

• TRANSCIENT OPERATION :

The functional states [ON_ST], [OFF_ST], [SAF_ON_ST], [SAF_OFF_ST] and [PROBLEM] are exclusives.

During safety ON or safety OFF phase the functional state [SAF_ON_ST], [SAF_OFF_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_ON], [SAF_OFF] disappear and after acknowledge [ACK_DMD] then to return in normal mode.

During ON and OFF phases (waiting feedback response or feedback lost), the functional states [ON_ST], [OFF_ST] and [PROBLEM] are not positioned.

When the treatment changes from degraded mode or safety mode to normal mode, it waits a demand or a feedback return to place it in the corespondent functional states.

• LOCAL MODE :

When the input [LOC] is set the drive goes in local state [LOC_ST] , during this state the orders from drive to actuator have no effect and the drive follow the physical status. To come back in normal operation under AUTO, MANU, SAFETY control then the input [LOC] should not more present, and the his state should be acknowledge with [ACK_DMD].

• GENERATION OF ALARMS, OF VISUALISATION INFO AND MISCELLANEOUS :

The [CUR_STEP] data indicates the current step of the treatment sequence.

The [MCNE] signal is an alarm, it’s result of manual command witch is not reached.

The [SCA] signal is an alarm, it’s result of safety condition in operation.

The [DISC_OFF] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between OFF command and OFF feedback.

The [DISC_ON] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between ON command and ON feedback.

The [DLOCOFF] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between drive ON command and local OFF feedback.

The [DLOCON] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between drive OFF command and local ON feedback.

The [LOCEX] signal is an alarm used to inform operator that the drive is no more in local and it should be acknowledge to come back in remote control mode.

The [DIST_ST] signal is a global alarm, result of or between [PROBLEM], [DISC_ON], [DISC_OFF], [MCNE], [SCA], [STP_ST], [STP], [DLOCOFF], [DLOCON], [LOCEX] and apparition of local demand [LOC].

In each step it’s possible to reset the sequence at step 1 when [RESET] = 1.

• GENERALITY :



abcd

If the input [ON] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (ON time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the ON order is present as long as the demand is present.

If the input [OFF] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (OFF time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the OFF order is present as long as the demand is present.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

A_ON_DMD Auto ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_ON_DMD Manu ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

REL_ON Release ON B N - N 1 Y - -

SAF_ON Safety ON B N - N 0 Y - -

A_OFF_DMD Auto OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_OFF_DMD Manu OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

REL_OFF Release OFF B N - N 1 Y - -

SAF_OFF Safety OFF B N - N 0 Y - -

ACK_DMD Acknowledge dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

STOP Stop demand B N - N 0 Y - -

ON Fdc ON B Y - N (*) N -

OFF Fdc OFF B Y - N (*) N -

DIST Disturbed ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -

LOC Local mode ( MCC) B Y - N 0 Y - -

STP Stop signal ( MCC ) used for torque

B Y - N 0 Y - -

Outputs

CUR_STEP Current step W N [ 1 – 1000 ] N - Y - 1

ON_ST ON state B N N - Y - 0

OFF_ST OFF state B N N - Y - 0

SAF_OFF_ST Safety OFF state B N N - Y - 0

SAF_ON_ST Safety ON state B N N - Y - 0

STOP_ST Stop state B N N - Y - 0

LOC_ST Local state B N N - Y - 0

PROBLEM Actuator in problem B N N - Y - 0

DIST_ST Actuator in disturbance

B N Y - Y - 0



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

HMI_ST Drive state for HMI animation

W N N - Y - 0

MCNE Manual command not effective

B N N - Y - 0

SCA Safety condition active

B N N - Y - 0

DISC_OFF Normal value ON actual value OFF

B N N - Y - 0

DISC_ON Normal value OFF actual value ON

B N N - Y - 0

DLOCON Drive normally OFF and local ON

B N N - Y - 0

DLOCOFF Drive normally OFF and local ON

B N N - Y - 0

LOCEX Local operation exit B N N - Y - 0

ON_C ON order B N N - Y - 0

OFF_C OFF order B N N - Y - 0

STP_C Stop order B Y N - Y - 0

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

SOL1 Selection 1 order B N - N 0 Y - -

RESET Reset sequence to step 1

B N - N 0 Y - -

INIT Initial value W N { 0 , 1 , 2 } Y - Y - -

OFF_T Feedback response time after an OFF demand

W N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -

ON_T Feedback response time after an ON demand

W N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -

DES_T Feedback disengaging time after an ON or OFF demand

W N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -

(*) See CONFIGURATION chapter.

19.4 CONFIGURATION

• TYPE BKR : Circuit breaker Without STOP command. With parameter [SOL1] at 0

• TYPE EI1, EI2 : Electrical actuator with integrated control With or Without STOP command. With parameter [SOL1] at 0



abcd

• TYPE EM1, EM2 : Electric actuator without integrated control. With or Without STOP command. With parameter [SOL1] at 0

• TYPE MO1U, FCU or MO3U : Motor for Pump, Fan or electrical heater ( also for package system ) - Without test feedback from MCC, with only ON feedback and 1 order. With parameter [SOL1] at 1

• TYPE SOL1A, SOL1AU : Single coil solenoid with feedback With or Without DIST signal. With parameter [SOL1] at 1

• TYPE SOL1B, SOL1BU : Single coil solenoid without feedback With or Without DIST signal. With parameter [SOL1] at 1

• TYPE SOL2A, SOL2AU : Dual coil solenoid with feedback With or Without DIST signal. With parameter [SOL1] at 0

• TYPE SOL2B, SOL2BU : Dual coil solenoid without feedback With or Without DIST signal. With parameter [SOL1] at 0

• Precedent type with one feedback missing (ON or OFF). If [ON] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not applied. If [OFF] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not applied.



abcd

• USE :

• Parameters to initialize : Not applicable

• Scheme : None

• Associated FGT :

19.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables :

• 17 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 10 integers and 17 words (amongst which 4 state variables) for DMOF.


None.


DMOF().



abcd

Section 20 DMOS : DRIVE MODULE WITH OUTPUT STORED

DMOS Specification version : 1.0 (10/24/03)

20.1 REPRESENTATION

20.2 FUNCTION

This treatment controls actuator with 1 or 2 orders commands without intermediate position switch, The command memory are never reset throug feedback, the commanded output signal only changes when the request command changes.


If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set actuator OFF state with the output [OFF_C] set to 1.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set actuator ON state with the output [ON_C] set to 1.



abcd

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 2, then the treatment is initialized in accordance with the actuator position (the actuator stays ON or OFF without ON or OFF orders).


After a start demand (non-latched) [A(M)_ON_DMD] and if release starting [REL_ON] is present, the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C]. The contactor return [ON] confirms the actuator ON [ON_ST] and ON order stay active [ON_C] until reverse command.

After a OFF demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OFF_DMD] and if release OFF [REL_OFF] is present, the actuator OFF order is transmitted [OFF_C]. The contactor return [OFF] confirms the actuator OFF [OFF_ST] and OFF order stay active [OFF_C] until reverse command.

If the two demands [A(M)_ON_DMD] and [A(M)_OFF_DMD] are present at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_OFF_DMD] have priority.

If the treatment realizes a OFF or ON demand, it is possible to have the reverse demand after the output [ON_C] or [OFF_C] is no more presents.

The orders [ON_C] and [OFF_C] are exclusives.


The SAFETY OPERATION has highest priority and does no need release condition even if disturb [DIST] input is present.

- ACTUATOR SAFETY POSITION

If safety ON (latched) [SAF_ON] is set, the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C] and the treatment becomes in safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST].

If safety OFF (latched) [SAF_OFF] is set, the actuator OFF order is transmitted, [OFF_C] and the treatment becomes in safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST].


During the safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST] the actuator ON order is permanent [ON_C].

During the safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST] the actuator OFF order is permanent [OFF_C].

- SAFETY POSITION ACKNOWLEDGES:

If the treatment is in safety [SAF_ON_ST] or [SAF_OFF_ST], and the [SAF_ON] and [SAF_OFF] are no more existing then after acknowledge [ACK_DMD] the actuator returns to normal operation.



The state problem [PROBLEM] lock the AUTO and MANUAL command.



abcd

If the control cell is disturbed [DIST] presence the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM] and both orders [ON_C] and [OFF_C] are reset..

- ACTUATOR DISCREPANCY

The states discrepancy [DISC_ON] and [DISC_OFF] is just information and has no infuence on the command.

If the actuator is in ON state [ON_ST] or safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST] and [ON] is lost or [OFF] is present, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON].

If the actuator is in OFF state [OFF_ST] or safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST] and [OFF] is lost or [ON] is present, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_OFF].

If the real ON time (contactor response time [ON]) is superior to the ON time [ON_T] parameter then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON].

Ifthe real OFF time (contactor response time [OFF]) is superior to the OFF time [OFF_T] parameter, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_OFF].

[DES_T] corresponds to the maximum time allowed to loose the feedback after ON or OFF order. If the real feedback disengaging time is superior to the [DES_T] parameter then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON] or [DISC_OFF] in function of the current command.

- PROBLEM ACKNOWLEDGES:

If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DIST] combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the actuator in problem state and allows a return to normal operation.



During safety ON or safety OFF phase the functional state [SAF_ON_ST], [SAF_OFF_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_ON], [SAF_OFF] disappear and after acknowledge [ACK_DMD] then to return in normal mode.

During ON and OFF phases (waiting feedback response or feedback lost), the functional states [ON_ST], [OFF_ST] and [PROBLEM] are not positioned.

• LOCAL MODE :

When the input [LOC] is set the drive goes in local state [LOC_ST] , during this state the orders from drive to actuator have no effect and the drive follow the physical status. To come back in normal operation under AUTO, MANU, SAFETY control then the input [LOC] should not more present, and the his state should be acknowledge with [ACK_DMD].

• RECLOSE OPTION :

When the reclose command OFF [RC_OFF] is set the actuator OFF order is transmitted, [OFF_C] until reverse command even if the reclose command OFF [RC_OFF] is present. The signal [RC_OFF] is send to alarm directly.



abcd

When the reclose command ON [RC_ON] is set and if there is no reclose command OFF [RC_OFF] and no OFF command [SAF_OFF], [A(M)_ON_DMD]&[REL_OFF] since reclose time [RC_TIME] the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C] until reverse command even if the reclose command ON [RC_ON] is present.



The [MCNE] signal is an alarm, it’s result of manual command witch is not reached.

The [SCA] signal is an alarm, it’s result of safety condition in operation.

The [DISC_OFF] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between OFF command and OFF feedback.

The [DISC_ON] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between ON command and ON feedback.

The [DLOCOFF] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between drive ON command and local OFF feedback.

The [DLOCON] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between drive OFF command and local ON feedback.

The [LOCEX] signal is an alarm used to inform operator that the drive is no more in local and it should be acknowledge to come back in remote control mode .

The [DIST_ST] signal is a global alarm, result of or between [PROBLEM], [DISC_ON], [DISC_OFF], [MCNE], [SCA], [RC_OFF], [DLOCOFF], [DLOCON], [LOCEX] and apparition of local demand [LOC].




Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

A_ON_DMD Auto ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_ON_DMD Manu ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

REL_ON Release ON B N - N 1 Y - -

SAF_ON Safety ON B N - N 0 Y - -

A_OFF_DMD Auto OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_OFF_DMD Manu OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

REL_OFF Release OFF B N - N 1 Y - -

SAF_OFF Safety OFF B N - N 0 Y - -

ACK_DMD acknowledge dmd B N - N 0 Y - -



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

RC_ON Reclose ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

RC_OFF Reclose OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

ON Fdc ON B Y - N (*) N -

OFF Fdc OFF B Y - N (*) N -

DIST Disturbed ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -

LOC Local mode ( MCC) B Y - N 0 Y - -

Outputs


ON_ST ON state B N N - Y - 0

OFF_ST OFF state B N N - Y - 0

SAF_OFF_ST Safety OFF state B N N - Y - 0

SAF_ON_ST Safety ON state B N N - Y - 0

PROBLEM Actuator in problem B N N - Y - 0

DIST_ST Actuator in disturbance

B N Y - Y - 0

LOC_ST Local state B N N - Y - 0

HMI_ST Dive state for HMI animation

W N N - Y - 0

MCNE Manual command not effective

B N N - Y - 0

SCA Safety condition active

B N N - Y - 0

DISC_OFF Normal value ON actual value OFF

B N N - Y - 0

DISC_ON Normal value OFF actual value ON

B N N - Y - 0

DLOCON Drive normally OFF and local ON

B N N - Y - 0

DLOCOFF Drive normally OFF and local ON

B N N - Y - 0

LOCEX Local operation exit B N N - Y - 0

ON_C ON order B N N - Y - 0

OFF_C OFF order B N N - Y - 0

Parameters - - - - - - - - -


B N - N 0 Y - -


OFF_T Contactor response time after an OFF demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -

ON_T Contactor response time after an ON demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

DES_T Contactor disengaging time after an ON or OFF demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -

RC_T Reclosing time D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

N - Y - -


20.4 CONFIGURATION

• TYPE LC1 : Local control for package system - It’s maximal I / O configuration with all position feedback.

• TYPE MO1 or FC : Motor for Pump, Fan or electrical heater ( also for package system ) - Without test feedback from MCC, and 2 orders.

• TYPE MO1U, FCU or MO3U : Motor for Pump, Fan or electrical heater ( also for package system ) - Without test feedback from MCC, with only ON feedback and 1 order.

• Precedent type with one feedback missing (ON or OFF). The position feedback is calculated as following: - Without position feedback : If [ON] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created outside the block. If [OFF] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created outside the block.

• USE

• Parameters to initialize : Not applicable.

• Scheme : None.




abcd

20.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : • 17 booleans (amongst which 5 state variables), 10 integers and 18 words (amongst which 5

state variables) for DMOS.


None.


DMOS().



abcd

Section 21 DOIO : DO_IO FUNCTION OF CTOOLKIT

DOIO Specification version : 1.2 (03/08/02)


21.2 Function

This function is used to update inputs or outputs for one scan while the program is running. It can be used to update selected I/O during the program, in addition to the normal I/O scan.

If input references are specified, the function allows the most recent values of inputs to be

obtained for program logic. If output references are specified, PLCC_do_io updates outputs based on the most current values stored in I/O memory. I/O points are serviced in increments of entire I/O modules; the PLC adjusts the references, if necessary that are not configured.

Inputs : VLD : Block validation : the block is executed only if VLD is set to 1; MEMSTART : Start (offset), of memory zone to be updated, is one based :

• in units of words for word types (%AI, %AQ, %R) ; • in units of bits for bit types (%I, %Q) : discrete offsets are in bits and must be

byte aligned : 1, 9, 17, 25, … are valid for offsets, but 2-8, 10-16, 18-24, 26-32, … are invalid.

• LENGHT : Lenght, of the reading/writing zone, is one based :

• in units of words for word types (%AI, %AQ, %R) ; • in units of bits for bit types (%I, %Q) : discrete lengths are in bits and must be

byte aligned : 8, 16, 24, 32, … are valid for lenghts, but 1-7, 9-15, 17-23, 25-31, … are invalid.

Parameter : MEMTYPE : Type of memory zone to be updated :

• 1 for %I,



abcd

• 2 for %Q, • 3 for %R, • 4 for %AI, • 5 for %AQ;

Outputs : ENO : Output Error : This output is set to 1 if there is an error on the DOIO function or if the MEMTYPE is bad (<1 or >5).



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs VLD Block

validation BOOL N 1 = Block executed Y - Y

MEMSTART Start of memory

W N [ [∞;0 N 0 Y

LENGTH Length of memory

W N [ [∞;0 N 0 Y

Outputs ENO Output

Error BOOL N 1 = DOIO Error

or MEMSTART out of range

N - Y

Parameters

MEMTYPE Type of memory

W N [1,…,5] Y - Y

21.4 Use

21.5 SPECIFICATIONS



Internal variables : 1 boolean.



abcd



DOIO().



abcd

Section 22 EA2 / EA2W : ELECTRIC ACTUATOR WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS COMMAND




abcd

22.1 REPRESENTATION



abcd

22.2 FUNCTION

This treatment controls an electrical actuator with 2 logic orders commands without intermediate position switch but with possibility to stop moving at any position in middle travel.


If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set in actuator closed state with the output [CLG_ORDER] set to 1.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set in actuator opened state with the output [OPG_ORDER] set to 1.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 2, then the treatment is initialized in accordance with the actuator position (the actuator stays opened or closed without closing or opening orders).


After an opening demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and if release opening [REL_OPG] is present, the actuator opening order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER]. The open limit switch [OPD] confirms the actuator opened [OPG_ST] and resets opening order [OPG_ORDER] .

After a closing demand (non-latched) [A(M)_CLG_DMD] and if release closing [REL_CLG] is present, the actuator closing order is transmitted [CLG_ORDER]. The close limit switch [CLD] confirms the actuator closed [CLG_ST] and resets closing order [CLG_ORDER].

If the two demands (non-latched) [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and [A(M)_CLG_DMD] are present at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_CLG_DMD] have priority.

If the treatment releases a closing or opening demand, it is possible to have the reverse demand after the output [OPG_ORDER] or [CLG_ORDER] is no more present.

The orders [OPG ORDER] and [CLG_ORDER] are exculsives.

During opening or closing moving it’s possible to send stop [STOP]. In this case, the opening order [OPG_ORDER], closing order [CLG_ORDER], opening time [OPG_T], and closing time [CLG_T] are suspended. After taking away the stop request the function will react again, opening order, closing order and monitoring time are unlocked and it’s possible to reverse the moving, in this last case, the time are reinitiated.


The SAFETY OPERATION has highest priority and does no need release condition. - ACTUATOR SAFETY POSITION



abcd

If safety opening (latched) [SAF_OPG] is set, the actuator opening order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER] is present until the limit switch open [OPD] is true. the treatment becomes in safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] as long as safety opening [SAF_OPG] is set.

If safety closing (latched) [SAF_CLG] is set, the actuator closing order is transmitted, [CLG_ORDER] is present until the limit switch close [CLDD] is true. the treatment becomes in safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] as long as safety closing [SAF_CLG] is set.

If the two demands [SAF_OPG] and [SAF_CLG] are present at the same time, it’s [SAF_CLG] priority.

- SAFETY POSITION ACKNOWLEDGES :

If the treatment is in safety [SAF_OPG_ST] or [SAF_CLG_ST], and the [SAF_OPG] and [SAF_CLG] are no more existing, actuatorthen the actuator returns to normal operation.



If the control cell is disturbed, [DISTURB] or [TORQUE] presence, the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the actuator is in opening [OPG_ST] or safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] and limit switch [OPD] is lost or [CLD] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the actuator is in closing [CLG_ST] safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] and limit switch [CLD] is lost or [OPD] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the real opening time (limit switch time [OPD]) is superior to the opening time [OPG_T] parameter or the real closing time (limit switch time [CLD]) is superior to the closing time [CLG_T] parameter, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

[DES_T] corresponds to the maximum time allowed to loose the limit switch after opening or closing order. If the real limit switch disengaging time is superior to the [DES_T] parameter then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the actuator opened limit switch is defected [OPD_DEF] or the actuator closed limit switch is defected [CLD_DEF] the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the actuator opened limit switch [OPD] is present at the same time than the actuator closed limit switch [CLD] more than 1 cycle time then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], the actuator order (closing or opening) is unchanged, only [PROBLEM] output is present.


If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DISTURB] and not [TORQUE] combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the actuator in problem state and allows a return to normal operation.



abcd


The functional states [OPG_ST], [CLG_ST], [SAF_OPG_ST], [SAF_CLG_ST] and [PROBLEM] are exclusives.

During safety opening or safety closing phase the functional state [SAF_OPG_ST], [SAF_CLG_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_OPG], [SAF_CLG] disappear.

During opening and closing phases (waiting limit switch response or limit switch lost), the functional states [OPG_ST], [CLG_ST] and [PROBLEM] are not positioned.

When the treatment changes from degraded mode or safety mode to normal mode, it waits a demand or a limit switch return to place it in the corespondent functional states.

If the actuator moves after an opening or closing demand and the treatment receives the reverse demand, then is not accepted.



The [TORQUE] signal is an alarm, the protection is done in the MCC. If it’s necessary to create alarm, then this must be done outside the block.

The [CUR_CLG_T] data indicates the current value of closing time, this value is in unit 0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [CLG_T] and decrease until 0.

The [CUR_OPG_T] data indicates the current value of opening time, this value is in unit 0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [OPG_T] and decrease until 0.

The [CUR_DES_T] data indicates the current value of disengaging time, this value is in unit 0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [DES_T] and decrease until 0.


• GENERALITY :

If the input [OPD] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (opening time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the opening order is present as long as the demand is present.

If the input [CLD] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (closing time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the closing order is present as long as the demand is present.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

A_OPG_DMD Auto opening dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_OPG_DMD Manu opening dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

REL_OPG Release opening B N - N 1 Y - -

SAF_OPG Safety opening B N - N 0 Y - -

A_CLG_DMD Auto closing dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_CLG_DMD Manu closing dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

REL_CLG Release closing B N - N 1 Y - -

SAF_CLG Safety closing B N - N 0 Y - -

OPD Fdc open B N - N (*) N -

OPD_DEF 1 = Fdc open OPD defect

B Y - N 0 Y - -

CLD Fdc closed B N - N (*) N -

CLD_DEF 1 = Fdc closed CLD defect

B Y - N 0 Y - -


DISTURB Disturbed ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -

STOP Stop demand B N - N 0 Y - -

TORQUE Torque signal B N - N 0 Y - -

Outputs


OPG_ST Opening state B N N - Y - 0

CLG_ST Closing state B N N - Y - 0

SAF_CLG_ST Safety closing state B N N - Y - 0

SAF_OPG_ST Safety opening state

B N N - Y - 0

STOP_ST Stop state B N N - Y - 0

PROBLEM Actuator in problem B N Y - Y - 0

OPG_ORDER Opening order B N Y - Y - 0

CLG_ORDER Closing order B N Y - Y - 0

CUR_CLG_T Current value of closing time in decreasing way

D N N - Y - -

CUR_OPG_T Current value of opening time in decreasing way

D N N - Y - -

CUR_DES_T Current value of disengaging time in decreasing way

D N N - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -


B N - N 0 Y - -



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value


CLG_T Limit switch response time after an closing demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -

OPG_T Limit switch response time after an opening demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -

DES_T Limit switch disengaging time after an opening or closing demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -


22.4 CONFIGURATION

• TYPE EI1 : Electric actuator with integrated control also applicable for packaged system.

• TYPE EM1 : Electric actuator without integrated control. - Without position feedback : If [OPD] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not applied. If [CLD] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not applied.

• USE :


• Scheme : None




abcd

22.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : • 14 booleans (amongst which 2 state variables), 12 doubles (amongst which 3 state

variables), 10 integers and 3 words (amongst which 1 state variable) for EA2; • 14 booleans (amongst which 2 state variables), 9 doubles, 10 integers and 3 words

(amongst which 4 state variables) for EA2W;



EA2().



abcd

Section 23 ENTHALPY_D : ENTHALPY CALCULATION

ENTHALPY_D Specification version : 1.1 (07/30/01)


23.2 Function

Calculation of the enthalpy and the specific volume in range of temperature between 100°C and 600°C, in function of the pressure the water or steam equation is used. State found by the state change . Inputs : PI : steam pressure in percent, TI : steam temperature in percent, SP_PR : speed or precision of calculation Outputs : H : enthalpy in percent HV : enthalpy in KJ/KG ENO : Output Error WP : Water Phase (1 = water , 0 = steam) Parameterisation : PR stream reference pressure in Bars abs, TR stream reference temperature in °C Hysteresis 1 bar and 1 °C Local constants for steam :

R = .0134992 D = 6.70126 E-4 CC = 1.55108 A = .0047331 E = 3.17362 E-5 DD = 1.26591 B = 2.93945 E-3 F = 8.06867 E-5 EE = 1.32735 C = 4.35507 E-6 SIG0 = .0000276



abcd

A0=2003.3277 A1=1169.8648 A2=-8.05536 A3=73.76581 A4=-13.02668 IH=22128.7 TLIM = 600 °C TMIN = 100 °C

Local variables for steam: SIG, TO,

TO2, TO3, TO4, TO7, TO14, TO282, TO32 E1, E2, E3, V0, V1, V2,T,P

Local constants for water :

B0=-37444.869 B1=466453.37 B2=-2666876.8 B3= 9030271.5 B4=-19769400 B5= 28949240 B6=-28309933 B7= 17808942 B8= -

6534676 B9=1065198.5 II=22128.7 L =7.241165e-5 M = 0.7676621 N=1.052358e-11

ff=3.7e8 Gg= 3.122199e8 hh= 199985 kk=1.72 ll=1.362926e16 Nn=0.6537154 Q=6.1191876e-17 qq=62.5 rr=13.10268 Uu=5.8620689e-1 ww=4.1666667e-1 yy=1.0226748e-16 zz=1.5108e-5 Local variables for steam: The Parameters PR and TR cannot be changed after the initialisation. The calculation without specific size for double integer calculation is: ENO = 0 WP(K-1) = WP IF INIT OR HV = 0 OR WP != WP(K-1) THEN IF TR > TLIM OR TR < TMIN THEN HV = 0

VV = 0 ENO = 1 ELSE

IF PR > (TR/100) ** 4 THEN WP = 1 ( WATER)

ELSE WP = 0 ( STEAM) ENDIF SIG =PR/221.287 TO = (TR+273.15)/647.3 TO2 = TO * TO TO3 = TO2 * TO TO4 = TO2 * TO2 TO7 = TO3 * TO4 IF WP=1 THEN ( WATER )

HV=-B0+B1*TO-B2*TO2+B3*TO3+(B5*TO-B6*TO2-B4)*TO4+(B7 +B9*TO2-B8*TO) *TO7 IF SP_PR = 1 THEN (precision requested) TO11 = TO7 * TO4 TOM6 = TO**-6



abcd

VV = 6*hh*TOM6-2*gg*TO U = ff – gg *TO - hh*TOM6 W = U + [kk*U*U + l l(SIG – m*TO)]^0.5 W4T = W**1.33333 E1= Q/W4T[(uu*W-ww*(3.4*U-VV*W+yy*TO-0.72*VV*U] NTO = nn – TO NTO2 = NTO * NTO NTO4 = NTO2 * NTO2 NTO8 = NTO4 * NTO4 E2 = NTO*(L*(nn+TO)+M*NTO8*(nn+9*TO)) -H ZTO11 = zz+TO11 E3 =N*(zz+12*TO11)/(ZTO11*ZTO11)*(qq + rr/2 +SIG/3)*SIG ) HV = HV + IH*(E1 + (E2 - E3)*SIG) ENDIF ELSE ( STEAM )

HV = A0 + A1 * TO + A2 * TO2 +A3 * TO3 + A4 * TO4 IF SP_PR = 1 THEN (precision requested)

TO14 = TO7 * TO7 TO32 = TO14* TO14* TO4 TO282 = TO **2.82 E1 = (3.82 * A / TO282 + 1.32 *E *(CC -SIG / 2) * TO282) * SIG E2 = DD * SIG - TO3 E3 = ((5*B - 3 * E2 * D * SIG) / TO14 +11 * C / TO32) * SIG3 HV = HV - IH * (E1 + E3)

ENDIF ENDIF

ENDIF IF INIT THEN

PIP = TIP = H = 0 ELSE

IF ENO = 0 THEN ( hysteresis ~1 bar and ~1°C)

IF (PI - PIP >= 0.0034 OR PI - PIP <= -0.0034) OR (TI – TIP >= 0.002 OR TI – TIP >= -0.002) THEN

T = TR*TI P = PM*PI

IF T > TLIM OR T < TMIN THEN H = 0 ENO = 1

ELSE IF P > (T/100) ** 4 THEN

WP = 1 ( WATER) ELSE

WP = 0 ( STEAM) ENDIF SIG =P/221.287 TO = (T+273.15)/647.3 TO2 = TO * TO



abcd

TO3 = TO2 * TO TO4 = TO2 * TO2 TO7 = TO3 * TO4 IF WP=1 THEN ( WATER )

H=-B0+B1*TO-B2*TO2+B3*TO3+(B5*TO-B6*TO2- B4)*TO4+(B7 +B9*TO2-B8*TO) *TO7

IF SP_PR = 1 THEN (precision requested) TO11 = TO7 * TO4

TOM6 = TO**-6 V = 6*hh*TOM6-2*gg*TO

U = ff – gg *TO - hh*TOM6 W = U + [kk*U*U + l l(SIG – m*TO)]^0.5

W4T = W**1.33333 E1= Q/W4T[(uu*W-ww*(3.4*U-V*W+yy*TO-0.72*V*U]

NTO = nn – TO NTO2 = NTO * NTO NTO4 = NTO2 * NTO2 NTO8 = NTO4 * NTO4 E2 = NTO*(L*(nn+TO)+M*NTO8*(nn+9*TO)) -H ZTO11 = zz+TO11

E3= N*(zz+12*TO11)/(ZTO11*ZTO11)*(qq + rr/2 +SIG /3 ) *SIG )

H = H + IH*(E1 + (E2 - E3)*SIG ENDIF

ELSE ( STEAM ) H = A0 + A1 * TO + A2 * TO2 +A3 * TO3 + A4 * TO4 IF SP_PR = 1 THEN (precision requested)

TO14 = TO7 * TO7 TO32 = TO14 * TO14 * TO4 TO282 = TO **2.82 E1=(3.82*A/TO282+1.32*E*(CC-SIG/2) *TO282) *SIG E2 = DD * SIG - TO3 E3 = ((5*B -3*E2*D * SIG ) / TO14 +11*C / TO32) * SIG3 H = H - IH * ( E1 + E3 )

ENDIF ENDIF

H = H / HV PIP = PI TIP = TI

ENDIF ENDIF

ENDIF ENDIF



abcd


Name Description Type

Neg


n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

Inputs PI stream pressure in percent D N -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) AND P < (T/100)**4

Y - Y

TI stream temperature in percent D N -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

AND 100°C<= T < 600°C

Y Y

SP_PR speed or precision of calculation

B Y 0 = speed , 1 = precision of calculation

N 1 Y

Outputs H Enthalpy in percent D N -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y Y 0

HV Reference enthalpy in KJ/KG D N 0 to 3600 N Y 0 ENO Output Error B Y 1 = Output Error or input out off

range N - Y 0

WP Water Phase B Y 1 = water , 0 = steam N Y Parameters

TR

stream reference temperature in ° C

D N 100°C<= T < 600°C Y Y

PR stream reference pressure in Bars abs

D

N

PR < (T/100)**4

Y

Y

23.4 Use

23.5 SPECIFICATIONS



PIP Last stream pressure in percent D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable TIP Last stream temperature in percent D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable H enthalpy in percent D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

WP Water Phase B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable




abcd



ENTALPHY_D().



abcd

Section 24 EQM : MULTIPLE EQUALITY

Specification version : 1.2(01/29/01)

24.1 REPRESENTATION

24.2 FUNCTION

The functionality of this block is as the following:

If IN = ( V1 or V2 or V3 or V4 or V5 ) Then RE = 1 Else RE = 0 Endif



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN Input value W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - -

Outputs

RE Output B N - Y - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

V1 Value 1 W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - -

V2 Value 2 W,I,D,L,R N - N Value 1 Y - -






abcd

24.4 USE :


• Scheme : None

• Associated FGT : This block functional can be used with SEQ block for the input calculation.

24.5 SPECIFICATION

24.5.1 Internal Variable and State variables


None


None, only FB.



abcd

Section 25 EVLOG_20K : EVENT LOG

Specification version : 1.9 (03/06/06). This block is an evolution in storage capacity of the EVLOG block belonging to “ System Function Block Library “ since July 2002. It has the same behaviour than EVLOG block but is integrated in P320_MC library . This block keeps the locked record and configuration, even after a download of application where the generation of code has been carried out with “Internal Generation” mode and/or “Generation for on-line modification with redundancy data transfert” mode : the settings parameters must not be downloaded, without before “Save on line value as initial tuning”, otherwise records and configuration will be lost and all the EVLOG_20K blocks of the application will be set to the state “Not Configured”.

25.1 REPRESENTATION

25.2 FONCTION

The event log block stores successive values of selected variables for an off-line display. Variables are designated by their corresponding registers. The values are stored during a period in which the event has occurred. The Controset interface will allow bloc configuration, monitoring of the storage, and data retrieval. This will be made possible by two, internal, buffers which are accessed by the block and Controset (TAB_CONFIG and TAB_RESULT) The bloc can also be monitored by either its physical inputs (names wih capital letters) or by Controset, via the buffers, (names in italic) but not by both at the same time. It is Controset who decides who's in charge with the cmd_cset bit. Once the settings have been read by the block from the TAB_CONFIG buffer, as well as from the TAB_RESULT header, and validated by the block, storing can start by the START input or the start_cset bit of the TAB_RESULT buffer. Unless the settings are correct, the storing can not go ahead.



abcd

While waiting for a trigger event, the block stores, at every cycle or n cycles according to configuration (reg_fonct), the values of selected variables, each in its reserved buffer space. However, not all the space is used before the trigger event but only part of it (pre-trigger) while the rest of the space will be filled up by the values of the variable after the event. The part of the space used before the event is specified by the parameter seg_cset (storage space before trigger = 1/seg_cset of the whole space destined for one variable) of the TAB_RESULT buffer. The trigger can be forced by the TRIG_ON input or by the trig_on_cset bit. Storing, before or after trigger, can be stopped by the CANCEL input or cancel_cset bit.



abcd

The block recordes the value of each variable at every n cycles of its execution. Therefore the time aspect can be found out by, simply, knowing the cycle time of the diagram and the value n. The output MEM indicates the state of the block : MEM = 0 -> block not configured at all or not well configured MEM = 1 -> block configured and waiting for a START or start_cset MEM = 2 -> recording on the first segment and waiting for trigger to fill up the second segment MEM = 3 -> recording on the second segment is in progress after trigger MEM = 4 -> recording finished and block is in locked state until values recorded have been downloaded. The output FAULT_1 indicates which equation set the trigger first : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 respectively no fault, 1st trigger, 2nd trigger, 3rd trigger, TRIG_ON or trig_on_cset A segment of registers for storing data is assigned to each selected 16 bits analogue variable, a double segment for each 32 bits analogue variable and one segment for all logic variables. The size of the segment depends on the number of variables to record, their type (size), as well as the storage space. Configuration of the event log block : The header of the configuration table TAB_CONFIG contains the trigger equations settings. Each of the three equations comprises a comparison variables (CLASSE_REGx, TYPE_REGx, RANG_REGx, BIT_OFFSET), the operator (OPx) and a threashold (SEUILx) . It contains for each variable, its class (%I, %R or %M…), its type (logical, integer, word, double, float or unsigned long), its rank and its offset bit (only for logic variable in %R class). The maximum number of stored variables is 16 logic and 9 analogue, 25 in all. The memory space allocated to each variable, and therefore the time of memorisation, is calculated according to the number of analogue variables to memorise and their type (16 or 32 bits). A number of logic variables of 0 or 16 use the same memory space. The block can memorise two types of analogue variables : 16 or 32 bits analogue variables.

T+t2T-t1

While waiting for a trigger, non stop circular memorisation is performed on the pre-trigger segment every n cycles (1<= n <=256). This way, values from T-t1 till T are recorded

Trigger position is fixed by the seg_cset register (default value is ½) . When trigger occurs, recording is performedevery n cycles on the second part of thesegment until it is full. This allows recordingof values from T to T+ t2 instants.

T : Trigger instant



abcd

The triggers diagram is as follows: Any equation not set or wrongly set is considered to be true.

4 operators are allowed : OPx = “0” corresponds to “=” OPx = “1” corresponds to “≥” OPx = “2” corresponds to “≤” OPx = “3” corresponds to “≠” OPx = “4” corresponds to rising edge (for logic variables only) Opx = “5” corresponds to falling edge (for logic variables only)

Notes : - More than one EVLOG blocks can be put into the same diagram. - <= and >= operators should not be used with logic variables otherwise, the equation is considered to be true. - Operators 4 and 5 should not be used with numeric variables otherwise, the equation is considered to be true. Configuration table structure (TAB_CONFIG): TAB_CONFIG contains 122 elements, the first register indicates the number of variables to memorise, 21 registers for the trigger parameters and 100 registers for the parameters of the 25 variables to memorise (16 logical + 9 analogue). Apart from the threashold registers, which are expressed on 32 bits words, the other elements are 16 bit words 1st part : Trigger parameters: NBR_VARIABLE CLASSE_REG1 TYPE_REG1 RANG_REG1 BIT_OFFSET1 OP1 SEUIL1 CLASSE_REG2 TYPE_REG2

RANG_REG2 BIT_OFFSET2 OP2 SEUIL2 CLASSE_REG3 TYPE_REG3 RANG_REG3 BIT_OFFSET3 OP3

SEUIL3

2nd part : Settings for variables to memorise:

CLASSE_REG1 TYPE_REG1 RANG_REG1 BIT_OFFSET1 … CLASSE_REG24 TYPE_REG24 RANG_REG24 BIT_OFFSET24

NBR_VARIABLE : contains the total number of variables to memorise.

TRIG1

TRIG2

TRIG3

OP1

OP2

OP3

SEUIL1

SEUIL2

SEUIL3

≥1&

≥1

TRIG_ON



abcd

CLASSE_REGx : indicates the class register of the variable x to memorise ( “1“ %I, “2“ %R, "3" %AI, "4" %M, "5" %Q et "6" %AQ). RANG_REGx : indicates the register row. TYPE_REGx : indicates the type of variable to memorise ( “1“ type logical, “2“ type integer, “3“ type word, “4“ type double, “5“ type float, “6” type unsigned long). BIT_OFFSETx : indicates the offset in the specified register for the logic %R class variables starting at 1 (1 indicates the first bit) Variables must be put in the configuration table in the following order: logic, analogue 16 bits and analogue 32 bits. Trigger comparison values must be of the same type as that of the variables against which they will be compared. The types supported are : INTEGER, WORD, LONG, REAL, DOUBLE A configuration is considered valid if the number specified in the first register of TAB_CONFIG is less than or equal to the number of configured variables. Result table structure: The result table (TAB_RESULT) contains a header and 500 registers that will be filled up by part of the data recorded in the bloc’s memory. The block’s memory is much larger than TAB_RESULT. When memorisation is finished, the bloc checks the register reg_fonct to see which segement of data is wanted then copies it from bloc’s memory to TAB_RESULT. The bloc memory is of this form :

Control

nbr_pert, pos0, pos_trigger,

nbr_reg, reg_fonct, seg_cset

LOGICAL

L0,…,L16

ANALOGUE

A1

ANALOGUE

…

ANALOGUE

An

T = Trigger position (fixed by seg_cset register) 0 = trigger event position (between the beginning of the segment and T), this position is specified in pos0 register in the header. The result table header contains 12 (16 bits) registers: nbr_pert : specifies the number of registers in this table. pos0 : specifies the index at which trigger occured ( ≤ (T-1) ). pos_trigger : contains the position at which memorisation will continue after trigger occurs(T). nbr_reg : contains the number of registers for each 16 bits variable. reg_fonct : working register which contains control bits :

- Low byte : - bit0 : indicates if the block is locked after filling up its memory - the rest of the bits are not used currently

- High byte : - At configuration and while memorising, this byte should be set to the number

n of points to ommit (1 out of n points will be recorded). (1<=n<=256) Ex : if n = 5, 1 point out of five will be recorded

0 0 0 0 T T T T



abcd

- When the block has finished memorising and is locked, this byte should be set to the segment number of the results wanted.

Ex : if the total memory of the bloc is 12000 words then to get all the memorised points the user needs to set the high byte to 1 for the first segment, then 2 for the second…and 24 for the last

year_reg : stores the year for the trigger date month_reg : stores the month for the trigger date when it occurs day_reg : stores the day for the trigger date when it occurs hour_reg : stores the hour for the trigger date when it occurs min_reg : stores the minute for the trigger date when it occurs sec_reg : stores the second for the trigger date when it occurs seg_cset : This register is used for two purposes.

- The low order byte is used to store the number on which the length of the segment is divided to find the length of the pre-trigger. Ex : 8 means the length of memorising zone before trigger is 1/8th of the length of the segment intended for the variable.

- The high order byte is used by Controset in order to control the bloc : - bit8 : start_cset : Start recording - bit9 : trig_on_cset : Controset manual trigger - bit10: cancel_cset : Controset cancel recording - bit11: cmd_cset : who controles Controset (1) or the block (0) - bit12: restart_cset : Restart recording

The rest of the space is to be shared between the variables to be memorised according to the formula bellow:

Number of registers = iablesbitsofnumberiablesbitsofnumber

sizebufferBlocvar_32__*2()var_16__1(

__++

Here are few examples for a block with 12000 words memory

Number of logic variables

Number of 16 bits variables

Number of 32 bits variables

Number of registers

0 1 0 6000 0 1 1 3000 1 1 1 3000 7 1 1 3000

16 1 1 3000 16 2 2 1714 16 4 4 923 16 9 0 1200 16 0 9 631

Global working graph:



abcd

Waiting for configuration

MEM=0

Circular Recording

Before trigger MEM=2

Recording after trigger MEM=3

End of Recording

block locked MEM=4

STAR

TRIGGETRIG_ON

END OF MEMORISATIO

CANCEL

BLOCK UNLOCKED

Waiting for start MEM=1

CONFIGOK

RESTART



abcd



Def. value Mand.

Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

- - - - - - - - -

START Start memorisation B N - N 0 Y - -

CANCEL Cancel memorisation B N - N 0 Y - -

TRIG_ON

RESTART

Command ON manually

Restart memorisation

B

B

N

N

-

-

N

N

0

0

Y

Y

-

-

-

-

Outputs

MEM State of memorisation W N [0-4] Y Y - -

FAULT_1 First Fault W N [0-5] Y Y 0

Parameters

SMALL_SIZE

5000_SIZE

- Small size choice (3000 Words) 5000 size selected between the two small sizes (5000 or 3000)

-

B B

-

N N

-

- -

-

N N

-

Not connected (20000 Words) Not connected (3000 Words)

-

N N

-

- -

-

- -

25.4 USE :

• Parameters to initialize : Small_size to choice the minimal size of the block (3000 Words for the internal array TAB_RESULT[]) ;

5000_size to choice between the two small sizes (5000 or 3000), the medium size for the internal array TAB_RESULT[] ;

Without any value on SMALL_SIZE or 5000_SIZE, the block will be intialized like the previous version of the EVLOG, with 20 000 Words for the internal array TAB_RESULT[] ;

• Scheme :

None


25.5 SPECIFICATION :





abcd

TAB_CONFIG, COM : Configuration table, TYPE : WORD, LENGTH=122 TAB_RESULT_EXT, COM : External result table, TYPE : WORD, LENGTH=512 STA_MEMO_CONF1, COM : Saves configuration, TYPE : WORD, LENGTH=116 STA_MEMO_CONF2, COM : Saves threasholds, TYPE : REAL, LENGTH=3 STA_COUNT_REG, COM : Register index TYPE : WORD STA_COUNT_LOG, COM : Logic variable counter, TYPE : WORD STA_COUNT_ANAL16, COM : 16 bits analogue variables counter, TYPE : WORD STA_COUNT_ANAL32, COM : 32 bits analogue variables counter, TYPE : WORD STA_TRIGGER, COM : Trigger state, TYPE : WORD STA_NBR_REG, COM : Number of registers for a channel, TYPE : WORD STA_NBR_LOG, COM : Number of logic variables, TYPE : WORD STA_NBR_ANAL16, COM : Number of 16 bits analogue variables, TYPE : WORD STA_NBR_ANAL32, COM : Number of 32 bits analogue variables, TYPE : WORD STA_SEG_CSET, COM : Segment divider for pre-trigger, TYPE : WORD STA_TRIG1, COM : Previous state of boolean value of 1st equation for edge detection, TYPE : BOOLEAN STA_TRIG2, COM : Previous state of boolean value of 2nd equation for edge detection, TYPE : BOOLEAN STA_TRIG3, COM : Previous state of boolean value of 3rd equation for edge detection, TYPE : BOOLEAN STA_COND1, COM : previous state of 1st equation, to find out who triggered, TYPE : BOOLEAN STA_COND1, COM : previous state of 2nd equation, to find out who triggered, TYPE : BOOLEAN STA_TMP_FAULT_1, COM : Previous value of FAULT_1, TYPE : WORD STA_N_FOIS, COM : Previous value of number of times before recording a point, TYPE : WORD


None


EVLOG_20K(), EVLOG_5000(), EVLOG_3000().



abcd

Section 26 FI_(D,R) : FOLLOW-UP INTEGRATOR FUNCTION

FI_D (old name : ANTIBUMP_D) Specification version : 1.6 (10/31/00) FI_R (old name : ANTIBUMP_R) Specification version : 1.6 (10/31/00)


26.2 Function

This function limits the value evolution to avoid bump (Function with 2 ramps, and init. order)

RE

IN

IV

IC : In it C om m andSLU : positive slopeSLD : negative slope

αβ

α β

IN

IV

Inputs : IN : Analogue input, SLD : Analogue input for negative slope value (%/s),



abcd

SLU : Analogue input for positive slope value (%/s), IV : Analogue value for initialisation, IC : Logic input requesting initialization of output, Outputs : RE : Analogue output of bumpless function (result). HL : Logic output; High Limit LL : Logic output; Low Limit Parameterization : HI : High limit value. LO : Low limit value. TY : Logic choice for SLU & SLD scale If IC (K) = 1 Then RE (K) = IV (K) Else If IN (K) - RE (K-1) > SLU(K) (in relation with Te)

Then RE (K) = RE (K-1)+SLU(K).(with TY scale) Else If IN (K) - RE (K-1) < -SLD(K) (in relation with Te)

Then RE (K) = RE (K-1)-SLD(K).(with TY scale). Else RE (K) = IN (K) If RE (K) >= HI Then RE (K) = HI ; HL=1 If RE (K) <= LO Then RE (K) = LO ; LL=1 If HI<=LO Then Re (K) = HI ; HL=1 ; LL=1



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN input D/R Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y - Y -

SLU Increasing rate D/R N 0 to+32767 for 0 to 327.67 %/s or %/min (see TY)

Y - Y -

SLD Decreasing rate D/R N 0 to+32767 for 0 to 327.67 %/s or %/min (see TY)

Y - Y -

IV Initialization value D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y -

IC Initialization Command BOOL Y 1= Initialization N 0 Y - Outputs

RE Result D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

Y Y - 0


Parameters LO © Minimum value for RE D/R Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) N -20000 Y

HI © Maximum value for RE D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 20000 Y

TY © SLU & SLD scale in %/min

B N 0-> %/s 1-> %/min

N 0 Y



abcd

26.4 Use

26.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) REP1000 RE(K-1)*1000 D 0 R


• 3 booleans and 6 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable) for FI_D(). • 3 booleans and 5 reals (amongst which 1 state variable) for FI_R().



FI_D() and FI_R().



abcd

Section 27 FOX*_(D,DI,R) : FUNCTION GENERATOR

FOX1_D,FOX2_D,FOX3_D,FOX4_D Specification version : 1.4 (04/11/01) FOX1_R,FOX2_R,FOX3_R,FOX4_R Specification version : 1.4 (04/11/01) FOX1_DI, FOX2_DI, FOX3_DI,FOX4_DI, Specification version : 1.0 (04/13/04)

27.1 REPRESENTATION

X-axis

Y-axis



abcd

27.2 FUNCTION

This function block calculates the value of output RE based on the standardized input IN. This function, F(IN), is defined by maximum of 32 x-axis ( always rising ) points corresponding to y-axis points. The curve between these points is linear

If NB > nb value of X or Y then the missing value of X or Y are equal to the last value of X or Y.

If NB < nb value of X or Y then the last couple of X(NB-1;NB) or Y(NB-1;NB) are taking account to the calcul of the output RE.

If input IN < at the first value of X then the output RE follows the slope of the first couple of point (X;X+1).

If input IN > at the last value of X then the output RE follows the slope of the last couple of point (Xn-1;Xn).



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN Input D,R N - Y - Y - -

Outputs

RE Result D,R N - Y - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

NB Number of couple limited

W N { 2 to 32 } Y - Y - 2

X Value of X with minimum of 2 values and maximum 32 values

D,I,R

N - Y - Y - -

Y Value of Y with minimum of 2 values and maximum 32 values

D,I,R

N - Y - Y - -



abcd

27.4 USE :


• Scheme : None


27.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : • 1 boolean (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 word (amongst which 1 state

variable) for FOX1_D, FOX2_D, FOX3_D, FOX4_D ; • 1 boolean (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 word (amongst which 1 state

variable) for FOX1_DI, FOX2_DI, FOX3_DI, FOX4_DI ; • 1 boolean (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 word (amongst which 1 state

variable) for FOX1_R, FOX2_R, FOX3_R, FOX4_R ;


None


FOX1_D(), FOX2_D(), FOX3_D(), FOX4_D() and FOX1_DI(), FOX2_DI(), FOX3_DI(), FOX4_DI() and

FOX1_R(), FOX2_R(), FOX3_R(), FOX4_R().



abcd

Section 28 FTF_1L : FIRST TRIPPING FAULT - FIRST LEVEL

FTF_1L Specification version : 1.0 (08/28/01)


28.2 Function

This function is used to detect the first of 100 tripping defaults.

Inputs : TAB : Array of 100 Boolean corresponding to 100 Boolean information.

RESET : Reset RE on pulse. Outputs :

RE : [1;100] Number of the first Boolean information of the Boolean array set since the last RESET or initialisation cycle. (If more than one Boolean are set simultaneously, RE takes the minimum value.)

If TAB[i]=0 and RESET=1, RE is reset. RE=0 until at least one of the 100 Boolean is set.

IF INIT RE = 0 ELSE IF RESET RE = 0 IF RE = 0 FOR RE=0 to (RE=99 AND TAB[ RE] = 0) ENDFOR RE = RE+1 ENDIF ENDIF



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameter

s value

First scan value

Inputs - TAB Table (100

bits elements in %M Boolean

memory)

TBOO N TAB[i] = 1 : Boolean information n° i+1

Y - Y

RESET Reset order BOO N 1 = reset order Y - Y - Outputs

RE Number of the first Boolean

information

I N 0 = No default [0;100]

Y - Y 0

28.4 Use

28.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) VRE I [0;100] 0 R

Internal variables : 1 integer (amongst which 1 state variable).



FTF_1L().



abcd

Section 29 FTF_2L : FIRST TRIPPING FAULT - SECOND LEVEL

FTF_2L Specification version : 1.0 (09/26/01)


29.2 Function

This function is used to detect the tripping default of three channels(with memorisation of the first tripping default). For detecting the tripping fault of two channels assign a constant on:

F3_NOK=1 and NB3=100

Inputs : NBx (x={1;2;3}) : Number of the first tripping default on channel x. Range {0;1;2;…;100} expect the value of NB_FX chosen by the

user Fx_NOK(x={1;2;3}) : Boolean information indicating, when reset, a communication failure

with the channel x . NB_FX Constant associated to a communication failure (Fx_NOK) of

each of the 3 Channels. Outputs :

RE : [1;100] Number of the second tripping fault appearing since the last RESET or initialisation cycle

IF INIT /* RE=0 /* VRE1=0 /*Initialisation (first cycle) VDF1=0 /*



abcd

ELSE IF RESET RE=0 /* VRE1=0 /*The memorised variables are VDF1=0 /* reset ENDIF IF (RE==0) IF ((/Fi_NOK)&&(NBi!=0)) /*For i={1;2;3} NBi_BIS=MIN(NBFX;NBi) /* ELSE /* NBi_BIS = NBi

ENDIF /*

IF (VDF1!=0) /* For i={1;2;3} IF (VDF1=i AND VRE1=NBi_BIS) /* This part of program VDF1=i /* detects a first default ELSE /* on channel 1 VDF1=0 /* or channel 2 ENDIF /* or channel 3 SWITCH (VDF1) CASE i: /*for i={1;2;3} IF((NB(i+1)_BIS!=0) OR (NB(i+2)_BIS!=0)) /*

IF(VRE1=NB(i+1)_BIS) /* RE=NB(i+1)_BIS /* ELSEIF(VRE1=NB(i+2)_BIS) /* In this case the RE= NB3_BIS /*fault on channel 1

ELSE /*is considered as a RE=MIN(NB2_BIS;NB3_BIS)/*first tripping fault ENDIF /* ELSE /*

RE=0 /* ENDIF BREAK ENDSWITCH ENDIF IF (VDF==0) RE=MIN(NB1_BIS, NB2_BIS, NB3_BIS) IF((NB1_BIS!=0) XOR (NB2_BIS!=0) XOR (NB3_BIS!=0))

RE=0 IF(NB1_BIS!=0) /*This part set VDF1=1 /*the state variables VRE1=NB1_BIS /*(VDF1 and VRE1) IF(NB2_BIS!=0) /*in order to define VDF1=2 /*a first tripping default VRE1=NB2_BIS /*at the next cycle.



abcd

IF(NB3_BIS!=0) VDF1=3 VRE1=NB3_BIS ENDIF ENDIF



abcd

Example of sequences describing the function of the bloc: NB_FX = 62 CYCLE NB1 NB2 NB3 F1_NOK F2_NOK F3_NOK RESET RE Observation INIT x x X x x x x 0 First cycle 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No default 2 54 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 First default (N°54) on ch1 3 54 0 63 0 0 0 0 63 Second default (N°63) on ch3 4 x x x x x x 0 63 Memorisation of RE till the next

RESET 5 0 74 0 0 0 0 1 0 RESET(pulse) and first default

(N°74) simultaneously 6 0 74 0 0 0 0 0 0 Memorisation of the last RESET

(RE=0) till the next second default. 7 0 74 0 0 1 0 0 0 Other Default (Communication

failure N°62) on the same channel as the first default : not considered as a second default

8 0 74 0 0 1 1 0 62 Second default (Communication failure (N°62)) on channel 3

9 x x x x x x 0 62 Memorisation of RE till the next RESET

10 45 24 0 0 0 0 1 24 RESET and default N°45 on ch1 and default N°24 on ch2: the RESET is not taken in account and RE is refreshed with the lowest of the 2 defaults

11 85 63 0 0 0 1 1 62 N°45 on ch1 and N°63 on ch2 and N°62 on ch3 (communication default): RE takes the lowest value of the 3 defaults

12 22 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 2 defaults on the same channel and RESET : RE is reset

13 64 87 0 0 1 0 0 62 N°64 on ch1 and [(N°87 and N°62) =>priority for N°62 (the lowest one)] on ch2 : RE takes the lowest value

14 85 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 N°85 on ch1(first default) and RESET : RE is reset

15 85 0 85 0 1 0 x 85 Appearance of N°62 on ch2 and N°85 on ch3: RE takes the most frequent value in priority on the lowest value.



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameter

s value

First scan value

Inputs - NB1 Number of

the first tripping

default on channel 1

I N [0;100] Y Y

NB2 Number of the first tripping


N [0;100] Y Y

NB3 Number of the first tripping


I N [0;100] N 100 Y

F1_NOK Communicat° failure ch1

BOO Y 0 = Communication failure

Y Y



Y Y



N 0 Y

RESET Reset on pulse

BOO Y 1 = reset order Y Y

Paramters NB_FX Number of

the communicat°

fault

I N [0;100] Y Y

Outputs RE Number of

the first Boolean

information

I N 0 = No default [0;100]

Y - Y 0

29.4 Use

29.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) VDF1 Channel of the first tripping default I [1;2;3] 0 R VRE RE[k-1] state variable I [0;100] 0 R



abcd

VRE1 Number of the first tripping default I [0;100] 0 R Internal variables : 4 booleans and 4 integers (amongst which 3 state variables).



FTF_2L().



abcd

Section 30 GAI(_D,N_R) : ADJUSTABLE GAIN

GAI_D Specification version : 1.4 (09/29/05) GAIN_R Specification version : 1.4 (09/29/05)


30.2 Function

This block applies a gain to the sum of its inputs by [Gain_Value GN].

• INITIALIZATION : the block output RE is positioned in accordance with the normal operation.

• NORMAL OPERATION : The block multiply the inputs summation by [Gain_Value GN], (RE = (∑ INn ) * GN).

• The Gain value is defined as following : Type D then 100 = Gain of 1. Type R then 100 = Gain of 100, for GAIN_R.



Default Value

Mandatory Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 IN2 … IN8

Input 1 Input 2 Input … Input 8

Integer,Double for _D, Real for

N_R.

Y

] [+∞∞− ;

Y N … N

- 0 0 0

N N … N

-

-



abcd

Outputs

RE

Output or Result


N_R.

N

] [+∞∞− ;

Y

Y

-

-

Parameters

GN

Gain value


N_R.

Y

] [+∞∞− ;

Y

N

-

-

This block can be real or double integer. IN1 to 8, RE & GN are the same type for each type of block.

30.4 Use


• not applicable.


IN1 to 8 : INPUT : Integer, Double for GAI_D or Real for GAIN_R input, IN1 mandatory.

RE : OUTPUT : Integer, Double for GAI_D or Real for GAIN_R output, mandatory.

GN : GAIN VALUE : Integer, Double for GAI_D or Real for GAIN_R input.


GN is a User parameter. This block is not an historical block. Associated FGT : Scheme

RE

Σ A*B

INP 1 to n

GN



abcd



Internal variables : 9 doubles for GAI_D or 9 reals for GAIN_R.


LEA.


None.



abcd

Section 31 GROUP : FUNCTION GROUP


31.1 REPRESENTATION

31.2 FUNCTION

This function block shall be applied as control block for a group of subornated function blocks, in order to establish a clearly structured hierarchy of the control system. Such a group can either be switched ON or OFF manually from the operator’s HMI or automatically from super-imposed sequencer. The function group will forward the ON order to all subordinated systems and will also supervise the execution of the command. The OFF order will be processed accordingly. A STOP command however, will reset all output orders from the function group block and also omit supervision of the subordinated systems. This way manual operation of those systems is possible without interference through automatic orders from group level.

Use of inputs/outputs and parameters.

• INITIALIZATION

The output [STAT_STP] is set in accordance with the [INIT_STOP] parameter.

The output [OFF] is set in accordance with the [INIT_OFF] parameter if [INIT_STOP] = 0 else [OFF] = 0.

The output [ON] is set in accordance with the [INIT_ON] parameter if [INIT_STOP] = 0 and [INIT_OFF] = 0 else [ON] = 0.

• OPERATION MODE



abcd

The inputs [ON_MANU] and [OFF_MANU] are activated from operator HMI and [ON_AUTO] and [OFF_AUTO] are activated by superimposed sequencer. They can only becoms active if the corresponding release input [ON_REL], [OFF_REL] ( initial condition ) is set to 1. The [OFF] command is dominant. They activate the corresponding outputs [ON] and [OFF].

When the input [STOP] is activated then the output following are reseted [ON], [OFF], [STAT_ON], [STAT_OFF] and the status signal [STAT_STP] is true. After taking away the [STOP] request, the function group can be reactivated after receiving another of [ON/OFF_MANU] or [ON/OFF_AUTO] then the status signal [STAT_STP] becomes false.

The inputs [FBK_ON] and [FBK_OFF] are the feedback from the process, the function group supervises this inputs after the orders [ON] or [OFF]. The time [TIME_FBK] is initiated by the orders [ON] or [OFF], at the end of this time, if the corresponding feedback is not present then the disturbed signal [STAT_DIS] is set.

When the order [ON] or [OFF] is seted and the corresponding feedback is true then the corresponding status signal [STAT_ON] or [STAT_OFF] is seted.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

ON_MANU Manual ON command

B N - N 0 Y - -

ON_AUTO Automatic ON command

B N - N 0 Y - -

ON_REL Release for ON command

B Y - N 1 Y - -

OFF_MANU Manual OFF command

B N - N 0 Y - -

OFF_AUTO Automatic OFF command

B N - N 0 Y - -

OFF_REL Release for OFF command

B Y - N 1 Y - -

STOP Stop command B Y - N 0 Y - -

FBK_ON Feedback ON B Y - Y - Y - -

FBK_OFF Feedback OFF B Y - Y - Y - -

Outputs

ON ON order B N - Y - Y - -

OFF OFF order B N - Y - Y - -

STAT_ON Status ON B N - Y - Y - -

STAT_OFF Status OFF B N - Y - Y - -

STAT_DIS Status disturbed B N - Y - Y - -

STAT_STP Status stopped B N - Y - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -



abcd

TIME_FBK Time waiting feedback

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -

INIT_STOP Init value of STOP status

B N - N * N - -

INIT_ON Init value of ON status

B N - N * Y - -

INIT_OFF Init value of OFF status

B N - N * Y - -

* IF [INIT_STOP] and [INIT_ON] and [INIT_OFF] are not connected then defaut value of [INIT_STOP] equal to 1 else [INIT_STOP] equal to 0.

31.4 USE :

• Parameters to initialize : INIT_STOP , INIT_ON , INIT_OFF

• Scheme :


≥ 1 & RS

≥ 1

RS

&NOT

≥ 1

NOT

ON_MANU

ON_AUTO

STOP

ON_REL

≥ 1 & RS

≥ 1

OFF_MANU

OFF_AUTO

OFF_REL

FBK_ON &

TON

NOT &

TON

NOT

&FBK_OFF

& ≥ 1

STAT_ON

ON

STAT_STP

OFF

STAT_OFF

STAT_DIS

S

R

S

R

S

R

INIT_ON

INIT_STOP

INIT_OFF

TIME_FBK

TIME_FBK



abcd

31.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 11 booleans (amongst which 5 state variables) and 3 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables).


None


GROUP().



abcd

Section 32 GRP : FUNCTION GROUP ( WITH OR WITHOUT TIME MONITORING )


32.1 REPRESENTATION

32.2 FUNCTION

This function block shall be applied as control block for a group of subornated function blocks, in order to establish a clearly structured hierarchy of the control system. Such a group can either be switched ON or OFF manually from the operator’s HMI or automatically from super-imposed sequencer. The function group will forward the ON order to all subordinated systems and will also supervise the execution of the command. The OFF order will be processed accordingly. A STOP command however, will reset all output orders from the function group block and also omit supervision of the subordinated systems. This way manual operation of those systems is possible without interference through automatic orders from group level.

Use of inputs/outputs and parameters.

• INITIALIZATION

The output [STP_ST] is set at 1 if [INIT_OFF] and [INIT_ON] are set to 0.

The output [OFF] is set in accordance with the [INIT_OFF] .

The output [ON] is set in accordance with the [INIT_ON] parameter if [INIT_OFF] = 0 else [ON] = 0.

• OPERATION MODE



abcd

The inputs [ON_MANU] and [OFF_MANU] are activated from operator HMI and [ON_AUTO] and [OFF_AUTO] are activated by superimposed sequencer. They can only becoms active if the corresponding release input [ON_REL], [OFF_REL] ( initial condition ) is set to 1. The [OFF] command is dominant. They activate the corresponding outputs [ON] and [OFF].

When the input [STOP] is activated then the output following are reseted [ON], [OFF], [ON_ST], [OFF_ST] and the status signal [STP_ST] is true. After taking away the [STOP] request, the function group can be reactivated after receiving another of [ON/OFF_MANU] or [ON/OFF_AUTO] then the status signal [STP_ST] becomes false.

The inputs [FBK_ON] and [FBK_OFF] are the feedback from the process, the function group supervises this inputs after the orders [ON] or [OFF].

If [ON_T] is null, then there is no time monitoring control then the state disturb appear if the orders [ON] is set and the feedback [FBK_ON] is lost or the orders [OFF] is set and the feedback [FBK_OFF] is lost.

If [ON_T] is not null, the time [ON_T] is initiated by the orders [ON] or [OFF], at the end of this time, if the corresponding feedback is not present then the disturbed signal [DIS_ST] is set.

When the order [ON] or [OFF] is seted and the corresponding feedback is true then the corresponding status signal [ON_ST] or [OFF_ST] is seted.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

ON_MANU Manual ON command

B N - N 0 Y - -

ON_AUTO Automatic ON command

B N - N 0 Y - -

ON_REL Release for ON command

B Y - N 1 Y - -

OFF_MANU Manual OFF command

B N - N 0 Y - -

OFF_AUTO Automatic OFF command

B N - N 0 Y - -

OFF_REL Release for OFF command

B Y - N 1 Y - -

STOP Stop command B Y - N 0 Y - -

FBK_ON Feedback ON B Y - Y - Y - -

FBK_OFF Feedback OFF B Y - Y - Y - -

Outputs

ON ON order B N - Y - Y - -

OFF OFF order B N - Y - Y - -

ON_ST Status ON B N - Y - Y - -



abcd

OFF_ST Status OFF B N - Y - Y - -

DIS_ST Status disturbed B N - Y - Y - -

STP_ST Status stopped B N - Y - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

ON_T Time waiting feedback ON

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -

OFF_T Time waiting feedback OFF

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

Y - Y - -

INIT_ON Init value of ON status

B N - N * Y - -

INIT_OFF Init value of OFF status

B N - N * Y - -

* At initialisation if [INIT_ON] and [INIT_OFF] are not connected then defaut value is [STAT_STOP] equal to 1 else [STAT_STOP] equal to 0.

32.4 USE :

• Parameters to initialize : INIT_ON , INIT_OFF

• Scheme :

≥ 1 & RS

≥ 1NOT

ON_MANU

ON_AUTO

STOP

ON_REL

≥ 1 & RS

≥ 1

OFF_MANU

OFF_AUTO

OFF_REL

FBK_ON &

TON&

TON

&FBK_OFF

& ≥ 1

ON_ST

ON

STP_ST

OFF

OFF_ST

DIS_ST

S

R

S

R

INIT_ON

INIT_OFF

ON_T

OFF_T

&≥ 1

&

≥ 1

ON_T = 0

& ≥ 1&

≥ 1

OFF_T = 0

&



abcd



abcd

Associated FGT :

32.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 13 booleans (amongst which 6 state variables) and 2 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables).


None


GRP().



abcd

Section 33 IMPMC / IMPMCW : PULSE ON EDGE

IMPMC_D, IMPMCW_D Specification version : 1.0 (04/12/01)

33.1 representation

33.2 Function

The Functional Block IMPMC carries out a retriggerable pulse, and controls two booleans outputs REU and RED.

When the input IN has a rising edge a pulse is generated on the output REU, when the input IN has a falling edge a pulse is generated on the output RED.

In both cases, the duration of the pulse is the value of the parameter TP depending to the cycle time.

The pulse is retriggerable. Then, if a new edge of the same type appears before the end of time period, the duration of the pulse is extended by TP.

Time diagram

IN

TP TP

TP TP

REU

RED



abcd


Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. connec

tion

Def. value

Mand. Data


First scan value

Inputs

IN

Pulse Input

B

Y

Y

-

-

Outputs

REU RED

Output I+ Output I-

B B

Y Y

Y Y

- -

0 0

Parameters

TP

Duration in hundredths of a

second

D

] [+∞;0

Y

Y

N * Cycle time

-

33.4 USE :

Description of terminals IN : PULSE INPUT boolean input compulsory. The function block IMP reacts to

the rising and falling edge of IN.

REU : OUTPUT 1 : I + If there is a rising edge on IN, the Function Block IMP generates a pulse of duration TP on REU. This pulse is retriggerable by a new rising edge occuring before the end of the times period.

RED : OUTPUT 2 : I – If there is a falling edge on IN, the function block IMP generates a pulse of duration TP on RED. This pulse is retriggerable by a new rising edge occuring before the en of the times period.

TP : DURATION

Duration of pulse in 0.01 second. D type integer : maximum value + 2,147 * 109 If TP is less than or equal to cycle time, it is considered to be 0 ; no pulse.

The output RED and REU are calculated in function of cycle time.

Example : If TP = 190 (1.9 sec.) and IF Tcyc = 0,5 sec, the duration of the pulses is on (1.7 / 0.5 = 3 « integer ») 3 cycles therefore ( 3 * 0. 5 = 1.5) 1.5 seconds.

Changes to TP during a pulse are not taken into account. Its taking account at the next pulse.

Notes :

• During initialization cycles, at the controller start up :

REU = RED = 0, no pulse



abcd

• In operating mode (INIT ≠ 0)

− if IN(K) = IN(K-1), the pulse is not started

− if IN(K) ≠ IN(K-1), a pulse is started on REU or RED depending on the state change : 0->1 or 1->0 of IN.

Associated FGT : NONE Scheme :NONE

33.5 SPECIFICATION



• 4 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 2 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables) for IMPMC_D,

• 4 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 2 words (amongst which 2 state variables) for IMPMCW_D.



IMPMC_D() and IMPMCW_D().



abcd

Section 34 IMPMCDWN : PULSE ON FALLING EDGE

IMPMCDWN_W Specification version : 1.0 (07/17/01)

34.1 representation

34.2 Function

The Functional Block IMPMCDWN carries out a retriggerable pulse, and controls one boolean outputs RED.

When the input IN has a falling edge a pulse is generated on the output RED.

The duration of the pulse is the value of the parameter TP depending to the cycle time.


Time diagram



tion

Def. value

Mand. Data


First scan value

Inputs

IN

Pulse Input

B

Y

Y

-

-

Outputs

RED

Output I-

B

Y

Y

-

0 Parameters


N * Cycle time

IN

TP TP RED



abcd

TP second W ] [+∞;0 Y Y -



abcd

34.4 USE :



RED : OUTPUT 2 : I – If there is a falling edge on IN, the function block IMP generates a pulse of duration TP on RED. This pulse is retriggerable by a new rising edge occuring before the en of the times period.

TP : DURATION


The output RED is calculated in function of cycle time.



Notes :


RED = 0, no pulse



− if IN(K) ≠ IN(K-1), a pulse is started on RED depending on the state change : 1->0 of IN.




abcd

34.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 3 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 word (amongst which 1 state variable).



IMPMCDWN_W().



abcd

Section 35 IMPMCUP : PULSE ON RISING EDGE

IMPMCUP_W Specification version : 1.0 (07/17/01)

35.1 representation

35.2 Function

The Functional Block IMPMCUP carries out a retriggerable pulse, and controls one boolean outputs REU.

When the input IN has a rising edge a pulse is generated on the output REU.

The duration of the pulse is the value of the parameter TP depending on the cycle time.


Time diagram



tion

Def. value

Mand. Data


First scan value

Inputs

IN

Pulse Input

B

Y

Y

-

-

Outputs

REU

Output I+

B

Y

Y

-

0 Parameters


N * Cycle time

IN

TP TPREU



abcd

TP second W ] [+∞;0 Y Y -



abcd

35.4 USE :



REU : OUTPUT 1 : I + If there is a rising edge on IN, the Function Block IMP generates a pulse of duration TP on REU. This pulse is retriggerable by a new rising edge occuring before the end of the times period.

TP : DURATION


The output REU is calculated in function of cycle time.



Notes :


REU = 0, no pulse



− if IN(K) ≠ IN(K-1), a pulse is started on REU depending on the state change : 0->1 or of IN.




abcd

35.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 3 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 word (amongst which 1 state variable).



IMPMCUP_W().



abcd

Section 36 IT_(D,R) : INTEGRATOR

IT_D (old name INTGR_D) Specification version : 1.7 (04/02/01) IT_R (old name INTGR_R) Specification version : 1.7 (04/02/01)


36.2 Function

Inputs : IN : Analogue input, variable which can be integrated according to one of two integration

time constants. I2C : Logic action for choice of Second Integration Constant for integrators. IV : Analogue input of Integrator initialisation, IC : Logic input requesting initialisation of output, Outputs : RE : Operator analogue output. HL : Logic output; High Limit LL : Logic output; Low Limit Parameterisation : I1 : The adjustment of the value for the first integration constant I2 : The adjustment of the value for the second integration constant TY : Logic choice for I1 & I2 integrator constant scale. HI : High limit value. LO : Low limit value.



abcd

If I1 > 100 000 Then I1 = 100 000 If I2 > 100 000 Then I2 = 100 000 If IC (K) = 1 Then RE (K) = IV (K) Else If I2C(K)= 0 (1st integration constant) Then RE (K) = RE (K-1) + (IN (K) * I1(function of Te &

TY scale)). Else (2nd integration constant) Then RE (K) = RE (K-1) + (IN (K) * I2 (function of

Te & TY scale)). If RE (K) >= HI Then RE (K) = HI ; HL=1 If RE (K) <= LO Then RE (K) = LO ; LL=1 If HI<=LO Then Re (K) = HI ; HL=1 ; LL=1



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN input D/R Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y - Y

I2C Integration constant #2 selection

BOOL Y 1= Int. #2 selected N 0 Y

IV Init value D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

IC init order BOOL Y N 0 Y Outputs


D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

Y Y 0


Parameters I1 Integration constant

#1 D/R N 0 to+100000

0,000 to 100,000 r/s or r/min (see TY)

Y Y

I2 Integration constant #2

D/R N 0 to+100000 0,000 to 100,000 r/s or

r/min (see TY)

N 0 Y

TY © I1 & I2 scale in r/min

B N 0-> r/s ;1-> r/min N 0 Y

LO © Minimum value for RE

D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N -20000 Y

HI © Maximum value for RE

D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 20000 Y



abcd

36.4 Use

36.5 SPECIFICATIONS



REP10P6 RE(K-1)*1000000 D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable REP RE(K-1) D 0 R


• 4 booleans and 7 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable) for IT_D, • 4 booleans and 5 reals (amongst which 1 state variable) for IT_R.



IT_D() and IT_R().



abcd

Section 37 ITT_D : IT_D INTEGRATOR WITH TIME IN SECONDS

ITT_D Specification version : 1.1 (03/24/03)


37.2 Function

Inputs : IN : Analogue input, variable which can be integrated according to one of two integration

time constants. I2C : Logic action for choice of Second Integration Constant for integrators. IV : Analogue input of Integrator initialisation, IC : Logic input requesting initialisation of output, Outputs : RE : Operator analogue output. HL : Logic output; High Limit LL : Logic output; Low Limit Parameterisation : I1 : The adjustment of the value for the first integration constant I2 : The adjustment of the value for the second integration constant TY : Logic choice for I1 & I2 integrator constant scale. HI : High limit value. LO : Low limit value.



n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs



abcd


n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

IN input I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

Y - Y

I2C Integration constant #2 selection

BOOL Y 1= Int. #2 selected N 0 Y

IV Init value I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

IC init order BOOL Y N 0 Y Outputs


I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

Y Y 0


Parameters I1 Integration constant

#1 I/D N 0 to+90 000 if TY = 0

> 90 000 and < 6 000 000 if TY = 1 (see TY)

Y Y

I2 Integration constant #2

I/D N 0 to+90 000 if TY = 0> 90 000 and < 6 000 000 if TY = 1 (see TY)

N 0 Y

TY © I1 & I2 scale B N 0 for I1 or I2 < 900s ; 1 for I1or I2 > 900s.

N 0 Y


I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N -20000 Y


I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 20000 Y

37.4 Use

37.5 SPECIFICATIONS



REP10P6 RE(K-1)*1000000 D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable REP RE(K-1) D 0 R


• 4 booleans and 7 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).



IT_D().



abcd



abcd

Section 38 LEADLAG_D : LEAD LAG FILTER

LEADLAG _D Specification version : 1.0 (04/22/02)


38.2 Function

OutputInput

Inputs : IN : Filter analogue input, Outputs : RE : Function filter result Parameterisation : TN : Adjustment of the operator time constant of numerator TD : Adjustment of the operator time constant of denominator The TN and TD time constants are parameters in ms. Analogical equivalent function (1+TN*p)/(1+TD*p).



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN Input D Y -214 747 to +214 747

(-2147,47 to 2147,47 %) Y Y

Outputs



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

RE Output D Y -214 747 to +214 747 (-2147,47 to 2147,47 %)

Y Y 0

Parameters TN Constant time of

numerator D N 500 to 15 000

(0,5s to 15,000s ; 0 allowed)N 0 Y

TD Constant time of denominator

D N 30 to 10 000 (0,030s to 10,000s ; 0

forbidden)

N 30 Y

38.4 Use

38.5 SPECIFICATIONS


Internal variables : 3 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).



LEADLAG_D().



abcd

Section 39 LELAGMC_(I,D) : LEAD LAG FILTER

LELAGMC _I Specification version : 1.4 (04/02/01) LELAGMC _D Specification version : 1.4 (04/02/01)


39.2 Function

OutputInput

Inputs : IN : Filter analogue input, Outputs : RE : Function filter result ENO : Output Error Parameterisation : CFn Adjustment of the operator cut-off frequency numerator CFd Adjustment of the operator cut-off frequency denominator Analogical equivalent function (1+τn*p)/(1+τd*p) with τn =1/(2*πCFn) and τd =1/(2*πCFd) If CFn (K) != CFn (K-1) Then

If CFn (K) != 0 Then Qn (K) =exp (-Te*2*PI*CFn(K)) Else Qn(K) = 0

Else Qn(K) = Qn (K-1). If CFd (K) != CFd (K-1) Then

If CFd (K) != 0 Then Qd (K) =exp (-Te*2*PI*CFd(K)) Else Qd(K) = 0

Else Qd(K) = Qd (K-1).



abcd

RE (K) = ((1-Qd)*IN(K)-Qn*(1-Qd)* IN (K-1)+Qd*(1-Qn)* RE (K-1))/(1-Qn) IF Calculation error or out of range Then ENO(K) = TRUE



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN Input I/D Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y Y

Outputs RE Output I/D Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y Y 0

ENO Result Indicator BOOL.

Y 1 = RE invalid N - Y 0

Parameters CFn cut-off frequency

numerator I/D N 0 to 2500

(0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive) N 0 Y

CFd cut-off frequency denominator

I/D N 0 to 2500 (0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive)

N 0 Y

39.4 Use

39.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) CFNP cut-off frequency numerator (K-1) I/D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable CFDP cut-off frequency denominator (K-1) I/D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

A Pre-calculated value of 1-Qd D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable B Pre-calculated value of Qn(1-Qd) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable C Pre-calculated value of Qd(1-Qn) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable D Pre-calculated value of 1-Qn D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

REP1000 RE(K-1) D 0 R INP1000 IN(K-1) D 0 R

Internal variables : 1 boolean and 10 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables).



abcd



LELAGMC_D().



abcd

Section 40 LPMC_(I,D) : LOW PASS FILTER

LPMC _I Specification version : 1.4 (04/02/01) LPMC _D Specification version : 1.4 (04/02/01)


40.2 Function

OutputInput

Inputs : IN : Filter analogue input, Outputs : RE : Function filter result ENO : Output Error Parameterization : CF Adjustment of the operator cut-off frequency

IV : INIT VALUE . GN : GAIN VALUE .

If CF (K) != 0 Then

If CF (K) != CF (K-1) Then Q (K) =exp (-Te*CF(K)*2*PI) Else Q(K) = Q (K-1).

r (K) = IN (K) + Q*( r (K-1)- IN (K))

RE(K) = GN * r (K) Else (CF (K) = 0) RE (K) = GN * IN (K)



abcd

If First cycle Then RE (K) = IV IF Calculation error or out of range Then ENO(K) = TRUE



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN Input I/D Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y Y

Outputs RE Output I/D Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y Y IV

ENO Result Indicator

BOOL.

Y 1 = RE invalid N - Y 0

Parameters CF cut-off

frequency I/D N 0 to 2500

(0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive) Y Y

IV Init Value I/D N -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

GN Gain value I/D N -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00)

N 100 (1)

Y

40.4 Use

40.5 SPECIFICATIONS



CFP cut-off frequency numerator (K-1) I/D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable Q Pre-calculated coeficient Q(K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable r r(K-1) D 0 R

Internal variables : 1 boolean and 5 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).




abcd


LPMC_D().



abcd

Section 41 LTH_B : BOOLEAN LOGICAL THRESHOLD


41.1 REPRESENTATION

41.2 FUNCTION


[TY] = 2 (>) : The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status of more [NB] inputs is set logical 1.

[TY] = 1 (≥): The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status of at least [NB] inputs is set logical 1.

[TY] = 0 (=): The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status of exactly [NB] inputs is set logical 1.

[TY] = -1 (≤): The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status of [NB] or less inputs is set logical 1.

[TY] = -2 (<): The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status less [NB] inputs is set logical 1.

IF [TY] is different of { -2,-1,0,1,2} then [TY] is set to 0.

IF [NB] is higher than number of input x then [NB] is set to number of input x.

IF [NB] is lower than or equal to 0 then [NB] is set to 1.

This block can be extended until 8 inputs.



abcd

NB = MAX ( MIN ( NB ; n ) ; 0 )

TOT = ( IN1 + IN2 + … + INn ) / NB

If TY <> { -2,-1,0,1,2} Then TY = 0 Else TY = TY Endif

If TY = 2 Then If TOT > 1 Then RE = 1 Else RE = 0 Endif Endif

If TY = 1 Then If TOT ≥ 1 Then RE = 1 Else RE = 0 Endif Endif

If TY = 0 Then If TOT = 1 Then RE = 1 Else RE = 0 Endif Endif

If TY = -1 Then If TOT ≤ 1 Then RE = 1 Else RE = 0 Endif Endif

If TY = -2 Then If TOT < 1 Then RE = 1 Else RE = 0 Endif Endif



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 Input value 1 B N - Y - Y - -

IN2 Input value 2 B N - Y - Y - -

IN3 Input value 3 B N - N 0 Y - -

INx Input value x with x ≤ 8

B N - N 0 Y - -

Outputs

RE Output B Y - Y - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

TY Type of test = -2 then < = -1 then ≤ = 0 then = = 1 then ≥ = 2 then >

I N - Y - Y - -

NB Threshold value W N [ 1 , n ] N 2 Y - -

41.4 USE :


• Scheme : None


41.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variable : 1 boolean.




abcd


LTH_B().



abcd

Section 42 MAX_WB_D : MAXIMUM OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL

MAX_WB_D Specification version : 1.5 (01/26/01)

42.1 REPRESENTATION

Example with 4 inputs

IV1 = 0

BKRE

IV2 = 0

IV3 = 0

IV4 = 0

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

Low value

MAX

DF AND



abcd



abcd

42.2 FUNCTION

This function block select the highest of undisturbed input [INx]. If all input signals are bad [IVx] then the output [RE] equal the backup value [BK] and the defect [DF] is seted to 1.

If the backup value [BK] is not defined then if all input [INx] are bad data quality [IVx] then the output [RE] equal the last value of output [RE] (t-1) before defect.

The low value when one input is in bad data quality is in function of type of the input: - Input is Word or Long : Low value equal 0. - Input is Integer : Low value equal - 32768. - Input is Double : Low value equal - 2147483648. - Input is Real : Low value equal -3,4e +38 .



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 Input value 1 W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - -

IV1 Valid Input 1 B Y 1 = Input # 1 valid

N 1 Y - -



N 1 Y - -

INx Input value x W,I,D,L,R N - N Low value

Y - -

IVx Valid Input x B Y 1 = Input # x valid

N 1 Y - -

IN8 Input value 8 W,I,D,L ,R N - N Low value

Y - -


N 1 Y - -

BK Backup value W,I,D,L ,R N - N RE (t-1) N - -

Outputs

RE Output value W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - BK if connected else Low value

DF All inputs invalid B N - N - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - -



abcd

42.4 USE :


• Scheme : None

• Associated FGT : None.

42.5 SPECIFICATION





MAX_WB_D().



abcd

43.3 Arguments characteristics :


Default Value

Mandatory Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 IN2 … IN8

Input 1 Input 2 Input … Input 8

Double for MED_D,real for MED_R.

Y Y … Y

] [+∞∞− ;

Y N … N

- 0 0 0

N N … N

-

-

Outputs

RE

Output or Result

Boolean

N

[ ]1;0

Y

Y

-

-

Parameters

TH BD TY

Threshold value Gap or Band value Direction or Type

Double for MED_D,real for MED_R. Double for MED_D,real for MED_R. Boolean

N N N

] [+∞∞− ; [ [+∞;0 [ ]1;0

Y Y Y

N Y N

- - -

- - -

This block can be real or double integer. IN1 to 8(2), TH & BD are the same type for each type of block. RE & TY are boolean type for each type of block

43.4 Use



IN1 to 8(2) : INPUT : Double for MED(2)_D,real for MED(2)_R input, IN1 mandatory.

RE : OUTPUT : boolean output, mandatory. TH : TRESHOLD VALUE : Double for MED(2)_D,real for MED(2)_R

input.



abcd

BD : GAP or BAND VALUE : Double for MED(2)_D,real for MED(2)_R input.

TY : DIRECTION or TYPE DEFINITION : boolean input.


[BD) parameter must be positive, else the output will be set to the two’s complement of [TY] parameter. TH, BD and TY are User parameters. This block is not an historical block.

Associated FGT : Scheme



Internal variables : 1 boolean and 10 doubles for MED_D , 1 boolean and 6 doubles for MED2_D ,

1 boolean and 10 reals for MED_R, 1 boolean and 6 reals for MED2_R.



MED_D() and MED_R().



abcd

Section 44 MIN_WB_D : MINIMUM OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL

MIN_WB_D Specification version : 1.5 (01/26/01)

44.1 REPRESENTATION


IV1 = 0

BKRE

IV2 = 0

IV3 = 0

IV4 = 0

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

High value

MIN

AND DF



abcd

44.2 FUNCTION

This function block select the lowest of undisturbed input [INx]. If all input signals are bad [IVx] then the output [RE] equal the backup value [BK] and the defect [DF] is seted to 1. If the backup value [BK] is not defined then if all input [INx] are bad data quality [IVx] then the output [RE] equal the last value of output [RE] (t-1) before defect. The high value when one input is in bad data quality is in function of type of the input : - Input is Word or Long : High value equal 65535.

- Input is Integer : High value equal + 32767.

- Input is Double : High value equal + 2147483647.

- Input is Real : High value equal + 3,4e +38 .



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs



N 1 Y - -



N 1 Y - -

INx Input value x W,I,D,L,R N - N High value

Y - -


N 1 Y - -

IN8 Input value 8 W,I,D,L ,R N - N High value

Y - -


N 1 Y - -


Outputs

RE Output value W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - BK if connected else High value


Parameters - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - -



abcd

44.4 USE :


• Scheme : None


44.5 SPECIFICATION





MIN_WB_D().



abcd

Section 45 MODBUS_M : MODBUS MASTER INTERFACE MANAGEMENT

MODBUS_M Specification version : 1.1 (02/11/03)


45.2 Function

This FB realize 4 main MODBUS functions Reading Words; Writing Words; Reading Bits; Writing Bits; The Write Bits function works only if a WBITS table is connected The new demand must be validate by VAL input, when EXRE is equal to zero. Only one FB can be used on one channel at a time (i.e. : 2max by CMM311). Output data (for reading functions) are ready when EXRE equal 0 The first 2 words of the exchange table are reserved for driver internal use. Defaults are set during 4 seconds. Inputs:

TREAT: Treatment choice SNB : Slave number FEA : First Element Address NB : NumBer of elements VAL : VALidate function request input WBITS Write BITS exchange table, must be in %M boolean memory.

Parameterization : CHA : CHAnnel SLOT: SLOT number,

Outputs:

TABLE: Modbus exchange (input / output) TABLE DF: DeFault Indicator EXRE: EXchange REport



abcd



Def. value

Mand Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

Inputs TREAT Treatment choice D N 0=Init

1 or 2 =n bits read (1 or 2 function code) 3 or 4 =n words read (3 or 4 function code) 15 = n bits write (15 code) if WBITS table connected 16 = n words write (16)

Y Y

SNB Slave number D N 1 à 255,0 for PC or diffusion Y Y FEA First element address D N Y Y NB Elements number D N word read 1 to 128

word write 1 to 100 bit read 1 to 2048 bit write 1 to 800

Y Y

VAL demand VALidate input BOOL. Y 1=Valid demand Y Y Outputs DF Indicator result BOOL. Y 1=Default exchange N Y 0 EXRE Exchange report D N 3 = Exchange running

2 = Exchange in memory 1 = Waiting 0 = Successful exchange -1=transmission fault -2=no Reponses by PS -3=data length error -4= must be initialised -5=software error -6=reception fault -7=PAE fault -8=CRC fault -9=time out -10=no correct response -11=out by PS -12=out by PC -13=start exchange time out -14= not initialised -15= wrong type table -16= Function code sent invalid -17= function code expected invalid -18= length data expected invalid

Y Y -4

TABLE Modbus input / output table (130 elements)

TW N Y Y

WBITS Write BITS exchange table (800 bits elements in %M boolean memory)

TBOOL N N Y

Parame ters

CHA © Channel D N 1-2 Y Y SLOT © Slot number D N 2-10 Y Y



abcd

45.4 USE

Commisioning guide :

Error type Error generatedEXRE = i

Signification of the value of EXRE

First controller cycle -4 -14

must be initialised (pre-initialisation) not initialised

Incorrect asked data number -3 data length error Default of hardware configuration of the module PCM -4 Initialisation required Hardware default of the module PCM301 -5 Error soft ware Wire break -7 PAE default CRC fault on the answer -8 CRC fault Serial link configuration different between PCM301 and the slave controller (speed, parity, slave number)

-9 No response of the question after a delay

Wrong function code on the answer -10 No correct response Read or write on a forbidden range memory of the slave controller. -11 Not acceptance by PS of a PC

requirement The Wbit table (for writing bit) is not in %M boolean mémory -15 wrong type table Asked function code unknown, not in the list (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 15, 16). -16 Function code sent invalid

45.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) ST[30] State Variable table (view description

below) I - Memorization but no Redundant Variable

EXRE State Variable D -4 Memorization but no Redundant Variable Internal State table ST [30] Description : 0 1

Command Address

2 Slot et rack 3 4

Task id

Comm_req_rec : 5 Word

5 Length 6 Wait 7 Type of memory 8 Offset 9 Idle time 10 Max comm time

Command : 6 Word

11 … 19

One DE max : 9 Word

20 Answer … 24

One RE max : 5 Word



abcd

25 Services Services Bits bit0:ACK(by UE) ; bit1: NACK ; bit2: UE in service bit3: UE out of service ; bit4: set back voluntary of UE bit8: too much trigged DE; bit9: too much periodic DE bit10: : too much cyclic DE; bit11: Reject DE in progress bit12: No trigged DE ; bit13: No periodic DE bit14: No cyclic DE

26 status Address FF if default 27 DE Report n°0 One DE state :

bit0: exchange is running bit1: exchange is finished

without fault bit2: exchange is finished with

fault bit3: DE valid (DE is in list for

emission)

default bits of DE: bit4: reception default bit5: PAE default bit6: CRC error (RTU) or LRC(ASCII) bit7: non-ASCII character bit8: no answer after temporisation bit9: waiting function code error bit10:data length error bit11:CF or data is erroneous bit12: no correct answer after Nb repeat bit13:reject of 1 DE by PS bit14:reject of 1 DE by PC, exchange running bit15: reject of 1 DE by PC, DE list full

28 29 Tempo

Working Zone : 5 Word

Internal variables : 2 booleans and 30 integers.



MODBUS_M().



abcd

Section 46 MODBUS3I_M : MODBUS MASTER FOR RX3i

MODBUS3I_M Specification version: 1.1 (06/24/06) MODBUS3I_PORT1_M Specification version: 1.2 (06/26/08) MODBUS3I_PORT2_M Specification version: 1.2 (06/26/08)


46.2 Function

The function block MODBUS3I_M realises 4 main MODBUS functions available for a RX3i controller: • Read n bit(s)

• Read n word(s) • Write n bit(s) • Write n bit(s)

[TABLE] is an Output. It serves to read the Modbus Exchanges (Output Table). [TABLE_IN] is an Input. It serves to write bits and words (Input Table).



abcd

This function block is dedicated to communicate with only one port of the CPU310 module. For communication with the both ports (RS232: Port1 and RS485: Port2), two FB

MODBUS3I_PORT1_M & MODBUS3I_PORT2_M blocks must be used.

Important note: A buffer area for internal use, in %R, is necessary (150 registers in size).

The %W memory specific for RX3i controller is not use in MC RX3i application.

Input: Enable: Enable the MODBUS3i_M block for communication

TREAT: Function Code (FCi)

S_ID Slave Number to send the request FEA First Element Address

NB_EL: Number of elements TABLE_IN Write WORDS exchange table (words to be write) - reserved for FC16

Output: EXRE: Return value for Exchange Report

DF: Communication or FB fault TABLE: Modbus Table exchange – reading result (Words, Bits)

Parameters:

Slot: Slot number of RX3i CPU310 board Port: Port number which is use for the communication (RS232 or RS485)

Offset: Local (internal) buffer start address in %R memory TimeOut: Time out request (in ms)


Name Description Type Ne

g Range Mand.

Connection

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs Enable Enable the Modbus block

communication B Y 0: Disable

1: Enable Y Y

TREAT Function Code used for the communication

D N 1 or 2 : n bits read 3 or 4 : n words read 15 : n bits 16 : n words write (FC15-16 [TABLE_IN] must be connected)

Y Y

S_ID Slave Number (Slave ID) D N Valid numbers: 1 to 247 Y Y FEA First Element Address to read

/ write D N Depending to the Modbus

Table Y Y



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

NB_EL Number of elements to read / write

D N See function code chart Y Y

TABLE_IN Write words exchange table (WRITE)

TW N Write Bit exchange table (max: 150)

N Y 0

Outputs EXRE Exchange report D N See the exchange report

table Y Y -1

TABLE Modbus Table Exchange TW N 150 elements Y Y DF Indicator result B Y 1: error / 0: no error Y Y

Parameters Slot Slot number of the RX3i D N 1 – 14 (for RX3i) Y 2 Y Port Serial port number use for the

communication (1: RS232 : 2: RS485)

D N 1 or 2 1 for

MODBUS3I_PORT1_M 2 for

MODBUS3I_PORT2_M

Y Y

Offset Internal buffer start address (offset). Must be in %R.

TW N 150 elements Y Y

TimeOut Time out request (in ms) D N 0 – 10000 Y 1000 Y Note: The input [TABLE_IN] is not mandatory (no mandatory connection) with reading function codes (FC1 – 4) but mandatory with writing function codes (FC15, 16).



abcd

46.4 Use

46.4.1 Function Code Chart

n bits read: Function Code 1 – Read Outputs [TREAT] = 1 Function Code 2 – Read Inputs [TREAT] = 2

NB – Numbers of Output to read (bits); max = 1200 (150*8)

n words read: Function Code 3 – Read Holding Registers [TREAT] = 3

Function Code 4 – Read Input Registers [TREAT] = 4

NB – Numbers of Registers to read (16 bit words); max = 125

n bits write: Function Code 15 – Write Multiple Coils [TREAT] = 15

[TABLE_IN] must be connected

NB – Numbers of Output to write (bits); max = 1200 Note: [TABLE_IN] is a word table. Each elements represent 16 bits.

n words write: Function Code 16 – Write Multiple Registers [TREAT] = 16

[TABLE_IN] must be connected

NB – Numbers of Registers to write (16 bit words); max = 120

Note : For the write operations, the output [TABLE] is equal [TABLE_IN].

46.4.2 How the Function Block works

• All inputs and parameters must be connected (except [TABLE_IN] according to the function code):



abcd

• The parameter [SLOT] is the slot number where the RX3i CPU is. [SLOT] must be set before to start the FB.

• [PORT] is the port number used for the communication. [PORT] must be set before to start the FB.

• To work, the FB needs internal memory (150 words in %R). [OFFSET] set the offset in this memory area.

• [TIMEOUT] selects the time before the request must be received. If [TIMEOUT] > 10000, the FB set [TIMEOUT] to 10000.

• Each cycle time, the FB sends a request (read or write) to the selected Modbus slave if [Enable] is set to 1

• The [DF] output indicates when the FB is in fault. And for more details see the [EXRE] output with the Exchange report Table • The output [EXRE] informs about the state of the communication and state of the FB • The output [TABLE] gives the value read from the slave. To Read data: It’s possible to read Output(s), Input(s), Holding register(s), Input register(s). All reading data are written into [TABLE]. The following actions have to be performed:

• Select the correct function code [TREAT] • Set the slave ID [S_ID] • Set the first element address [FEA] and the number of elements [NB_EL] to read from

the slave Important note: The reading values in [TABLE] are available, only when [EXRE] = 0 and [DF] = 0. To Write data: It’s possible to write (multiple) coil(s), (multiple) register(s): • Write bit(s) (coil(s)):

• The bit(s) to be written must be present in the [TABLE_IN] input • Select the correct function code [TREAT] • Set the slave ID [S_ID] • Set the first element address [FEA] and the number of elements [NB_EL] to write in the

slave • Write word(s) (register(s)):

• The word(s) to be written must be present in the [TABLE_IN] input • Select the correct function code [TREAT] • Set the slave ID [S_ID] • Set the first element address [FEA] and the number of elements [NB_EL] to write in the

slave



abcd

46.4.3 Exchange report table

[EXRE] indicates the report number. And the following table is used to interpret the value. [EXRE]

1 In Progress 0 Success -1 Timeout – response was not received within timeout. / Bloc not initialised -2 Bad Port Number – Port number must be 1 or 2 -3 Bad Slave ID – Slave ID must be in the range 1-247 -4 Bad Function Code – Function Code must be 1,2,3,4,15,16 -5 First Element Address is Zero, must be > 0 -6 Bad Local Address Offset – Start Addr + num of items > size of segment -7 Bad Rack Slot - CPU is not in slot specified in “C” block -8 Bad Buffer Offset – “C” block Input 5 not a good value need space for 150

46.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE

RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

STATUS Gives the status code for the Modbus communication W

STATE Gives the state of the Modbus communication W



MODBUS3I_M()



abcd

Section 47 MODBUS7_M : MODBUS MASTER INTERFACE C8075 MANAGEMENT

MODBUS7_M Specification version : 1.1 (01/19/04)


47.2 Function

This FB works on a C8075 only. It must be used in the first POU of the "OpLoop" program. The purpose of this function block “ MODBUS7_M ” is to elaborate the MODBUS question and manage, allow the demand of “Modbus Question” to one subscriber among several subscribers on the same network. Any question, asked to one subscriber, are established as following: -The question is sent to one subscriber on the network -The subscriber receives it and sends back an answer -Then the FB MODBUS7_M analyses the answer, up-dates the status of response and gives out the received data. To manage those questions and answers, the flag R_WAIT is set to one when any question is in progress, this indicator is an output parameter of the FB. To manage the MODBUS exchange, an array of several counters and some feedback or errors are managed and assigned to an output for maintenance or fault analysis. This FB realises 5 main MODBUS functions: Reading Words; Writing Words; Reading Bits; Writing Bits; Writing one Bit; The new demand must be validated by VAL input, when R_WAIT equals zero. Only one FB can be used on one channel at a time and only one Question number value can be present at the same time. Output data (for reading functions) are ready when EXRE equal 1 Defaults are set until next use of the faulted FB (Transition of VAL input from 0 to 1). The SNB input represents Ir139 logic address of slave subscriber as defined in the configuration of the IR139 board; refer to PSP13A4699-e "Configuring CE2000 Inputs/Outputs". The logic address fully identifies the subscriber and the IR139 Channel within the cell.



abcd

Inputs:

SNB : Ir139 logic address of slave subscriber TREAT: Treatment choice FEA : First Element Address in slave suscriber NB_VAL : NumBer of elements (or Value for one bit Write function) VAL : VALidate function request input (only necessary for starting the exchange)

Parameterisation : QUES : QUEStion number

Outputs:

DATA : Modbus exchange (input / output) TABLE DF : DeFault Indicator EXRE : EXchange REport R_CNTR : Array of Response error and feedback counter R_WAIT : MODBUS question in progress indicator



abcd



Def. value

Mand Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

Inputs SNB IR139 logic Slave number W N 1 à 255,0 for diffusion: This number

is translated by IR139 by the final Slave Address, as configured

Y Y

TREAT Treatment choice W N 1 or 2 =n bits read (1 or 2 function code) 3 or 4 =n words read (3 or 4 function code) 5 or 6 One bit Write (5 or 6 function code) 15 = n bits write (15 code) 16 = n words write (16)

Y Y

FEA First element address W N Y Y NB_VAL Elements number (or value

for write or define the data value to write for function code 5 or 6

W N word read 1 to 119 word write 1 to 100 bit read 1 to 1904 bit write 1 to 800 Value for one bit write must be : 0x00 for Writing "0" 0xff for Writing "1"

Y Y

VAL demand VALidate input BOOL. Y 1=Valid demand Y Y Outputs DF Indicator result BOOL. Y 1=Default exchange N Y 0 EXRE Exchange report W N 0 not significant,

1 correct answer; 2 exception answer; 3 incorrect answer; 4 question sending fault

Y Y 0

DATA Modbus input / output table (119 elements)

TW N Y Y

R_CNTR Array of Response error and feedback counter (9 elements)

TW N Row 0 waiting answer counter (non significant) Row 1 correct response counter Row 2 exception response counter Row 3 none or fault response counter Row 4 question error counter Row 5 question error feedback Row 6 response error feedback Row 7 word 2 of response Row 8 word 3 of response

N Y

R_WAIT MODBUS question in progress

BOOL N 1: Exchange in progress 0: Not in progress

N Y

Parame ters

QUES Question number W N 0-255 Y Y



abcd

47.4 USE

The management of the Modbus exchanges function is used in the ALSPA P320 system step 5.0 to allow Modbus exchanges with equipment connected with C80-75 via the F8000 network and the IR139 module fitted in a CE2000 I/O controller. It is in charge of: - The consideration of the Modbus questions elaborated by the automatism application, - The management of the broadcast of the Modbus questions messages on the F8000 network after setting in the format defined for this type of exchange, - The management of the Modbus answers messages coming from the F8000 network, - The putting at disposition of the application of the Modbus answers after discompacting. All these operations are accompanied with the controls of good progress of the exchanges (coherence of the questions and the answers, global time of answer…). The elements of the cell C80-75 concerned by the Modbus exchanges are : - The C80-75 head of cell controller simplex or redundant, - The CE2000 I/O controller in charge of the coupling to the physical network Modbus (connection RS232 / RS485) via the module IR139, - Equipment coupled with the Modbus network. In this architecture, the equipment Master of the Modbus exchanges is always the C80-75 controller, the other equipment connected to the Modbus network being Slave. When the C80-75 is redundant, only the Master CPU can emit the Modbus questions. In the aimed typical architectures, the distribution of equipment and connections is the following one: - 1 to 12 CE2000 controller by cell, - 1 or 2 IR139 couplers by CE2000, - 1 way only (physical Modbus network) used by coupler IR139, - 1 demand of Modbus question broadcast maximum is generated during an application cycle for each of the physical networks. These two last items may be combined to ensure correct communication and performances. R_CRNTR details and Explanation: R_CNTR Array of Response error

and feedback counter (9 elements)

Row 0 waiting answer counter (non significant) : Perpetual counter Row 1 correct response counter : EXRE = 1 counter Row 2 exception response counter : EXRE = 2 counter Row 3 none or fault response counter : EXRE = 3 counter Row 4 question error counter : EXRE = 4 counter Row 5 question error feedback Row 6 response error feedback Row 7 word 2 of response Row 8 word 3 of response

The function block manages an array of several counters, errors and feedbacks. In case of MODBUS link communication fault, the values in the array allow to analyse which is the fault. Have a look at which counter is increased on R_CRNTR output. Increases of R_CRNTR row 2, an exception response indicates that the slave subscriber answer, but the question is incorrect, an error code is given in word 3 of response (R_CRNTR row 8). Increases of R_CRNTR row 3, there is no or fault response, look at response error feedback (R_CRNTR row 6).



abcd

Increases of R_CRNTR row 4, the question is incorrect and/or not sent, look at question error feedback (R_CRNTR row 5).

47.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) I_RES_CNT

R Internal Reset Counter Command B - Memorization but no Redundant Variable

R_CNTR_V Array of error counter memorisation TW - Memorization but no Redundant Variable R_WAIT R_WAIT memorisation B -4 Memorization but no Redundant Variable

The system array TAB_MBUS_Q_R (MODBUS Question Response array) can be useful for debugging Modbus Exchange: It is uses to store and receive data exchanged with the system (action demand and feedback, question for sending out, and response).



MBEM _M(). The MBEM Modbus exchange management function in C80-75 is a simple system basic function. It is to be used in specialised function blocks developed by applications according to the specificity of the various Modbus subscribers. This BF is described in : USER’S MANUAL S.B.F.L.(system basic function library); P-TP21-A40067



abcd

Section 48 MOVE2W_R : CONVERSION

MOVE2W_R Specification version : 1.0 (05/17/06)


48.2 Function

Inputs : MSW : First Input : Most Significant Word , LSW : Second Input : Less Significant Word, Outputs : REAL : IEE 754 Format Real Convert a IEE 754 Format real coded on 2 words (16 bits) in one real (32 bits) ;



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs MSW Most Significant

Word W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y

LSW Less Significant Word

W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y

Outputs REAL IEE 754 Format

Real R N 3.4 E+/- 38 Y - Y



abcd

48.4 Use

48.5 SPECIFICATIONS



Internal variables : 1 real and 2 words.



None.



abcd

Section 49 MOVER_2W : CONVERSION

MOVER_2W Specification version : 1.0 (05/17/06)


49.2 Function

Inputs : REAL : IEE 754 Format Real

Outputs : MSW : First Input : Most Significant Word , LSW : Second Input : Less Significant Word, Convert a IEE 754 Format real (32 bits) in two words (16 bits) ;



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs REAL IEE 754 Format

Real R N 3.4 E+/- 38 Y - Y

Outputs MSW Most Significant

Word W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y

LSW Less Significant Word

W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y



abcd

49.4 Use

49.5 SPECIFICATIONS



Internal variables : 1 real and 2 words.



None.



abcd

Section 50 MOVE_SP : WRITE VARIABLE IN OTHER

MOVE_SP Specification version : 1.0 (09/27/07)


50.2 Function

Inputs : REAL or INTEGER : RW variable.

Outputs :

REAL or INTEGER : STP variable.

Write RW input in STP output ;



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs REAL

INTEGER RW Variable R

I N +-3.4 E+/- 38

-32768 to 32767 Y - Y

Outputs REAL

INTEGER SetPoint variable

R I

N +-3.4 E+/- 38 -32768 to 32767

Y - Y



abcd

50.4 Use

50.5 SPECIFICATIONS



Internal variables : none.



None.



abcd

Section 51 MO2 / MO2W : MOTOR WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS COMMAND




abcd

51.1 REPRESENTATION

51.2 FUNCTION

This treatment controls motor with 2 logic orders commands without intermediate position switch.



abcd


If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set motor stop state with the output [OFF_ORDER] set to 1.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set motor start state with the output [ON_ORDER] set to 1.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 2, then the treatment is initialized in accordance with the motor position (the motor stays started or stopped without starting or stopping orders).


After a start demand (non-latched) [A(M)_ON_DMD] and if release starting [REL_ON] is present, the motor starting order is transmitted, [ON_ORDER]. The contactor return [ON] confirms the motor started [ON_ST]and reset starting order [ON_ORDER] .

After a stop demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OFF_DMD] and if release stopping [REL_OFF] is present, the motor stopping order is transmitted [OFF_ORDER]. The contactor return [OFF] confirms the motor stopped [OFF_ST]and reset stopping order [OFF_ORDER].

If the two demands [A(M)_ON_DMD] and [A(M)_OFF_DMD] are present at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_OFF_DMD] have priority.

If the treatment realizes a stopping or starting demand, it is possible to have the reverse demand after the output [ON_ORDER] or [OFF_ORDER] is no more presents.

The orders [ON_ORDER] and [OFF_ORDER] are exclusives.


The SAFETY OPERATION has highest priority and does no need release condition.

- MOTOR SAFETY POSITION

If safety starting (latched) [SAF_ON] is set, the motor starting order is transmitted, [ON_ORDER] is present until the contactor started [ON] is true. the treatment becomes in safety starting state [SAF_ON_ST] as long as safety starting [SAF_ON] is set.

If safety stopping (latched) [SAF_OFF] is set, the motor stopping order is transmitted, [OFF_ORDER] is present until the contactor stopped [OFF] is true. the treatment becomes in safety stopping state [SAF_OFF_ST] as long as safety stopping [SAF_OFF] is set.



If the treatment is in safety [SAF_ON_ST] or [SAF_OFF_ST], and the [SAF_ON] and [SAF_OFF] are no more existing then the motor returns to normal operation.



abcd


- MOTOR IN PROBLEM

If the control cell is disturbed or in test mode, [DISTURB] presence or [TEST] presence, the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the motor is in starting [ON_ST] or safety starting [SAF_ON_ST] and [ON] is lost or [OFF] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the motor is in stopping [OFF_ST] or safety stopping [SAF_OFF_ST] and [OFF] is lost or [ON] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the real starting time (contactor response time [ON]) is superior to the starting time [ON_T] parameter or the real stopping time (contactor response time [OFF]) is superior to the stopping time [OFF_T] parameter, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

[DES_T] corresponds to the maximum time allowed to loose the contactors after starting or stopping order. If the real contactors disengaging time is superior to the [DES_T] parameter then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the motor started contactor return is defected [ON_DEF] or the motor stopped contactor return is defected [OFF_DEF] the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the motor started contactor return [ON] is present at the same time than the motor stopped contactor return [OFF] more than 1 cycle time then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], the motor order (starting or stopping) is unchanged, only [PROBLEM] output is present.


If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DISTURB] and not in test mode [TEST] combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the motor in problem state and allows a return to normal operation.

In test position [TEST] the power supply is interrupted inside the MCC



During safety starting or safety stopping phase the functional state [SAF_ON_ST], [SAF_OFF_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_ON], [SAF_OFF] disappear.

During starting and stopping phases (waiting contactor response or contactor lost), the functional states [ON_ST], [OFF_ST] and [PROBLEM] are not positioned.

When the treatment changes from degraded mode or safety mode to normal mode, it waits a demand or a contactor return to place it in the corespondent functional states.




abcd


The [CUR_OFF_T] data indicates the current value of stopping time, this value is in unit 0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [OFF_T] and decrease until 0.

The [CUR_ON_T] data indicates the current value of starting time, this value is in unit 0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [ON_T] and decrease until 0.





abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

A_ON_DMD Auto starting dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_ON_DMD Manu starting dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

REL_ON Release starting B N - N 1 Y - -

SAF_ON Safety starting B N - N 0 Y - -

A_OFF_DMD Auto stopping dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_OFF_DMD Manu stopping dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

REL_OFF Release stopping B N - N 1 Y - -

SAF_OFF Safety stopping B N - N 0 Y - -

ON Fdc start B N - N (*) N -

ON_DEF 1 = Fdc start ON defect

B Y - N 0 Y - -

OFF Fdc stopped B N - N (*) N -

OFF_DEF 1 = Fdc stopped OFF defect

B Y - N 0 Y - -



TEST Test mode ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -

Outputs


ON_ST Starting state B N N - Y - 0

OFF_ST Stopping state B N N - Y - 0

SAF_OFF_ST Safety stopping state

B N N - Y - 0

SAF_ON_ST Safety starting state B N N - Y - 0


ON_ORDER Starting order B N Y - Y - 0

OFF_ORDER Stopping order B N Y - Y - 0

CUR_OFF_T Current value of stopping time in decreasing way

D N N - Y - 0

CUR_ON_T Current value of starting time in decreasing way

D N N - Y - 0


D N N - Y - 0

Parameters - - - - - - - - -



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value


B N - N 0 Y - -


OFF_T Contactor response time after an stopping demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -

ON_T Contactor response time after an starting demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -

DES_T Contactor disengaging time after an starting or stopping demand

D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -


51.4 CONFIGURATION

• TYPE MO1 or FC : Without test feedback from MCC.

• TYPE BKR : - It’s maximal I / O configuration with all position feedback.

• TYPE MO1 or FC or BKR with one feedback missing (ON or OFF). The position feedback is calculated as following: - Without position feedback : If [ON] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created outside the block. If [OFF] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created outside the block.

• USE


• Scheme : None




abcd



abcd

51.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : • 10 booleans, 10 integers, 2 words (amongst which 1 state variable) and 12 doubles (amongst

which 3 state variables) for MO2, • 10 booleans, 10 integers, 5 words (amongst which 4 state variables) and 12 doubles for

MO2W.



MO2().



abcd

Section 52 MULMC_(I,D) : MULTIPLICATION

MULMC _I Specification version : 1.1 (12/04/00) MULMC _D Specification version : 1.1 (12/04/00)


52.2 Function

Inputs : IN1 : First Input , IN2 : Second Input , Outputs : RE : Analogue output ENO : Output Error ENO = 0 IF ( IN1<-32000 ) THEN ENO = 1 ; IN1=-32000 ENDIF IF ( IN1 > 32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; IN1= 32000 ENDIF IF ( IN2<-32000 ) THEN ENO = 1 ; IN2=-32000 ENDIF IF ( IN2 > 32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; IN2= 32000 ENDIF IF (IN1=0 OR IN2=0) THEN RE = 0 ELSE

RE = (IN1 * IN2)/10000 ( in double length) IF (RE < -32000) THEN ENO = 1; RE = -32000 ENDIF IF (RE > 32000 ) THEN ENO = 1; RE = 32000 ENDIF

ENDIF



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN1 First Input I/D Y -32000 to+32000

(-320,00 to 320,00 %) Y - Y

IN2 Second Input I/D Y -32000 to+32000 (-320,00 to 320,00 %)

Y - Y

Outputs RE Output I/D N -32000 to+32000

(-320,00 to 320,00 %) Y - Y 0

ENO Output Error BOOL N 1 = Output Error or input out of range

N - Y 0

52.4 Use

52.5 SPECIFICATIONS



Internal variables : 1 boolean and 2 doubles.



MULMC_D().



abcd

Section 53 MVS_WB_D : MEAN VALUE OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL

MVS_WB_D Specification version : 1.7 (04/08/2002)

53.1 REPRESENTATION

Example with 4 inputs and NB = 2

IV1 = 0

BKRE

IV2 = 0

IV3 = 0

IV4 = 0

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

0

SUM

S U M

DF

MAX1

DIV

<

NB = 2

NBVAL



abcd



abcd

53.2 FUNCTION

This function block calculs the mean of undisturbed input [INx]. If less [NB] input signals are good [IVx] then the output [RE] equal the backup value [BK] and the defect [DF] is set. NBVAL is the number of undisturbed input [INx].

If the backup value [BK] is not defined then if all input [INx] are bad data quality [IVx] then the output [RE] equal the last value of output [RE] (t-1) before defect.

If [NB] value is higher than number of input x then [NB] = x.

If [NB] value is lower than number of input x then [NB] = 1.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 Input value 1 W,I,D,L,R Y - Y - Y - -


N 1 Y - -



N 1 Y - -

INx Input value x W,I,D,L,R N - N 0 Y - -


N 1 Y - -

IN10 Input value 10 W,I,D,L ,R N - N 0 Y - -


N 1 Y - -


IVBK Valid Backup value B Y 1 for valid N 1 Y

Outputs

RE Output value W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - BK if connected else 0


NBVAL Number of valid inputs

D N - N - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

NB Number of minimum good value

W - [ 1, 10 ] N 1 Y - -



abcd

53.4 USE :


• Scheme : None


53.5 SPECIFICATION

Internal Variable and State variables None Function block code None Basic function used : None



abcd

Section 54 OSC_D : OSCILLATOR

OSC_D Specification version : 1.3 (01/29/01)

54.1 representation

54.2 Function

• INITIALISATION : The output RE is equal to 0.

• NORMAL OPERATION : The output RE is equal to 0 during the time defined by the parametre T_NACT.

The output RE is equal to 1 during the time defined by the parametre T_ACT.

Duration of pulse in 0.01 second. D type integer : maximum value + 2,147 * 109 If T_ACT and(or) T_NACT is less than cycle time, it is considered to be 0 then the output RE is always equal at 0. The real time is function of cycle time.

The output RE is calculated in function of cycle time.

Example : If T_ACT = 190 (1.9 sec.) and IF Tcyc = 0,5 sec, the output RE is equal at 1 during (1.9 / 0.5 = 3 « integer ») 3 cycles therefore ( 3 * 0. 5 = 1.5) 1.5 seconds.



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

- - - - - - - - -

Outputs

RE

Output

B

Y

-

Y

-

Y

-

0

Parameters - - - - - - - - - T_ACT Time duration for

output = 1 Duration N - Y - Y -

T_NACT Time duration for output = 0

Duration N - Y - Y -

54.4 USE :

• Parameters to initialize :

Not applicable

• Scheme : None


• Scheme : None

54.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 1 boolean (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 duration (amongst which 1 state variable).



abcd



OSC().



abcd

Section 55 OSL : ONE-SHOT LIMITED


55.1 REPRESENTATION

55.2 FUNCTION


The dynamic input triggers a single pulse, the maximum duration of which is given by the time TP parameter.However, if the input signals returns to zero, the output will do the same, even if the specified time TP has not yet elapsed since the start of the pulse.

TP : DURATION


The output REB is calculated in function of cycle time.





abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN Input value B N - Y - Y - -

Outputs

REB Output result B N - Y - Y - -

RET Output time D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

N - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

TP Time value D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -

55.4 USE :


1

0

1

0

TP

0

IN

REB

RET

T

TP TPTP



abcd

• Scheme : None


55.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 1 boolean (amongst which 1 state variable) and 3 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables).



OSL().



abcd

Section 56 P_STEP : STEP OF SEQUENCE CONTROL

P_STEP Specification version : 1.4 (04/15/03)

56.1 REPRESENTATION

56.2 Function

Inputs: ACK : Acknowledge the step in case of disturbance STOP : set all outputs to 0 (reset) STI : step input OVC : overrun criteria ASI : alternative step input T_ACT: validation of time supervision PRC : process criteria PR_ST: previous step

Parameterisation : T_DELAY: delay time before activation of the next step in the sequencer T_MON : monitoring time : maximum allowable elapsed time for activation of the step

Outputs: STO : step output ASO : alternative step output ORD : order DIST: maximum allowable elapsed time reached CR_ST: current step NX_ST: next step



abcd

Main function This function block (FB) realises a step of sequence control, i.e. the block function activates a step, and once this step is done, the next one may be activated. For example : below, a usual use of the block “step of sequence control”. The aim is to start 2 motors : M1 and M2. In this example, the motor M1 is started at first, and before starting the motor M2, we want to be sure that M1 is really started.

Sequence diagram Description Example

Input STI receives a pulse. The FB sets ORD to 1 to start activation of the commanded actuators. M1 required operation is done. The input PRC is set to 1. The FB sets STO to 1.

The process wants to start the motor M1. The FB activates the motor M1. Feed back from the process : the motor M1 is really started. Release to activate next step in the sequencer .

sequence stopped

no

ORD=1

PRC=1

STI=1 ?

STO=1

yes

yes

no

Go to next step

sequence stopped (T MON



abcd

Alternative functions • The input STOP is set to 1 (whatever the other inputs and the step has been activated by a pulse order on STI) : all the outputs are set to 0 (STO, ASO, ORD). • The input ASI is set to 1 (whatever the other inputs but STOP=0) : - STO and ORD set to 0. - ASO set to 1 after a time delay. • The input OVC is set to 1 (whatever the other inputs but STO and ASI=0) : - ASO and ORD set to 0. - STO set to 1 at next cycle • After the step has been activated the actuation time is monitored and DIST is set to 1 if this time exceeds T_MON. This time supervision can be inhibited by the input T_ACT (end step ) • The inputs ASI, OVC and PRC are validated only if the step has been activated, that is if the internal signal (ACTIVE) has been set to 1 by a pulse order on STI. • The time delay aims to avoid processing two steps at the same time. External logic may be added to make sure that such a situation never occurs. • In case of disturbance in one sequence all outputs of the steps are set to 0 by the input STOP (order sent by a ‘function group’ block) • The inputs ACK Acknowledge the step in case of disturbance If ACTIVE then CR_ST=PR_ST + 1 Else CR_ST=0 NX_ST= PR_ST + 1 always Truth table: Inputs Internal Outputs STOP STI ASI OVC PRC ACK ACTIVE DIST STO ASO ORD comments 1 x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 Step stuck 0 0→1 0 0 0 0→1 0 0 0 0→1 Only way to activate the step 0 x 0 0 0→1 1→0 0→1

after a time delay

0 1→0 End of step activation, there is a time delay to avoid having two steps running at the same time

0 x 0→1

x x 1→0 0 0→1 at next cycle

1→0 ASI has the priority over OVC and PRC

0 x 0 0→1 x 1→0 0→1 at next cycle

0 1→0 OVC has the priority over PRC

0 0→1 0 0 1 0 0→1 0 0 The actuators commanded by the step are not activated

0 0→1 1 x x 0 0 0→1 0 The actuators commanded by the step are not activated

0 0→1 0 1 x 0 0→1 0 0 The actuators commanded by the step are not activated



abcd

1 0→1 if timeout

DIST is set only if a timeout is detected during active phase.

0 0 x x x 0 0 0 0 Waiting state x x x x 1 1 1 1->0 0→1 0 0 Acknoledge Disturbance state



abcd



Def value

Mand Data

Advis Param value

First scan value

Inputs ACK Acknoledge

disturbance state

BOOL

Y N Y

STOP stop the step BOOL

Y 1 = active Y Y

STI step input BOOL

Y Y Y

OVC overrun criteria BOOL

Y Y Y

ASI alternative step input

BOOL

Y Y Y

T_ACT Time supervision activation

BOOL

Y Y Y

PRC process criteria BOOL

Y Y Y

PR_ST Previous step W N Y Y Outputs STO step output BOO

L Y N Y 0

ASO alternative step output

BOOL

Y N Y 0

ORD order BOOL

Y N Y 0

DIST maximum time reached

BOOL

Y Y Y 0

CR_ST Current step W N N Y 0 NX_ST next step W N N Y 0 Parameters T_DELAY

Delay time W N 0 to 32000 for 0 to 320.00s

Y Y

T_MON Speed Filter cut off Frequency.

W N 0 to 32000 for 0 to 320.00s

Y Y



abcd

56.4 Use


56.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL

(R)

ACTIVE 1 =step active BOOL Redundant Variable

ASOW ASO to be sent at the next cycle

BOOL - Redundant Variable

MAXCYC Nb of cycles allowed remaining W Redundant Variable

STIP STI value at previous step BOOL Redundant Variable

STOW STO to be send at the next cycle

BOOL - Redundant Variable

ASO BOOL - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

DIST BOOL Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

MAXDELAY Nb of cycles reaching T_DELAY W Memorisation but no

Redundant Variable

ORD BOOL - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

STO BOOL - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable


C



abcd


P_STEP().



abcd

Section 57 PID : PROPORTIONAL INTEGRATED DERIVATED

PID_D, PID_DR : specification version 1.3 (07/22/02)

57.1 REPRESENTATION



abcd

0

100

EPS

0

100

RE

0

1

TC

0

1

II

Exemple of tracking command (using TC) and integrator inhibition (using II), without derivative action (kd=0).



abcd

-100

100

EPS

-100

100

RE

0

0

SNS=1 SNS=0

Exemple of sensibility

0

100

EPS

Detail of P, I and D

0

100

P

0

100

I

0

100

D



abcd

57.2 FUNCTION

This treatment establishes a reference with a PID governing loop (PID regulator) according to the deviation between a measure and a set-point (or a set-point and a measure).

• INITIALIZATION : The output [RE] is set in accordance to the init value [IV] during the first scan.


The output [RE] is a PID function (Proportional integral derivative) according to the difference [IN+] - [IN-].

The input [P] fixes the proportionnal action on the deviation.

The inputs [lu] fixes the increasing integral action ([IN+] > [IN-]) : 0 means no integration and the value must be ≥ 3 * sampling Time (Sofware reacts if lu < 3 Ts).

The inputs [ld] fixes the decreasing integral action ([IN+] < [IN-]): 0 means no integration and the value must be ≥ 3 * sampling Time (Sofware reacts if ld < 3 Ts).

The integral action is calculated with the [RET] input (the input [SV] is substracted to the [RET], to avoid a saturation of the integrator).

The inputs [Kd] and [D] fixe the derivative action.

The output [EPS] is the difference [IN+] - [IN-].

In any case, the input [SV] is summarized to the output : [RE] = P + I + D + [SV]

• PARAMETERS MODIFICATION :

It’s possible to modify the time parameters [lu], [ld] and [D], and the gain parameters [ki], [kd] and [P] during operation : the treatment takes the new values into account, if they are valid.

The parameter [D] can't be set to 0 .

• TRACKING MODE :

If the tracking command [TC] is set, then the output [RE] follows tracking value [TV] without delay. The output [TRCK] is set to 1.

• INTEGRAL INHIBITION :

When the input [II] is set to 1, the integral calculation is locked, and stays at its precedent value.

• SENSIBILITY :

When the input [SNS] is set to 1, if the [HI] limit is reached, when the [EPS] signal decreases (but remains positive), the output [RE] decreases ( [P] * { [IN]-[IN(-1)] } ). When the input [SNS] is set to 1, if the [LO] limit is reached, when the [EPS] signal increases (but remains negative), the output [RE] increases ( [P] * { [IN]-[IN(-1)] } ).

If the input [SNS] is set to 0, and if the [HI] limit is reached, when the [EPS] signal decreases (but remains positive), the output [RE] remains at [HI].



abcd

If the input [SNS] is set to 0, and if the [LO] limit is reached, when the [EPS] signal increases (but remains negative), the output [RE] remains at [LO].

• LIMITATION MODE :

The output [RE] is kept between the specified high [HI] and lower [LO] limits.

If the output [RE] equal high limit [HI] then the output high limit reached [HL] is set to 1.

If the output [RE] equal low limit [LO] then the output low limit reached [LL] is set to 1.

If the low limit [LO] is greater than high limit [HI] then the output [RE] is equal to high limit and the high reached [HL] and low limit reached [LL] are set to 1.

It’s possible to modify the specific limit [HI] [LO] during operation, in this case the output [RE] is kept between these new limits.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN+ Set point I,D Y - Y Y - -

IN- Measure I,D Y - N 0 Y - -

SV Shift value I,D Y - N 0 Y - -

RET Return input I,D N - N 0 Y [RE] -

II Integrator inhibition B N 1=inhibition N 0 Y - -

TC Tracking command B N 1=tracking N 0 Y - -

TV Tracking value I,D Y - N 0 Y - -

Outputs

RE Output I,D N - Y Y - IV

EPS Deviation setpoint/measure

I,D N - N Y - -

LL Low limit active B N 1=limit active N Y - -

HL High limit active B N 1=limit active N Y - -

TRK Tracking mode active

B N 1=tracking N Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - -

IV Initial value I,D N - N 0 Y - -

LO Low limit value I,D Y - N Maxi of I,D Y - -

HI High limit value I,D Y - N Mini of I,D

Y - -

P Proportionnal gain W,D N (a) N 100 Y - -



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Lu Increasing integrator time constant

W,D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

0=no integration

Mini of 3 Time sampling

Y Y ≥3 x Ts -

Ld Decreasing integrator time constant

W,D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s

0=no integration

Mini of 3 Time sampling

Y Y ≥3 x Ts -

Kd Derivative gain W,D N - N 0 Y - -

D Derivative time constant

W,D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1 s ≠ 0

N 100 Y - -

SNS Sensibility B N 1=sensibility N 0 Y - -

(a) The Gain value is defined as following : Type D,W,I,L then 100 = Gain of 1. Type R then 100 = Gain of 100.

57.4 CONFIGURATION

None

57.5 USE


• Scheme : Operation mode scheme



abcd

Associated FGT : None

57.6 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 3 booleans and 13 doubles (amongst which 6 state variables).



PID_D().

Σ +

- [IN+] [IN-]

[EPS]

MUL

[P]

MUL [Kd] dv/dt

[D]

[RET] ∫[lu] [ld]

[II]

Σ +

+

+

PD

I

[TV]

[TC]

[HI] [LO]

MIN MAX

[TRK]

[LL][HL]

[RE]

[HI]

[LO]

Σ +

+

[SV]

Σ +

- [SV]



abcd

Section 58 PIDMC_(I,D) : PID MACHINE CONTROL

PIDMC_D Specification version : 1.9 (11/13/01) PIDMC_R Specification version : 1.9 (11/13/01)


58.2 Function

Diagram:

IV

PITP : PI Type

+

-x

INTP : Initalisation Type

P.I.D

SP

ME

RE

Inputs :



abcd

SP : Input plus (input of setpoint), ME : Input minus (analogue input of measurement), INTP: Initialization type (BOOL): - TRUE = fast initialization, - FALSE = continuous initialization. II : Integrator Inhibition (BOOL); PITP : PI type (BOOL): - TRUE = PID operator, - FALSE = operator I, where P term is initialized at 1. IV : analogue value used for initializing the integrator. SV : shift value for adding with PID result. Outputs : RE : PID analogue output EPS : Epsilon output ENO : Output Error HL : Logic output; High Limit LL : Logic output; Low Limit Parameterization : P The adjustment of the values for the various terms Iu The adjustment of the values for the integration constant for positive epsilon Id The adjustment of the values for the integration constant for negative epsilon D The adjustment of the values for the derive constant HI High limit value. LO Low limit value. Local variables : e1, e11, EPS (epsilon), PTM (proportional action), DTM (derivative action), ITM (integral action) IF INIT THEN REP = 0;INTPP = 0;PTMP = 0;ITMP = 0;ITMP10P6=0; RE=0;EPS=0;ENO=0;HL=0;LL=0; ELSE IF HI < LO THEN RE = HI ;HL=1 ;LL=1; ELSE ENO(K) = FALSE;HL=0 ;LL=0; e1(K) = IV(K) - RE(K-1) IF e1(K) > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ; e1(K) = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ELSE IF e1(K) < range min THEN e1(K) = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF IF e1(K) > 1o/oo THEN e11(K)= e1(K)- 1o/oo ELSE(|e1(K)| <=1o/oo) IF e1(K) < 1o/oo THEN e11(K) = e1(K) +1o/oo ELSE (|e1(K)|>=1o/oo) e11(K) = 0; ENDIF ENDIF EPS(K) = SP(K)- ME(K) (epsilon value) IF EPS(K) =0 OR P = 0 THEN PTM = 0 ELSE IF ESP(K) > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;



abcd

ESP(K) = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ELSE IF ESP(K) < range min THEN ESP(K) = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF IF P > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ; P = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ELSE IF P < range min THEN P = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF PTM(K) = P * EPS(K) ; ENDIF IF PTM(K) = PTM(K –1) OR D = 0 THEN DTM = 0 ELSE IF D > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ; D = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ELSE IF D < range min THEN D = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF DTM(K) = ((PTM(K) - PTM(K-1)) * D)/CYC ; ENDIF PTM(K-1) = PTM(K) IF ((Iu !=0) AND (Id != 0)) THEN IF e11 !=0 (Init. In progress) THEN IF INTP(K) =1 (MIN /MAX selector follow PID corrector ) AND INTP(K-1) =1 (Since the last iteration) THEN IF SV > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ; SV = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ELSE IF SV < range min THEN SV = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF IF (e11<0 & EPS>0) (MIN corrector follow) THEN ITM =Hi – PTM – SV ELSE IF (e11>0 & EPS<0) (MAX corrector follow) THEN ITM = Lo – PTM - SV ELSE ITM(K)= ITM(K-1)+ e11 (instantaneous initialization with epsilon value); ENDIF ; ENDIF ELSE ITM(K) = ITM(K-1) + e11 (instantaneous initialization with epsilon value); ENDIF ELSE IF II==FAUX THEN



abcd

IF (PTM>0) THEN IF Iu > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ; Iu = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ELSE IF Iu < range min THEN Iu = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF ITM(K) = ITM(K-1)+ (PTM(K) * CYC * Iu) ELSE (PTM<=0) IF Id > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ; Id = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ELSE IF Id < range min THEN Id = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF ITM(K) = ITM(K-1)+ (PTM(K) * CYC * Id) ; ENDIF IF ITM(K) > MAX THEN ITM(K) = MAX ELSE IF ITM(K) < MIN THEN ITM(K) = MIN; ENDIF; ENDIF ELSE (Iu == 0 OR Id==0 : No Integral action) ITM(K) = 0; ENDIF IF PITP == 1 THEN IF SV > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ; SV = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ELSE IF SV < range min THEN SV = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF RE(K) = PTM(K) + ITM (K) + DTM(K) + SV(K) ELSE (PITP == 0) RE(K) = ITM (K); ENDIF IF RE (K) >= HI Then RE (K) = HI ; HL=1 ELSE IF RE (K) <= LO Then RE (K) = LO ; LL=1; ENDIF ENDIF IF HI<=LO Then Re (K) = HI ; HL=1 ; LL=1 INTP(K-1) = INTP(K) IF Calculation error or input out of range THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ELSE ENO(K) = FALSE; ENDIF



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs SP Input plus D/R Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y - Y

ME Input minus D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

Y - Y

IV Initialization value D/R Y -20000 to +20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

PITP Corrector type BOOL.

Y 1 = PID + Sv / 0 =I N 1 Y

II Integratior Inhibition BOOL.

Y 1 = Integral term frozen if no init conditions

N 0 Y

INTP Initialization Type : () BOOL.

Y 1 = MIN /MAX selector follow PID function ; 0 = Init. Standard

N 0 Y

SV Shift value D/R Y -20000 to +20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

Outputs RE Output D/R Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y - Y 0

EPS Sortie Epsilon D/R Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N Y 0

ENO Output Error BOOL Y 1 = Output Error N - Y 0 HL High Limit BOOL Y N Y - 0 LL Low Limit BOOL Y N Y - 0

Parameters

P Prop. Gain D/R N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00)

Y - Y

Iu Integrator Gain for Positive epsilon

D/R N 0 to+10000 0,000 to 10,000 r/s

N 0 Y

Id Integrator Gain for negative epsilon

D/R N 0 to+10000 0,000 to 10,000 r/s

N 0 Y

D Derivative. Gain D/R N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00) s

N 0 Y

LO © Output Min D/R Y -20000 to +20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N -20000 Y

HI © Output Max. D/R Y -20000 to +20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 20000 Y

58.4 Use

58.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) REP Output (K-1) D 0 Memorization but no Redundant Variable

PTMP Proportional term(K-1) D 0 R INTPP initialization type(K-1) BOOL 0 R ITMP Integral term(K-1) D 0 R

ITMP10P6 10-6 part of integral action (K-1) D 0 Memorization but no Redundant Variable



abcd


• 7 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 12 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables) for PIDMC_D,

• 7 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10 reals (amongst which 3 state variables) for PIDMC_R.



PIDMC_D() and PIDMC_R().



abcd

Section 59 PIDS_(I,D) : PID CORRECTOR WITH STATISM

PIDS_I Specification version: 1.8 (02/11/02) PIDS_D Specification version: 1.8 (02/11/02)


59.2 Function

Inputs : SP : Input plus ( setpoint ),

s6PIPTS G

PIDS

s7DELTA I

MEs2 s5

EPS EPS P PIPT PROPINT RE

SP s4D

-+

-+

+

+

+

+



abcd

ME : Input minus (analogue input measurement), IV : analogue value used for initializing the integrator. IC : Initialization order. IRV : Insensibilisation Order. SCI : Integration Validation. SIL : Statism corrector validation. ETO : Test pulse order. Outputs : RE : PID analogue output EPS : Epsilon output PIPT : Proportional term output ENO : Output error Parameterization : P The adjustment of the values for the Proportional terms I The adjustment of the values for the integration constant D The adjustment of the values for the derive constant S The adjustment of the values for the Statism. INSP Insensibility range for ###-###moy > 0 INSM Insensibility range for ###- ###moy< 0 ECH Rung value for test. HI High limit value. LO Low limit value. ENO(K) = FALSE EPS(K) = SP(K) - ME(K) IF IRV(K) = 1 THEN IF INSM > range max THEN

INSM = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

IF INSM < range min THEN INSM = range min (see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

IF INSP > range max THEN INSP = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

IF INSP < range min THEN INSP = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

IF EPS(K) < INSM THEN EPS(K) = EPS(K) – INSM ELSE IF EPS(K) > INSP THEN EPS(K) = EPS(K) – INSP ELSE EPS(K) = 0 ENDIF ENDIF ENDIF IF ETO(K) = 1 THEN EPS(K) = EPS(K) + ECH ENDIF IF EPS(K) > range max THEN

EPS(K) = range max( see below input range in Arguments characteristics)



abcd

ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF IF EPS(K) < range min THEN

EPS(K) = range min ( see below input range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

IF D > range max THEN D = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

IF D < range min THEN D = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

DER(K) = ((EPS (K) - EPS (K-1)) * D) / Te IF SIL(K) = 1 THEN

IF S > range max THEN S = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

IF S < range min THEN S = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

PIPTS(K)= P*S*PROPINT(K-1) / 106 DELTA(K)=PIPT(K) – PIPTS(K)

EPS(K) = EPS(K) – (S * PROPINT (K-1)) ENDIF IF P > range max THEN

P = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE; ENDIF

IF P < range min THEN P = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

PIPT(K) = P * EPS(K) IF IC (K) = 1 THEN INTEG(K) = IV (K) - P * EPS(K) ELSE IF SCI (K) = 1 THEN

IF I > range max THEN I = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

IF I < range min THEN I = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics) ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF

INTEG(K) = INTEG(K-1) + LPIT(K)*DELTA(K)/ 106 ELSE

INTEG(K) =0 ENDIF

ENDIF PROPINT(K) = PITP(K) + INTEG(K) RE(K) = PROPINT(K)+ DER(K) IF RE(K) > HI THEN RE(K) = HI ELSE IF RE(K) < LO THEN RE(K) = LO ! ENDIF ENDIF



abcd

If HI<LO Then Re (K) = HI IF Calculation error or input out of range THEN! ENO(K) = TRUE ELSE ENO(K) = FALSE ENDIF



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs SP Input plus (Set

point) I/D Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y - Y

ME Input minus (Measurement)

I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

Y - Y

IV Initialization value I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

IRV Dead band function order

BOOL.

Y - N 0 Y

SCI Integral action validation

BOOL.

Y - N 0 Y

IC Initialization order BOOL.

Y - N 0 Y

SIL Delta action validation (statism)

BOOL.

Y - N 0 Y

ETO Test pulse order on input plus (ECH)

BOOL.

Y - N 0 Y

Outputs RE Controller Output I/D Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) N Y 0

PIPT PI proportional term I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N Y 0

EPS Sortie Epsilon I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N Y 0

ENO Output error BOOL Y 1=Output error N Y 0 Parameters

INSP Dead band value for ### > 0

I/D N 0 to+20000 (0 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y

INSM Dead band value for ###< 0

I/D N -20000 to 0 (-200,00 to 0 %)

N 0 Y

P Proportional Gain I/D N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00)

Y Y

I Integrator Gain I/D N 0 to+10000 0,000 to 10,000 r/s

N 0 Y

D Derivative Gain I/D N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100.00)s

N 0 Y

S Statism Gain I/D N 0 to+2000 (0 to 20.00%)

N 0 Y


I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 20000 Y


I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N -20000 Y

ECH © Pulse amplitude value

I/D N -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N 0 Y



abcd

59.4 Use

59.5 SPECIFICATIONS



PROPINT Output PI only (K-1) D 0 R EPS Epsilon (K-1) D R

INTEG Integral term (K-1) D R INTEG10P6 10p6 part of integral action (K-1) D Memorization but no Redundant Variable

Internal variables : 6 booleans and 12 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables).



PIDS_D().



abcd

Section 60 PM_(I,D) : PULSE MODULATION

PM_I Specification version : 1.0 (07/21/00) PM_D Specification version : 1.0 (07/21/00)


60.2 Function

Inputs : SP : Input plus (analogue input setpoint), ME : Input minus (analogue input measurement), MD : Mode inhibition. Outputs : POR : Plus ORder output MOR : Minus ORder output DF : Epsilon Default EPS : Epsilon (after dead band) output Parameterization : GP : The adjustment of the values for the Proportional terms BP : dead Band for Positive epsilon BM : dead Band for negative epsilon TR : Time period for Ramp. T1 : inhibition Time after sign changed. T2 : offset Time added to order after sign changed. T3 : offset Time added to normal order. TM : Max Time order. SS : epsilon default threshold value. TE : Temporisation for Epsilon default.



abcd

POR =0 ; MOR = 0 EPS(K) = SP(K) –ME(K) IF EPS(K) > BP THEN EPS(K)= EPS(K)-BP ; SignEPS(K) =0 ELSEIF EPS(K) < BM THEN EPS(K)= EPS(K)-BM ; SignEPS(K) =1 ELSE EPS(K)=0 ; SignEPS(K)= SignEPS(K-1) IF (SignEPS(K-1) =! SignEPS(K))

THEN Case = 1 (Sign changed) IF (MD = 1) THEN POR(K) = 0 ; MOR(K) = 0 ; CPT(K)=0 ; CPT_T1(K) =0 ELSE CPT(K)=CPT(K-1)+ CYC IF CPT(K)>= TR THEN CPT(K)=0 IF Case = 2 THEN Case = 0 Case 0 (Normal pulse folow by T3) :

V(K) = GP*EPS(K) IF V (K) < 0 THEN V(K) = -V(K) V1(K) = (V(K)* TR) /100% IF V1(K) + T3 > CPT (K) THEN

IF EPS(K) >0 THEN POR(K)=1 ELSE IF EPS(K) <0 THEN MOR(K)=1

IF CPT(K)> TM THEN POR(K) =0 ; MOR(K) = 0 Case 1 (Waiting inhibition time T1 after Sign changed) :

CPT_T1(K) = CPT_T1(K-1) + CYC IF CPT_T1(K) >T1 THEN CPT_T1 (K)=0 ; Case = 2 ; CPT(K)=0

Case 2 (Pulse folow by T2 after Sign changed) : V(K) = GP*EPS(K) IF V(K) < 0 THEN V(K) = -V(K) V1(K) = (V(K)* TR) /100% IF V1(K) + T2 > CPT(K) THEN

IF EPS(K) >0 THEN POR(K) =1 ELSE IF EPS(K) <0 THEN MOR(K) =1

IF CPT(K)> TM THEN POR(K) =0 ; MOR(K) = 0 IF (TE=0) OR (MD=1)THEN CPTEPS(K) =0 ; DF(K)=0 ELSEIF (|EPS(K)| > SS) THEN

CPTEPS(K) = CPTEPS(K-1) + CYC ; IF (CPTEPS(K) > TE) THEN CPTEPS(K) = TE ; DF(K) = 1

ELSE DF(K)=0 ELSE CPTEPS(K) = 0 ; DF(K)=0


Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Connect

ion

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs SP Input Plus (setpoint) I/D Y -20000 to+20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %)Y - Y



abcd

Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Connect

ion

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

ME Input minus (measurement)

I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

Y - Y

MD Output inhibition (initialization)

BOOL. Y 1 = Inhibition N 0 Y

Outputs POR Plus order output BOOL. N - Y Y 0 MOR Minus order output BOOL. N - Y Y 0 DF Epsilon default BOOL. Y - N Y 0

EPS Epsilon value I/D Y -20000 to+20000 (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

N Y 0

Parameters GP Proportional Gain I/D N 0 to+10000

(0 to 100.00) Y Y

BP Dead band value for EPS >0

I/D N 0 to+10000 (0 to 100,00 %)

N 0 Y

BM Dead band value for EPS <0

I/D N -10000 to 0 (-100,00 % to 0)

N 0 Y

TR Time ramp (0 – 100 %)

I/D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

Y Y

T1 © Inhibition time when EPS(k-1) =! EPS (k)

I/D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

N 0 Y

T2 Minimum pulse duration in case of epsilon sign modification

I/D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

N 0 Y

T3 Minimum pulse duration

I/D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

Y Y

TM Maximum pulse duration

I/D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

N 1000 Y

SS © Threshold Value on epsilon default

I/D N 0 to 20000 (0 to 200,00 %)

N 10000 Y

TE © Time duration before to declare epsilon default

I/D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

N 0 Y

60.4 Use

60.5 SPECIFICATIONS



SignEPS Sign of EPS(k-1) B 0 R CPT CPT (K-1)for Ramp period D 0 R

CPTEPS Temporisation (K-1) for Epsilon fault D 0 R CPTT1 Order inhibition Time (K-1) D 0 R Case Case mémoristion (K-1) I 0 R

Internal variables : 3 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable), 1 integer (amongst which 1 state variable) and 6 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables).



abcd



PM_D().



abcd

Section 61 PREF_D : PREFERRED VALUE SELECTION

PREF_D Specification version : 1.4(01/31/01)

61.1 REPRESENTATION


IV4 = 0 IN4

BK

IV3 = 0 IN3

IV2 = 0IN2

IV1 = 0IN1

DFAND

RE



abcd

61.2 FUNCTION

This function block choices for output [RE], the input [INx] with the highest priority, witch does not have bad data quality status [IVx] .The priority decreases as the number of the input increase ( [IN1] has top priority, [IN2] is next …).

If all input [INx] are defected [IVx]=0 then the backup [BK] value is switched to the output [RE] and the logical signal [DF] becomes true.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 Input value 1 W,I,D,L,R Y - Y - Y - -


N 1 Y - -



N 1 Y - -

INx Input value x W,I,D,L,R N - N 0 Y - -


N 1 Y - -

IN8 Input value 8 W,I,D,L ,R N - N 0 Y - -


N 1 Y - -

BK Backup value W,I,D,L ,R N - Y - Y - -

Outputs

RE Output value W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - -


Parameters - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - -

61.4 USE :


• Scheme : None




abcd

61.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 9 booleans and 1 double.



PREF_D().



abcd

Section 62 PS_SPLIT_RANGE : PARALLEL SERIAL SPLIT RANGE

PS_SPLIT_RANGE Specification version : 1.2 (04/25/01)


62.2 Function

This FB do the repartition of input value according with the output low parameters (this is useful for HP/ MP Steam flow repartition. It can do two different repartition : one on parallel mode and one on serial mode. The SEL input selects the parallel or serial mode. Parameter TEMP defines temporisation for progressive switch between modes. This parameter is taken in account only if either mode is reached. Parameters P0, P100 define the input range corresponding to 0-100% output range in parallel mode. Parameters S0, S100 define the input range corresponding to 0-100% output range in serial mode. P and S output are parallel / serial mode indicators. Both are reset when mode is switching. Inputs:

IN : input SEL : Parallel serial Selection : 1 for Parallel; 0 for serial

Parameterization : P0,: parallel mode starting range. P100: parallel mode ending range, S0,: serial mode starting range. S100: serial mode ending range, TEMP : parallel / serial commutation timing.

Outputs: RE : output P: Parallel Indicator S: Serial Indicator ENO: Error Output (Disorder or out of range parameters or input ).



abcd

Double long Min , Max IF (INIT ) THEN CPT=0 ; P=0 ; S= 1 ; RE=0 IF ((S0=S100)OR(P0=P100) THEN ENO=1 ELSE IF (ENO=0) THEN IF ( SEL =0) IF ((CPT> CYC ) AND (TEMP>0)) THEN CPT= CPT –CYC Min =(S0 *(TEMP – CPT) + P0 * CPT)/TEMP Max =(S100 *(TEMP – CPT) + P100 * CPT)/TEMP P=0 ; S=0 ELSE P=0 ; S=1 Min =S0 Max =S100 ENDIF ELSE IF ((CPT< (TEMP-CYC)) AND (TEMP>0)) THEN CPT= CPT+CYC Min =(S0 *(TEMP – CPT) + P0 * CPT)/TEMP Max =(S100 *(TEMP – CPT) + P100 * CPT)/TEMP P=0 ; S=0 ELSE P=1 ; S=0 Min =P0 Max =P100 ENDIF ENDIF IF ( IN <= (3*MIN-2*MAX) ) RE = LOWER; //LOWER LIMIT REACHED ENO = 1; ELSE IF ( IN >=(2*MAX-MIN)) RE = UPPER; ////UPPER LIMIT REACHED ENO = 1; ELSE IF ( MIN != MAX ) RE= ((IN -MIN) *10000) /(MAX-MIN); ELSE ENO = 1; ENDIF ENDIF ENDIF



abcd




n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

Inputs IN Input function D Y -32000 to+32000

(-320,00 to 320,00 %) Y Y

SEL Parallel serial Selection : 1 for Parallel; 0 for serial

BOOL. Y 1 for Parallel; 0 for serial N 0 Y

Outputs RE output function D Y -20000 to+ 20000

(-200,00 to 200,00 %) Y Y 0

P Parallel Indicator BOOL Y 1 for Parallel; 0 for serial N Y 0 S Serial Indicator BOOL Y 1 for serial; 0 for Parallel N Y 1 ENO Error Output (Disorder or out

of range parameters or input).

BOOL Y 1 if Error N Y 0

Parame ters

P0 parallel mode starting range D Y -32000 to+32000 (-320,00 to 320,00 %)

N 0 Y

P100 parallel mode ending range D Y -32000 to+32000 (-320,00 to 320,00 %)

N 10000

Y

S0 Serial mode starting range D Y -32000 to+32000 (-320,00 to 320,00 %)

N 0 Y

S100 Serial mode ending range D Y -32000 to+32000 (-320,00 to 320,00 %)

N 10000

Y

TEMP parallel / serial commutation timing.

D Y 0 to+3600 (0 to 3600 s)

N 1000 Y

62.4 SPECIFICATIONS



CPT Internal count for switching mode) I - Redundant Variable

WI Used for a better accuracy of commutaion timing D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

VTEMP Internal parallel / serial commutation timing D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable



abcd


62.4.3 Default array


PS_SPLIT_RANGE().



abcd

Section 63 PT _(D, DR, R) : FIRST ORDER TIME DELAY

PT_D, PT_DR, PT_R Specification version : 1.7 (10/06/05)

63.1 REPRESENTATION



abcd

Example with GN = 1 and Tf = T.

63.2 FUNCTION

This function block has the Laplace Transfer Function as follows :

• INITIALISATION : The init value of the output is [IV], like the state variable.

• NORMAL OPERATION : The block output is positioned in accordance with the normal operation of the Laplace Transfer Function. The filtering time constant Tf is an optional parameter in 10ms. If no value is specified, it is assumed to be 3 * T sampling.

F(s) = GN1 + Tf * s

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

100

Tn

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

100

Tn

IN

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

100

Tn

RE HI LO

TV

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

1

Tn

TC

Modification of HI

Modification of LO



abcd

If the tracking command TC is set to 1 then the output RE equal to the tracking value TV without delay, and its kept inside the limit value (HI and LO).

The output RE is limited by the high limit HI and LO limits like LO ≤ RE ≤ HI. In case of one of these limits is reached, its internal state is kept aligned with this limit, RE equal HI or LO and the corresponding output ( HL or LL ) is set to 1.

If the High limit value HI is inferior to low limit value LO then the output RE equal to HI and high limit active HL and low limit active LL are set at 1.

It’s possible to modify the specific limit [HI] [LO] during operation, in this case the output is kept between these new limits.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN Input value Double for PT_D-DR,real for PT_R.

Y - Y - Y - -

TV Tracking value Double for PT_D-DR,real for PT_R.

Y - N LO Y - -

TC Tracking command B Y - N 0 Y - -

Outputs

RE Output value Double for PT_D-DR,real for PT_R.

N - Y - Y - IV

HL High limit active B Y - N - Y - 0

LL Low limit active B Y - N - Y - 0

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

HI High limit value Double for PT_D-DR,real for PT_R.

Y - N +∞ Y - -

LO Low limit value Double for PT_D-DR,real for PT_R.

Y - N -∞ Y - -

IV Init value Double for PT_D-DR,real for PT_R.

N - Y Y - -



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

GN Gain value Double for PT_D-DR,real for PT_R.

N (a) N 100 Y - -

TF Filtering time Double for PT_D-DR,real for PT_R.

N ] 0 ; +∞ ] in time base = 10 ms 100 = 1 s

] 0 ; +20s ] only for PT_D block

N 3 x Ts Y ≥ 3 x Ts -

GAINDPT W N [0,1,2] N 0 Y

(a) The Gain value is defined as following : Type D,W,I,L then 100 = Gain of 1. Type R then 100 = Gain of 100. Regarding the limitation of TF (20 s), in use of PT_D, the following schema with IT_D can be used instead (for the “First Order” function only) :



abcd

63.4 USE :

The PT_D block has been modified to improve its precision in bode plots. If the needs are the same than RX3i AVR targets, with a good frequency response between 10

mHz and 10 Hz, it is necessary to use PT_DR block, with has the same response than PT_R block : the CPU time to execute the PT_DR block is 15 µs on RX3i target, regarding 11 µs for the PT_D block on the same target.

• Parameters to initialize :

Tf to 3 Tsampling if Tf doesn’t exist.

• Scheme : None


63.5 SPECIFICATION


The output of Z-1 block is a state variable.



abcd

Internal variables : 3 booleans and 7 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables) for PT_D ; : 3 booleans and 11 reals (amongst which 3 state variables) for PT_DR ;

: 3 booleans and 7 reals (amongst which 3 state variables) for PT_R ;



PT_D() for PT_D, PT_R() for PT_DR and PT_R.



abcd

Section 64 PT2_D : SECOND ORDER TRANSFERT FUNCTION

PT2_D : specification version 1.1 (05/29/01)

64.1 REPRESENTATION

64.2 FUNCTION

This function block has the Laplace Transfer Function as follows :

• INITIALISATION : The init value of the output is [IV], like the state variable.

• NORMAL OPERATION : The block output is positioned in accordance with the normal operation of the Laplace Transfer Function.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN Input I,D Y 0-5000 Y Y - -

Outputs

RE Output I,D N - Y Y - IV

Parameters - - - - - - - -

WSP7 2nd order cut-off pulsation

I,D N 0-1000 (a) N 0 Y - -

GSP7 2nd order gain I,D N 0-1000 (b) N 0 Y - -

KSP7 2nd order HF gain I,D N 0-1000 (b) N 0 Y - -

PSP7 2nd order damping factor

I,D N 0-1000 (c) N 0 Y - -

IV Initial value I,D N - N 0 Y - -

F(s) = WSP7² + GSP7 * WSP7 * s + KSP7 * s²

WSP7² + 2 * PSP7 * WSP7 * s + s²



abcd

(a) The Gain value is 10 : the usefull range is 0-100, with a required precision of 0.1 (B) THE GAIN VALUE IS 100 : THE USEFULL RANGE IS 0-10, WITH A REQUIRED

PRECISION OF 0.01 (c) The Gain value is 1000 : the usefull range is 0-1, with a required precision of 0.001

CONFIGURATION

None

64.4 USE


• Scheme : Not applicable


64.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 3 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables).



PT2_D().



abcd

Section 65 R_L_FAULT : READ_LAST_FAULT

R_L_FAULT Specification version : 1.1 (05/30/01)


65.2 Function

This FB is based on C “plcc_read_last_fault” interface. This FB will return the last fault table entry of the table specified by the IO Boolean input The function returns a 0 if the table is empty, and return a 1 if a fault(s) is present. The NET boolean output represents this indication. If NET output is reset, output table is reset to. In the Output table the long/short indicator defines the quantity of fault data present in the fault entry. In the PLC Fault table, a long/short value of 00 represents 8 bytes of fault extra data present in the fault entry, and 01 represent 24 bytes of fault extra data. In the I/O fault table, 02 represents 5 bytes of fault specific data, and 03 represents 21 bytes. The first 2 words of the exchange table are reserved for driver internal use. Inputs:

SEL : Table Selection : 1 for I/O Fault table ; 0 for PLC Fault table VAL : VALidate function request input

Outputs: TABLE: Service request dialogue output TABLE NET: Not Empty Table.




n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

Inputs SEL I/O Fault table or PLC Fault

table Selection BOOL Y 0 PLC fault table; 1 I/O fault

table N 1 Y

VAL Demand VALidate input BOOL. Y 1=Valid demand N 1 Y Outputs NET Not Empty Table indicator. BOOL. Y 1=Default exchange N Y TABLE Modbus output table (22

elements) TW N See description below Y Y



abcd



n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

Parame ters



abcd

65.4 SPECIFICATIONS


Output table TABLE[22] Description : For PLC Fault table: For I/O Fault table: Word state (0 for PLC fault) Word state (1 for I/O fault) Byte long_short Byte long_short Byte reserved[3] Byte reference_adress[3] Word PLC_fault_adress[2] Word IO_fault_adress[3] Word fault_group Word fault_group Word error_code Byte fault_category Word fault specific datat[12] Byte fault_type Word time stamp[3] Byte fault_description Byte fault specific datat[21] Word time stamp[3] For more information about the last fault table description, see the API Alspa C80-35 reference manual ALS 52102 c-en. Internal variables : 3 booleans.


65.4.3 Default array


R_L_FAULT().



abcd

Section 66 RED_MOVE_B : REDUNDANT MOVE FOR BOOLEAN, INTEGER AND REAL

RED_MOVE_B, RED_MOVE_I and RED_MOVE_R Specification version : 1.0 (09/27/07)


66.2 Function

Inputs : Boolean for RED_MOVE_B : IN variable. Integer for RED_MOVE_I : IN variable. Real for RED_MOVE_R : IN variable.

Outputs :

Boolean for RED_MOVE_B : RE variable. Integer for RED_MOVE_I : RE variable. Real for RED_MOVE_R : RE variable.

Memorise the input IN in the output RE on each changing value of the input IN.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs BOOLEAN INTEGER

REAL

IN Variable R I

N 0 or 1 -32768 to 32767

+-3.4 E+/- 38

Y - Y

Outputs BOOLEAN INTEGER

REAL

RE variable R I

N 0 or 1 -32768 to 32767

+-3.4 E+/- 38

Y - Y

66.4 Use

For HMI Setpoints and Modbus Variables on head of cellule.



abcd

66.5 SPECIFICATIONS



Internal variables : 2 booleans for RED_MOVE_B ;

2 integers for RED_MOVE_I ; 2 reals for RED_MOVE_R ;

State variables : 1 boolean for RED_MOVE_B ;

1 integer or RED_MOVE_I ; 1 real for RED_MOVE_R ;


LEA.


None.



abcd

Section 67 RTU_CONF : RTU CONF


67.1 REPRESENTATION

67.2 FUNCTION

This block is used to change the RTU (Modbus) address and optionally the configuration of the port1 or the port 2 of the CPU310 on rack 0, slot 1 with the good firmware .

When the IN input is set to 1 (raising edge), the block changes the RTU slave address and optionally the configuration on the card RACK=0 and SLO=0, on the port specified by the CHA parameter (CHA=1 (port1) or CHA=2 (port2). The new RTU slave address is fixed by the parameter SID.

The parameters are optional when not present the default values are set. When present it is recommended to put constants.

The “change RTU_ID” communication request is not taking into account during 2 seconds after the first cycle.

If the change is not successful, after a delay, the DF fault signal is set to 1



abcd



Range Mand. Connec

tion

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

VAL Validation input on raising edge

B Y - Y Y -

Outputs

DF Fault B Y - N Y - 0

Parameters - - - - - - - -

CHA Channel I N 1-2 Y Y -

SID Slave ID I N 1-255 Y Y -

DR Data Rate I N 0=300, 1=600, 2=1200, 3=2400, 4=4800, 5=9600, 6=19200, 7=38400, 8=57600, 9=115200

N 6 Y -

PAR Parity I N 0=None, 1=Odd, 2=Even

N 1 Y -

FC Flow Control I N 0=Hard 1=None

N 1 Y

DP Duplex Mode I N 0=2-wire 1=4-wire 2=point to point

N 1 Y -

67.4 Use

67.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) INP IN at the previous cycle B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

COUNT Count for delay at init B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable



abcd

Internal variables : 3 booleans and 32 integers.



RTU_CONF().



abcd

Section 68 SAL_D : SPEED ACCELERATION LIMITOR





abcd

68.2 Function



abcd

Sp eed measu re g reater th an SP T2

A ccelerat io n s p eed g reater th an A CCT

AND AND

E1 /MINSPT

K = 0 (1 , 2 , 4 , 6)

E 6 /M SAL

INIT = 0

E9 /SALM D

E5 /ACCT

E4 /SPT2

E3 /SPT1

E2 /MEAS

S01 /SP ACC

E78 /SALMA

Acc elerat ion s peed greater than AC C T

ACCELERATION CALCUL

Fo r T s 0 1 00 %

1 00 0

LIM

ORR AND

AND

NOT

NOT DELAY

DELAY

ORR

AND

AND

ORR

DEL AY

DELAY

ORR

AND

0 CON

1 50 CON

E10 /SALM SD

E11 /OVSPT

RE L

0

T H

h=0%

TH

h=0%

t =112 % h =0 %

S0 3 /SAL _ON

S0 2 /CLGRSAL

0 REL

%

Sp eed meas u re g reater th an SP T1

Sp eed meas u re g reater th an

1 1 2 %

NOT

Sp eed measu re g reater th an 1 12 %

Sp eed m easure great er t han SPT1

TH

h=0%

Sp eed meas u re g reater th an SP T2

h=0%

TH

E14 /ST



abcd



abcd


Name/Display Name

Description Type Neg Range Mandatory

Connection

Default Value

Mandatory Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

E2/MEAS Speed Measure

D N 0 to 2147483647 (0 to

21474836,47 %)

Y Y

E11/OVSPT Overspeed Test

B N 1= test in progress

N 0 Y

Outputs

S01/SPACC Speed Acceleration

D N -2147483648 to +2147483647

(-21474836,48 to +21474836,47%)

N Y 0 for 3s

S02/CLGRSAL Closing reference SAL

D N 0 to 15000 (0 to 150,00%)

Y Y 0 for 3s

S03/SAL_ON SAL On B N 1= SAL actif N Y 0 for 3s

Parameters

E1/MINSPT Min. Speed Measure Threashold

W N 0 to 65535 (0 to 655,35%)

N 9000 Y

E3/SPT1 First Speed Threashold

W N 0 to 65535 (0 to 655,35%)

N 10700 Y

E4/SPT2 Second Speed Threashold

W N 0 to 65535 (0 to 655,35%)

N 10125 Y

E5/ACCT Acceleration speed Threashold

W N 0 to 65535 (0 to 655,35%)

N 5000 Y

E6/MSAL SAL Setting in memory Order

B N 1= order on N 1 Y

E78/SALMA SAL setting in memory Authorization

B N 1= authorization N 1 Y

E9/SALMD SAL Setting in memory Delay

W N 0 to 65535 (0 to 655,35 s)

N 10 Y

E10/SALMSD SAL Setting in memory Stop Delay

W N 0 to 65535 (0 to 655,35 s)

N 50 Y

E14/ST Specific Time W N 0 to 65535 (0 to 655,35 s)

Y Y



abcd

68.4 Use


• Scheme : Not applicable


68.5 SPECIFICATIONS


Internal variables : 4 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable), 1 word (amongst which 1 state variable) and 5 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables).



SAL_D().



abcd

Section 69 SC1STI171_DR : SCAN STI171 MODULE FOR SINGLE SHAFT

SC1STI171_DR Specification version : 1.0 (06/28/05) See the SME_D, SME1_D, SME1_DR Specification version : M (02/28/06) for the dividing factor strategy (SDIV, DEFDIV with TDIV, TDIVHY).


69.2 Function

This function is used for the single shaft turbine speed measurement, with the STI171 module. Inputs : TS Turbine Set ACQ Acquit for Alarm Memorisation MS1 : Most Significant Word channel 1 LS1 : Least Significant Word channel 1 MS2 : Most Significant Word channel 2



abcd

LS2 : Least Significant Word channel 2 Outputs : RE : Speed Output (%) SP : Speed Output (RPM)

SDF : STI module Default ENO : result validity indicator DIS : Discordance between Channel

RE1 : Speed Output channel 1 NV1 : New Value on channel 1 OV1 : Overflow channel 1 WB1 : Wire Break detection channel 1 LSHT1: Low Speed High Threshold channel 1 NSS1: No Speed Signal channel 1 RE2 : Speed Output channel 2 NV2 : New Value on channel 2 OV2 : Overflow channel 2 WB2 : Wire Break detection channel 2 LSHT2: Low Speed High Threshold channel 2 NSS2: No Speed Signal channel 2 SDIV: DIV Dividing Factor request DEFDIV: Dividing Factor Alarm Parameterization : NF Nominal Frequency NS Nominal Speed LSTV Low Speed Threshold Value STH Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection SDD Sensor Discordance Detection level DIV1 Division value 1 DIV2 Division value 2 TDIV Speed for dividing factor change TDIVHY Speed hysteresis for dividing factor change Int Prediv Long ValBrut1, ValBrut2, Factor, LimCpt IF ACQ OR !TS THEN NSS1(K-1) = 0 ; NSS2(K-1) = 0 NV1 = LS1 & 0x0008 (New Value on channel 1) OV1 = LS1 & 0x0004 (Overflow channel 1) WB1 = !(LS1 & 0x0002 ) (Wire Break detection channel 1) NV2 = LS2 & 0x0008 (New Value on channel 2) OV2 = LS2 & 0x0004 (Overflow channel 2) WB2 = !(LS2 & 0x0002) (Wire Break detection channel 2)



abcd

Prediv = (LS2 & 0x0001) + ((LS1 & 0x0001)*2) (Predivision and fault information) ValBrut1 = (long (MS1) * 4096) + (LS1/16) IF (OV1) THEN ValBrut1= ValBrut1 + 0x10000000 ValBrut2 = (long (MS2) * 4096) + (LS2/16) IF (OV2) THEN ValBrut2= ValBrut2 + 0x10000000 IF CPT1(K) < (2^31) - CYC THEN CPT1(K) = CPT1(K-1) + CYC IF CPT2(K) < (2^31) - CYC THEN CPT2(K) = CPT2(K-1) + CYC ENO = 0 Init Output valid CASE PREDIV=0 SDF = 1 STI module Default ENO = 1 Output no valid RE1 = 120% Speed Output channel 1 RE2 = 120% Speed Output channel 2 LSHT1 = 0 Low Speed High Threshold channel 1 LSHT2 = 0 Low Speed High Threshold channel 2 CASE PREDIV=3 Predivision factor = 1 Factor=1 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*1000)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*1000)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS)/ NF)*1000)/ LSTV )

CASE PREDIV=1 Predivision factor = 16 or 100 IF TYP==0 Factor=16 ELSE (TYP==1) Factor=100 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS) / NF)* Factor *1000)/ LSTV ) CASE PREDIV=2 Predivision factor = 24 Factor=24 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*2400)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*2400)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS) / NF)* 24000)/ LSTV ) IF (NV1) THEN IF CPT1(K) < LimCpt THEN LSHT1(K)=1 ELSE LSHT1(K)=0

CPT1=0 ELSE IF CPT1(K) > LimCpt THEN LSHT1(K)=0 IF (NV2) THEN IF CPT2(K) < LimCpt THEN LSHT2(K)=1 ELSE LSHT2(K)=0



abcd

CPT2=0 ELSE IF CPT2(K) > LimCpt

THEN LSHT2(K)=0 IF ((WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND (WB2 OR NSS2(K-1))) THEN RE(K)= 120% ; ENO = 1 (Output no valid) ELSE IF ((WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND !(WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)) AND !OV2) THEN RE(K)= RE2 ELSE IF (! (WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND (WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)) AND !OV1) THEN RE(K)= RE1 ELSE IF !(OV1 AND OV2) THEN RE(K)= MAX(RE1,RE2) ELSE RE(K)= 0% ; ENO = 1 (Overflow; Output no valid) SP = (RE(K) * NS )/ 100% IF |RE1- RE2|>SDD THEN DIS = 1 ELSE DIS = 0 IF (RE>= STH) AND TS THEN LimCpt=CYC + 2*Factor *(10000*10000)/(RE*NF) IF (CPT1(K)>LimCpt) NSS1(K) =1 IF (CPT2(K)>LimCpt) NSS2(K) =1 IF NF < 100 ENO = 1 Output no valid RE1 = 120% Speed Output channel 1 RE2 = 120% Speed Output channel 2 True table for validity result: SDF WB1 OR NSS1(K-1) OV1 WB2 OR NSS2(K-1) OV2 ENO RE

1 X X X X 1 120 % 0 X 0 0 0 MAX(RE1,RE2)1 X 0 0 0 RE2 1 X 1 X 1 120 % 0 0 0 X 0 MAX(RE1,RE2)0 0 1 X 0 RE1 0 1 0 1 1 0 % 1 X 0 1 1 0 %

0

0 1 1 X 1 0 %



g Range Mand.

Connection

Def. value Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs TS Turbine Set BOOL. N Turbine Set = 1 N 0 Y



abcd


Range Mand. Connecti

on

Def. value Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

ACQ Acquit for Alarm Memorisation

BOOL. N Acquit =1 N 0 Y

MS1 Most Significant Word channel 1

W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y

LS1 Least Significant Word channel 1

W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y

Outputs RE Speed in % I/D. Y 0 to 30000

(0 to 300,00 %) N Y 0

SP Speed in RPM I/D. Y 0 to+30000 RPM N Y 0 DIS discordance BOOL. Y - N Y 0 SDF STI module Default BOOL. Y - N Y 0 ENO Result Indicator BOOL. Y 1 => RE = 120 % N - Y 0 RE1 Speed Output channel 1 I/D N 0 to 30000

(0 to 300,00 %) N Y 0

NV1 New Value on channel 1 BOOL. N - N Y 0 OV1 Overflow channel 1 BOOL. Y - N Y 0 WB1 Wire Break detection

channel 1 BOOL. Y - N Y 0

LSHT1 Low Speed High Threshold channel 1

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

NSS1 No Speed Signal channel 1 BOOL. Y - N Y 0 RE2 Speed Output channel 2 I/D N 0 to 30000

(0 to 300,00 %) N Y 0




BOOL. Y - N Y 0

NSS2 No Speed Signal channel 2 BOOL. Y - N Y 0 SDIV DIV dividing factor request BOOL N DIV1 Request=1 N - Y

DEFDIV Dividing factor Alarm W N 0=OK, 1= Card STI fault, 9=TDIVx factors faults

N - Y

Parameters NF © Nominal Frequency (Hz) D N 100 to+600 000

(10 to 60 000Hz) Y Y

NS © Nominal Speed (rpm) I/D N 0 to+20000 Y Y LSTV Low Speed Threshold Value

(rph/100) I/D N 0 to 10000

(0 to 100.00rph) N 0 Y

STH Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection

I/D N 0 to 1000 (0 to 10.00%)

N 0 Y

SDD Sensor Discordance Detection level

I/D N 0 to 5000 (0 to 50.00%)

N 0 Y

DIV1 Division value 1 W N 3 N 3 Y DIV2 Division value 2 W N 100 N 100 Y TDIV Speed for dividing factor

change W N 0 to 10000

(0 to 10000 rpm) N 9999 Y

TDIVHY Speed hysteresis for dividing factor change

W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 10000 rpm)

N 0 Y



abcd

69.4 Use

69.5 SPECIFICATIONS



RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

CPT1 Timer (K-1) for LSHT1 detection D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable CPT2 Timer (K-1) for LSHT2 detection D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

LSHT1 Low Speed High Threshold channel 1(K-1) B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable LSHT2 Low Speed High Threshold channel 2(K-1) B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable NSS1 No Speed Signal Channel 1 (K-1) B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable NSS2 No Speed Signal Channel 2 (K-1) B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

Internal variables : 14 booleans, 3 words and 8 doubles.



SC1STI171_DR().



abcd

Section 70 SCABM _D : UMT CARD INPUTS SCANNING

SCABM_D : specification version 1.2 (04/10/01)

70.1 REPRESENTATION

70.2 FUNCTION

• INITIALISATION : .




abcd

This block scans the 4 registers (64 bits) of the UMT card, in order to demultiplex the informations of this I/O card. The UMT card sends two messages of 64 bits (4 words of 16 bits). The 63th bit is used to differenciate the two messages (63th bit = 0 for the first message, 63th bit = 1 for the second one).

If the 63th bit is false :

15 11 Word 4 0 15 Word 3 0 15 Word 2 0 15 Word 1 0

0 N U12, U23, U31, I1, I2, I3 UST IST FR

The output [FR] is equal to the input [IN1]. The output [IST] is equal to the input [IN2]. The output [UST] is equal to the input [IN3].

The value stored in the bits 12 to 14 (max = 7) is used to demultiplex the values stored in the bits 0 to 11 :

Value of bit 12-14 : 0 Value demultiplexed : US12 1 US23 2 US31 3 IS1 4 IS2 5 IS3 6 not used 7 not used

Endif

If the 63th bit is true :

15 Word 4 0 15 Word 3 0 15 Word 2 0 15 Word 1 0

1 Logical datas S QE S PE S PSS

The output [PSS] is equal to the input [IN1]. The output [PE] is equal to the input [IN2]. The output [QE] is equal to the input [IN3]. The output [LAG_ON] is equal to the 48th bit (sign of [IN3]). The output [EL010] is equal to the 48th bit (1st bit of [IN4]). The output [EL020] is equal to the 49th bit (2nd bit of [IN4]). The output [EL030] is equal to the 50th bit (3rd bit of [IN4]). The output [EL040] is equal to the 51th bit (4th bit of [IN4]). The output [ALR1] is equal to the 52th bit (5th bit of [IN4]). The output [ALR2] is equal to the 53th bit (6th bit of [IN4]). The output [PPSS] is equal to the 54th bit (7th bit of [IN4]). The output [MTPS] is equal to the 55th bit (8th bit of [IN4]). The output [DFUS] is equal to the 56th bit (9th bit of [IN4]). The output [DFIS] is equal to the 57th bit (10th bit of [IN4]).

Endif



abcd

When the first message treatment is executed, the block sends a DOIO instruction to the UMT card to acquire the other message. Then, the precedent treatment is executed again.

Because of the non-synchronisation between the UMT card and the main application, the first message read can either be the message 1 (63th bit = 0) or the message 2 (63th bit = 1).

The block will check that the two messages are read at each execution : if one of the two messages is not sent by the UMT card, the output [ENO] is set to one.



abcd

ARGUMENTS CHARACTERISTICS Name Description Type Neg Range Mand.

ConnectionDef.

value Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 Input 1 I N - Y Y - -




Outputs

FR Frequency D N - Y Y - -

IST Stator current D N - Y Y - -

UST Stator voltage D N - Y Y - -

IS1 Stator current phase U

D N - N Y - -

IS2 Stator current phase V

D N - N Y - -

IS3 Stator current phase W

D N - N Y - -

US12 Stator voltage phase U-V

D N - N Y - -

US23 Stator voltage phase V-W

D N - N Y - -

US31 Stator voltage phase W-U

D N - N Y - -

PSS PSS set-point D N - Y Y - -

PE Active power D N - Y Y - -

QE Reactive power D N - Y Y - -

LAG_ON Reactive power < 0 B N - Y Y - -

EL010 Logical input 1 B Y - N Y - -




ALR1 Level 1 alarm B Y - N Y - -

ALR2 Level 2 alarm B Y - N Y - -

PPSS PSS presence B Y - N Y - -

MTPS PSS in mode test B Y - N Y - -

DFUS US phases fault B Y - Y Y - -

DFIS IS phases fault B Y - Y Y - -

ENO Error B Y - N Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - -

ST Start address (%AI) for UMT card DOIO

W Y - Y 1 Y - -



abcd

70.3 CONFIGURATION

None

70.4 USE

• Parameters to initialize : not applicable



abcd

• Scheme :

FIP INPUTS

PHYSICAL INPUTS

TREATMENTS PHYSICAL OUTPUTS

timer PHYSICAL INPUTS

TREATMENTS PHYSICAL OUTPUTS

FIP OUTPUTS

10ms

20ms

U M T

A L G 2 2 2

A L G 3 9 1

A L G 3 9 2

M D L 6 5 5

M D L 6 5 5

MDL753

CALL AP_MAIN

For n = 1 to 2 If bit 63 (16th bit of [IN4]) = 0 then

[FR] = [IN1] [IST] = [IN2] [UST] = [IN3] Select case of value bit 12-13-14 [IN4]

case 0 : [US12] = value bit 0 to 11 [IN4]case 1 : [US23] = value bit 0 to 11 [IN4]case 2 : [US31] = value bit 0 to 11 [IN4]case 3 : [IS1] = value bit 0 to 11 [IN4]case 4 : [IS2] = value bit 0 to 11 [IN4]case 5 : [IS3] = value bit 0 to 11 [IN4]case else

end case Var1 = 1

else [PSS] = [IN1] [PE] = [IN2] [QE] = [IN3] [LAG_ON] = 16th bit of [IN3] [EL010] = 1st bit of [IN4] [EL020] = 2nd bit of [IN4] [EL030] = 3rd bit of [IN4] [EL040] = 4th bit of [IN4] [ALR1] = 5th bit of [IN4] [ALR2] = 6th bit of [IN4] [PPSS] = 7th bit of [IN4] [MTPS] = 8th bit of [IN4] [DFUS] = 9th bit of [IN4] [DFIS] = 10th bit of [IN4] Var2 = 1

Endif If n = 1 then DOIO [ST] [END] Next n If Var1 = 0 or Var2 = 0 then [ENO] = 1



abcd


70.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 9 booleans, 1 word and 18 doubles.



SCABM_D().



abcd

Section 71 SCI8k_(I,D) : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE INPUT

SCI8k_D Specification version : 1.9 (11/07/03)


71.2 Function

This block realises a linear scaling. The parameters OFF and GN define the value of the result RE for respectively IN=0 and IN=32000. The binary output DF switches from 0 to1:

- if TY=0 (wire break supervision is active) AND IN is below 5920 points (3.7mA)*

or -if OFF=GN or -if DI=1 *The binary output DF switches back to 0:

- if IN goes above 6080 points (3.8mA).(Hysteresis is 0.1mA).



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN input INT N 0 to+32000

Pts CAD Y Y

DI Input disable BOOL Y 1 = disable N 0 Y Outputs

RE Output I/D Y -32768 to+32767 –327.68% to 327.67%

Y Y 0

DF Output Default BOOL Y 1 = invalid N Y 0 Parameters

I 0 to+32000 Pts CAD OFF OFFSET = value for 0 % D

N -320000 to+320000

Pts CAD

Y Y

GN I N 0 to+32000 Pts CAD Y Y



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

GAIN = value for 100 %

D -320000 to+320000 Pts CAD

TY Type 4-20mA/ 0-10V BOOL N 0 (4-20 mA)or (2-10V)-1(0-20 mA)or (0-10V)

N 0 Y

71.4 Use

71.5 SPECIFICATIONS



TH_REP Previous threshold result BOOL Memorised but

no redund Internal variables : 3 booleans and 1 double.


IF INIT THEN DF=0 ; RE = 0

ELSE IF ((IN>6080) OR ((IN>5920) AND(TH_REP=1))) TH_RE=1 ELSE TH_RE=0

IF (((TY ==0 ) AND (THRE=0 )) OR (GN == OFF) OR (DI == 1 ) ) THEN RE = 0 DF = 1 (input invalid)

ELSE IF (IN > 32384 (20,24mA)) THEN

IN = 32384 DF = 1 (input invalid)

ENDIF RE = ((IN-OFF)*10000) /( GN – OFF) IF RE >32767 THEN RE = 32767 and DF = 1 IF RE <-32767 THEN RE = -32767 and DF = 1

ENDIF



abcd

TH_REP=TH_RE ENDIF


SCI8K_D().



abcd

Section 72 SCIWG_D : SCALING FOR DISTRIBUTED ANALOG INPUT OF WAGO

SCIWG_D Specification version : 1.0 (10/11/05)


72.2 Function



or -if OFF=GN or -if DI=1 *The binary output DF switches back to 0:

- if IN goes above 6080 points (3.8mA).(Hysteresis is 0.1mA).



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN input INT N 0 to+32767

Pts CAD Y Y


RE Output D Y -32768 to+32767 –327.68% to 327.67%

Y Y 0

DF Output Default BOOL Y 1 = invalid N Y 0 Parameters

OFF OFFSET = value for 0 %

D N 0 to+32767 Pts CAD Y Y



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

GN GAIN = value for 100 %

D N 0 to+32767 Pts CAD Y Y

TY Type 4-20mA/ 0-10V BOOL N 0 (4-20 mA)or (2-10V)-1(0-20 mA)or (0-10V)

N 0 Y

72.4 Use

72.5 SPECIFICATIONS



TH_REP Previous threshold result BOOL Memorised but

no redund Internal variables : 3 booleans and 1 double.



ELSE IF ((IN>6080) OR ((IN>5920) AND(TH_REP=1))) TH_RE=1 ELSE TH_RE=0

IF (((TY ==0 ) AND (THRE=0 )) OR (GN == OFF) OR (DI == 1 ) ) THEN RE = 0 DF = 1 (input invalid)

ELSE IF (IN > 32767) THEN

IN = 32767 DF = 1 (input invalid)

ENDIF RE = ((IN-OFF)*10000) /( GN – OFF) IF RE >32767 THEN RE = 32767 and DF = 1 IF RE <-32768 THEN RE = -32768 and DF = 1

ENDIF



abcd

TH_REP=TH_RE ENDIF


SCIWG_D().



abcd

Section 73 SCIX2X_D : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE INPUT

SCIX20_D Specification version: 1.0 (08/12/05)


73.2 Function



or - if OFF=GN or - if DI=1 *The binary output DF switches back to 0:

- if IN goes above 6226 CAD pts (3.8mA).(Hysteresis is 0.1mA (164 CAD pts).



g Range Mand.

Connection

Def. valu

e

Mand.

Data

Advised parameter

s value

First scan value

Inputs IN Input D N 0 to 32767 CAD Pts Y Y DI Input disable B Y 1 = disable N 0 Y

Outputs RE Output D Y -32768 to +32767

-327.68% to 327.68% Y Y 0

DF Output Default B Y 1 = invalid N Y 0



abcd



Def. valu

e

Mand.

Data

Advised parameter

s value

First scan value

Parameters

OFF OFFSET = Value for 0 % D N -32767 to 32767 CAD Pts

Y Y

GN GAIN = value for 100 % D N -32767 to 32767 CAD Pts

Y Y

TY Type 4-20mA B N 0 (4-20mA) or (2-10V) 1 (0-20mA) or (0-10V)

N 0 Y

73.4 Use

73.5 SPECIFICATIONS



RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

TH_REP Previous threshold result BOOL Memorised but not redound

Internal variables : 3 booleans and 1 double


if ( INIT ) THEN RE=0; DF=0; else if((IN>6226) || ((IN>6062) && TH_REP)) THEN TH_RE=1; else TH_RE=0; if ( (!TYP AND (TH_RE==0)) OR (DI==1) OR (GN == OFF) THEN RE = 0; DF = 1; else if ( IN > 33160) THEN // If Input > 20.4 mA IN = 33160; DF = 1; ENDIF RE=((IN-OFF)*10000)/(GN-OFF); if ( RE > 32767 ) RE = 32767;



abcd

DF = 1; if ( RE < -32768 )

RE = -32768; DF = 1; ENDIF ENDIF TH_REP=TH_RE; ENDIF


SCIX20_D()



abcd

Section 74 SCMPA_(I,D) : SCAN MPA157 MODULE

SCMPA_I Specification version : 1.1 (10/27/00) SCMPA_D Specification version : 1.1 (10/27/00)


74.2 Function

This function is used for the Alternator parameters measurement, with the MPA157 module. Inputs : MS1 : Most Significant Word channel 1 LS1 : Least Significant Word channel 1 MS2 : Most Significant Word channel 2 LS2 : Least Significant Word channel 2 Outputs : URMS : RMS Voltage output (%)

DF1 : RMS Voltage output DeFault Indicator ISC : I Sine phi or I Cosine phi output (%)

DF2 : ISC output DeFault Indicator IST : I STator output (%)

DF3 : IST output DeFault Indicator UGRID : Grid Voltage output (%)



abcd

DF4 : UGRID output DeFault Indicator FREQ : Frequency output (%)

DF5 : FREQ output DeFault Indicator MPAF : MPA Module Fault (24V)

NV : New Value ISS : I Sine Phi Sign ISIN : I Sine Phi or I Cosine Phi Indicator Parameterization : OFF1 OFFSET on Channel 1 (value for 0 %) GN1 GAIN on Channel 1 = value for 100 % OFF2 OFFSET on Channel 2 (value for 0 %) GN2 GAIN on Channel 2 = value for 100 % OFF3 OFFSET on Channel 3(value for 0 %) GN3 GAIN on Channel 3 = value for 100 % OFF4 OFFSET on Channel 4 (value for 0 %) GN4 GAIN on Channel 4 = value for 100 % OFF5 OFFSET on Channel 5 (value for 0 %) GN5 GAIN on Channel 5 = value for 100 % Long ValBrut, NV = MS1 & 0x8000 (New Value) MPAF = ! (MS1 & 0x4000) (MPA Module Fault : 24V) ISIN = MS1 & 0x2000 (I Sine Phi or I Cosine Phi Indicator) ISS = MS1 & 0x1000 (I Sine Phi Sign) ValBrut = (MS1 & 0x0fff) * 8 IF(ValBrut > 32750) THEN DF1=1 URMS = ((ValBrut - OFF1)*10000) /( GN1 – OFF1) ValBrut = ((LS1 & 0xfff0) / 2) & 0x7fff IF(ValBrut > 32750) THEN DF2=1 ISC = ((ValBrut – OFF2)*10000) /( GN2 – OFF2) ValBrut = (LS1 & 0x000f) * 2048 + (MS2 & 0xff00) / 32 IF(ValBrut > 32750) THEN DF3=1 IST = ((ValBrut – OFF3)*10000) /( GN3 – OFF3) ValBrut = (MS2 & 0x00ff) * 128 + (LS2 & 0xf000) / 512 IF(ValBrut > 32750) THEN DF4=1 UGRID = ((ValBrut – OFF4)*10000) /( GN4 – OFF4) ValBrut = (LS2 & 0x0fff) * 8 IF(ValBrut > 32750) THEN DF5=1 FREQ = ((ValBrut – OFF5)*10000) /( GN5 – OFF5)



g Range Mand.

Connection

Def. value

Mand.

Data

Advised parameter

s value

First scan value

Inputs



abcd



Def. value

Mand.

Data

Advised parameter

s value

First scan value

MS1 Most Significant Word channel 1 W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y LS1 Least Significant Word channel 1 W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y MS2 Most Significant Word channel 2 W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y LS2 Least Significant Word channel 2 W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y

Outputs URMS RMS Voltage Output (%)

I/D. Y 0 to 32000

(0 to 320,00 %) N Y 0

DF1 RMS Voltage Output Default Indicator

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

ISC I Sine Phi or I Cosine Phi Output (%)

I/D. Y 0 to 32000 (0 to 320,00 %)

N Y 0

DF2 ISC Output Default Indicator BOOL. Y - N - Y 0 IST I STator Output (%) I/D. Y 0 to 32000

(0 to 320,00 %) N Y 0

DF3 IST Output Default Indicator BOOL. Y - N Y 0 UGRID Grid Voltage Output (%)

I/D. Y 0 to 32000

(0 to 320,00 %) N Y 0

DF4 UGRID Output Default Indicator BOOL. Y - N Y 0 FREQ Frequency Output (%)

I/D. Y 0 to 32000

(0 to 320,00 %) N Y 0

DF5 FREQ Output Default Indicator BOOL. Y - N Y 0 MPAF MPA Module Fault (24V) (1=Fault) BOOL. Y - N Y 0

NV New Value (1=New value) BOOL. Y - N Y 0 ISS I Sine Phi Sign (1 positive current) BOOL. Y - N Y 0 ISIN I Sine Phi or I Cosine Phi Indicator

(1= sin phi; 0= Cos phi) BOOL. Y - N Y 0

Parameters

OFF1 OFFSET = value for 0 % channel 1 I/D N 0 to+32000 Pts CAD Y Y GN1 GAIN = value for 100 % channel 1 I/D N 6400 to+32400 Pts

CAD Y Y


CAD Y Y


CAD Y Y


CAD Y Y


CAD Y Y

74.4 Use

74.5 SPECIFICATIONS





abcd




SCMPA_D().



abcd

Section 75 SCMPM_D : MEASUREMENT PROTECTION MODULE

SCMPM_D Specification version: 1.1 (19/01/07)


75.2 Function

The main task of the SCMPM_D block is to read the status and measurements of SCMPM_D module (BW1-4): • It trips when the trip signal is received

• It provides 4 measurements (in %) • It indicates the cause of trip

• It set alarms when the monitoring bit doesn’t toggle



abcd

Details of 4 BusWords provided by the MPM123 module:

BusWord 1 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 to 0 AMP Tech

Fault Funct Fault

Invalid Measure

Measure 1

AMP = 1 : Allows to memorise the alarm

0 : Alarm is not memorised TechFault = 1 : Technical Fault detected

0 : No Technical Fault detected FunctFault = 1 : Functional Fault detected

0 : No Functional Fault detected Invalid Measure = 1 : Measure Invalid 0 : Measure valid

BusWord 2 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 to 0 TMP Typ4 Typ3 Invalid

Measure Measure 2

TMP = 1 Allows to memorise the trip

0 Trip not memorised Typ3/4 Type of threshold used for inputs module 3/4

0 : Static threshold (TVHx) 1 : Dynamic threshold (Thxlin)

BusWord 3 Bit 15 to 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 to 0

NumCh Invalid Measure

Measure 3

NumCh : Combination of 3 bits that indicates the cause of trip

BusWord 4 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 to 0

Monitoring Bit

TripOut Not used

Invalid measure

Measure 4

Monitoring Bit: In normal work, it changes at each bus read

TripOut = 1 Indicates a trip



abcd

Inputs : BW1 : BusWord Channel 1 supplied by MPM123 Module BW2 : BusWord Channel 2 supplied by MPM123 Module BW3 : BusWord Channel 3 supplied by MPM123 Module BW4 : BusWord Channel 4 supplied by MPM123 Module Outputs : MEAS1 : Measurement 1 in % VAL1 : Measurement 1 valid MEAS2 : Measurement 2 in % VAL2 : Measurement 2 valid MEAS3 : Measurement 3 in % VAL3 : Measurement 3 valid MEAS4 : Measurement 4 in % VAL4 : Measurement 4 valid N-TRIP : Indicates the Not TRIP TChx : Trip causes by Channel x (negative logic) TFF : Trip causes by functional fault TTF Trip causes by technical fault TTI Trip causes by test input AMP : Alarm memory parameter TMP : Trip memory parameter TYP3 : Type of threshold used for ProIn3 TYP4 : Type of threshold used for ProIn4 FFlt : Functional fault (bad configuration) TFlt : Technical fault (hardware fault) Parameterisation : OFF1 : Offset for measurement 1 GN1 : Gain for measurement 1 OFF2 : Offset for measurement 2 GN2 : Gain for measurement 2 OFF3 : Offset for measurement 3 GN3 : Gain for measurement 3 OFF4 : Offset for measurement 4 GN4 : Gain for measurement 4



abcd



Connection

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs BW1 BusWord 1 WORD N 0 to 65535 Y Y BW2 BusWord 2 WORD N 0 to 65535 Y Y BW3 BusWord 3 WORD N 0 to 65535 Y Y BW4 BusWord 4 WORD N 0 to 65535 Y Y

Outputs MEAS1 Measure in % D N -30000 to +30000

(-300% to +300 %) N Y 0

MEAS2 Measure in % D N -30000 to +30000 (-300% to +300 %)

N Y 0


N Y 0


N Y 0

VAL1 Measure 1 validation BOOL Y - N Y 0 VAL2 Measure 2 validation BOOL Y - N Y 0 VAL3 Measure 3 validation BOOL Y - N Y 0 VAL4 Measure 4 validation BOOL Y - N Y 0 AMP Alarm memorisation

parameter BOOL. Y - N Y 0

TMP Trip memorisation parameter

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

N-TRIP N-TRIP indication BOOL. Y 0: TRIP 1: No TRIP

N Y 0

TCh1 Trip caused by Channel 1 BOOL. Y 0: TRIP 1: No TRIP

N Y 0


N Y 0


N Y 0


N Y 0

TFF Trip caused by a functional fault

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

TTF Trip caused by a technical fault

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

TTI Trip caused by a test input module

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

FFlt Functional fault (bad configuration)

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

TFlt Technical fault (hardware fault)

BOOL. Y - N Y 0

TYP3 Type of threshold used for Proln3 (TVH3 / InTh3)

BOOL. Y - N Y 0 (TVH3)

TYP4 Type of threshold used for Proln4 (TVH4 / InTh4)

BOOL. Y - N Y 0 (TVH4)

Parameters OFF1 Offset for measure 1 (value

for 0) D N 0 to 8191 N Y

GN1 Gain for measure 1 (value for 100 %)

D N 8192 to 16388 N Y

OFF2 Offset for measure 2 (value for 0)

D N 0 to 8191 N Y



abcd


n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value


D N 8192 to 16388 N Y


D N 0 to 8191 N Y


D N 8192 to 16388 N Y


D N 0 to 8191 N Y


D N 8192 to 16388 N Y

75.4 Use

• NORMAL OPERATION:

(Monitoring Bit changes at each cycle)

If the Measure x is out of range (0 – 4095), then [VALx] is set to 0 Else [VALx] = NOT(Invalid Measure x) (provided by BWx) [MEASx] = measure x in % (same calculation than sci8k() FB) According to the parameters [GNx] and [OFFx]. If [MEASx] is out of range (due to a bad configuration of FB parameters):

• [VALx] = 0 • [MEASx] = the limit of the range (see 75.3 Arguments characteristics)

If ([GNx] < [OFFx]) or ([GNx] = [OFFx]), then [VALx] = 0 [TYP3] = Typ3 [TYP4] = Typ4 [TMP] = TMP [AMP] = AMP [N-TRIP] = TripOut

NumCh [TCh1] [TCh2] [TCh3] [TCh4] [TFF] [TTF] [TTI] 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1



abcd

• ABNORMAL OPERATION (Monitoring Bit doesn’t toggle anymore)

[VALx] = 0 [TFlt] = 1 [FFlt] = 1 [MEASx] keep the last measurement received [TYP3], [TYP4], [AMP], [TMP], [TRIP] keep the last state received • PARAMETERS [OFFx] set the value for 0 % [GNx] set the value for 100 % • MONITORING BIT Monitoring Bit toggles at each cycle in normal operation The abnormal operation is set when MB (Monitoring Bit) hasn’t toggled during 3 cycles or 15 ms.

75.5 SPECIFICATIONS



RANGE

INIT.VAL (R)

MB Monitoring Bit (change state at each bus read) BOOL -

MB_OLD Previous value of Monitoring Bit BOOL - Memorised but no redundant variable

Num_Ch Cause of trip D



SCMPM_D()



abcd

Section 76 SCO8K_(I,D) : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT

SCO8k_I Specification version : 1.3 (04/04/00) SCO8k_D Specification version : 1.3 (04/04/00)


76.2 Function


ELSE DF=0 IF ( (TOP == BOTT) OR (DI == 1) ) THEN

RE = 0 DF = 1 (Result invalid)

ELSE IF (IN >32000 ) THEN

IN =32000 DF = 1 (Result invalid)

ELSEIF (IN <-32000 ) THEN IN =-32000 DF = 1 (Result invalid)

ENDIF RE = 32000 * (IN-BOTT) / (TOP-BOTT). IF RE >32000 THEN RE = 32000 and DF = 1 IF RE <0 THEN RE = 0 and DF = 1

ENDIF ENDIF



abcd



n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN Analog input in % I/D Y -32000 to+32000

-320.00 % to 320.00 % Y Y


RE Output in Pts CDA

INT N 0 to+32000 pts Y Y 0

DF Output Validation BOOL Y 1= Invalid N Y 0 Parameters

TOP Value in % for 32000 pts

I/D N -32000 to+32000 -320.00 % to 320.00 %

Y Y

BOTT Value in % for 0 pts

I/D N -32000 to+32000 -320.00 % to 320.00 %

Y Y

76.4 Use

76.5 SPECIFICATIONS






SCO_8K_D().



abcd

Section 77 SCOWG_D : SCALING FOR DISTRIBUTED ANALOG OUTPUT OF WAGO

SCOWG_D Specification version : 1.0 (10/11/05)


77.2 Function


ELSE DF=0 IF ( (TOP == BOTT) OR (DI == 1) ) THEN

RE = 0 DF = 1 (Result invalid)

ELSE IF (IN >32767 ) THEN

IN =32767 DF = 1 (Result invalid)

ELSEIF (IN <-32768 ) THEN IN =-32768 DF = 1 (Result invalid)

ENDIF RE = 32767 * (IN-BOTT) / (TOP-BOTT). IF RE >32767 THEN RE = 32767 and DF = 1 IF RE <0 THEN RE = 0 and DF = 1

ENDIF ENDIF



abcd



n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs IN Analog input in % D Y -32768 to+32767

-327.68 % to 327.67 % Y Y


RE Output in Pts CDA

INT N 0 to+32767 pts Y Y 0

DF Output Validation BOOL Y 1= Invalid N Y 0 Parameters

TOP Value in % for 32000 pts

D N -32768 to+32767 -327.68 % to 327.67 %

Y Y

BOTT Value in % for 0 pts

D N -32768 to+32767 -327.68 % to 327.67 %

Y Y

77.4 Use

77.5 SPECIFICATIONS






SCOWG_D().



abcd

Section 78 SCOX20_D : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT

SCOX2X_D Specification version: 1.0 (08/12/05)


78.2 Function

if(INIT) THEN RE=0; DF=0; else DF=0; if ((DI==1 OR (TOP == BOTT)) THEN RE = 0; DF = 1; // Result invalid else if ( IN > 32000 ) IN = 32000; DF = 1; else if (IN < -32000 ) IN = -32000; DF = 1; RE=((IN-BOTT)*32767)/(TOP-BOTT); if ( RE > 32767) THEN DF = 1; RE = 32767; else if ( RE < 0 ) THEN DF = 1; RE = 0;

ENDIF ENDIF ENDIF



abcd



g Range Mand.

Connection

Def. valu

e

Mand.

Data

Advised parameter

s value

First scan value

Inputs IN Analog Input in % D N -32000 to +32000

-320% to 320% Y Y

DI Input disable B Y 1 = disable N 0 Y Outputs

RE Output in CAD Pts D N 0 to 32767 CAD Pts Y Y 0 DF Output Default B Y 1 = invalid N Y 0

Parameters

TOP Value in % for 32767 CAD Pts

D N -32000 to +32000 -320% to 320%

Y Y

BOTT Value in % for 0 CAD Pts D N -32000 to +32000 -320% to 320%

Y Y

78.4 Use

78.5 SPECIFICATIONS



RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

Internal variables : 2 booleans and 1 double



SCOX20_D()



abcd

Section 79 SCSTI1_(I,D) : SCAN STI161 MODULE FOR SINGLE SHAFT

SCSTI1_I Specification version : 1.6 (11/26/04) SCSTI1_D Specification version : 1.6 (11/26/04)


79.2 Function

This function is used for the single shaft turbine speed measurement, with the STI161 module. Inputs : TS Turbine Set ACQ Acquit for Alarm Memorisation MS1 : Most Significant Word channel 1 LS1 : Least Significant Word channel 1 MS2 : Most Significant Word channel 2 LS2 : Least Significant Word channel 2 Outputs :



abcd

RE : Speed Output (%) SP : Speed Output (RPM)


RE1 : Speed Output channel 1 NV1 : New Value on channel 1 OV1 : Overflow channel 1 WB1 : Wire Break detection channel 1 LSHT1: Low Speed High Threshold channel 1 NSS1: No Speed Signal channel 1 RE2 : Speed Output channel 2 NV2 : New Value on channel 2 OV2 : Overflow channel 2 WB2 : Wire Break detection channel 2 LSHT2: Low Speed High Threshold channel 2 NSS2: No Speed Signal channel 2 Parameterization : NF Nominal Frequency NS Nominal Speed LSTV Low Speed Threshold Value STH Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection SDD Sensor Discordance Detection level TYP Old or new prediv : 0 : old prediv = 16 ;1 : new prediv = 100. Int Prediv Long ValBrut1, ValBrut2, Factor, LimCpt IF ACQ OR !TS THEN NSS1(K-1) = 0 ; NSS2(K-1) = 0 NV1 = LS1 & 0x0008 (New Value on channel 1) OV1 = LS1 & 0x0004 (Overflow channel 1) WB1 = !(LS1 & 0x0002 ) (Wire Break detection channel 1) NV2 = LS2 & 0x0008 (New Value on channel 2) OV2 = LS2 & 0x0004 (Overflow channel 2) WB2 = !(LS2 & 0x0002) (Wire Break detection channel 2) Prediv = (LS2 & 0x0001) + ((LS1 & 0x0001)*2) (Predivision and fault information) ValBrut1 = (long (MS1) * 4096) + (LS1/16) IF (OV1) THEN ValBrut1= ValBrut1 + 0x10000000 ValBrut2 = (long (MS2) * 4096) + (LS2/16) IF (OV2) THEN ValBrut2= ValBrut2 + 0x10000000 IF CPT1(K) < (2^31) - CYC THEN CPT1(K) = CPT1(K-1) + CYC IF CPT2(K) < (2^31) - CYC THEN CPT2(K) = CPT2(K-1) + CYC ENO = 0 Init Output valid CASE PREDIV=0 SDF = 1 STI module Default ENO = 1 Output no valid RE1 = 120% Speed Output channel 1



abcd

RE2 = 120% Speed Output channel 2 LSHT1 = 0 Low Speed High Threshold channel 1 LSHT2 = 0 Low Speed High Threshold channel 2 CASE PREDIV=3 Predivision factor = 1 Factor=1 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*1000)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*1000)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS)/ NF)*1000)/ LSTV )

CASE PREDIV=1 Predivision factor = 16 or 100 IF TYP==0 Factor=16 ELSE (TYP==1) Factor=100 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS) / NF)* Factor *1000)/ LSTV ) CASE PREDIV=2 Predivision factor = 24 Factor=24 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*2400)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*2400)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS) / NF)* 24000)/ LSTV ) IF (NV1) THEN IF CPT1(K) < LimCpt THEN LSHT1(K)=1 ELSE LSHT1(K)=0

CPT1=0 ELSE IF CPT1(K) > LimCpt THEN LSHT1(K)=0 IF (NV2) THEN IF CPT2(K) < LimCpt THEN LSHT2(K)=1 ELSE LSHT2(K)=0

CPT2=0 ELSE IF CPT2(K) > LimCpt

THEN LSHT2(K)=0 IF ((WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND (WB2 OR NSS2(K-1))) THEN RE(K)= 120% ; ENO = 1 (Output no valid) ELSE IF ((WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND !(WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)) AND !OV2) THEN RE(K)= RE2 ELSE IF (! (WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND (WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)) AND !OV1) THEN RE(K)= RE1 ELSE IF !(OV1 AND OV2) THEN RE(K)= MAX(RE1,RE2) ELSE RE(K)= 0% ; ENO = 1 (Overflow; Output no valid)



abcd

SP = (RE(K) * NS )/ 100% IF |RE1- RE2|>SDD THEN DIS = 1 ELSE DIS = 0 IF (RE>= STH) AND TS THEN LimCpt=CYC + 2*Factor *(10000*10000)/(RE*NF) IF (CPT1(K)>LimCpt) NSS1(K) =1 IF (CPT2(K)>LimCpt) NSS2(K) =1 IF NF < 100 ENO = 1 Output no valid RE1 = 120% Speed Output channel 1 RE2 = 120% Speed Output channel 2 True table for validity result: SDF WB1 OR NSS1(K-1) OV1 WB2 OR NSS2(K-1) OV2 ENO RE


0

0 1 1 X 1 0 %


Name Description Type N

egRange Mand.

Connection

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value





W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


(0 to 300,00 %) N Y 0

SP Speed in RPM I/D. Y 0 to+30000 RPM N Y 0 DIS discordance BOOL. Y - N Y 0 SDF STI module Default BOOL. Y - N Y 0 ENO Result Indicator BOOL. Y 1 => RE = 120 % N - Y 0



abcd



n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

RE1 Speed Output channel 1 I/D N 0 to 30000 (0 to 300,00 %)

N Y 0




BOOL. Y - N Y 0


(0 to 300,00 %) N Y 0




BOOL. Y - N Y 0

NSS2 No Speed Signal channel 2 BOOL. Y - N Y 0 Parameters

NF © Nominal Frequency (Hz) D N 100 to+600 000 (10 to 60 000Hz)

Y Y

NS © Nominal Speed (rpm) I/D N 0 to+20000 Y Y LSTV Low Speed Threshold Value

(rph/100) I/D N 0 to 10000

(0 to 100.00rph) N 0 Y

STH Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection

I/D N 0 to 1000 (0 to 10.00%)

N 0 Y

SDD Sensor Discordance Detection level

I/D N 0 to 5000 (0 to 50.00%)

N 0 Y

TYP Old or new prediv : 0 : old prediv = 16 1 new prediv = 100

BOOL Y N 0 Y

79.4 Use

79.5 SPECIFICATIONS



RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

CPT1 Timer (K-1) for LSHT1 detection D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable CPT2 Timer (K-1) for LSHT2 detection D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable





abcd



SCSTI1_D().



abcd

Section 80 SCSTI2_(I,D) : SCAN STI161 MODULE FOR DOUBLE SHAFT

SCSTI2_I Specification version : 1.5 (11/26/04) SCSTI2_D Specification version : 1.5 (11/26/04)


80.2 Function

This function is used for the double shaft turbine speed measurement, with the STI161 module. Inputs : TS Turbine Set ACQ Acquit for Alarm Memorisation MS1 : Most Significant Word channel 1 LS1 : Least Significant Word channel 1 MS2 : Most Significant Word channel 2 LS2 : Least Significant Word channel 2



abcd

Outputs : RE : Speed Output (%)


RE1 : Speed Output channel 1 % SP1 : Speed Output channel 1 Rpm NV1 : New Value on channel 1 OV1 : Overflow channel 1 WB1 : Wire Break detection channel 1 LSHT1: Low Speed High Threshold channel 1 NSS1: No Speed Signal channel 1 RE2 : Speed Output channel 2 % SP2 : Speed Output channel 2 Rpm NV2 : New Value on channel 2 OV2 : Overflow channel 2 WB2 : Wire Break detection channel 2 LSHT2: Low Speed High Threshold channel 2 NSS2: No Speed Signal channel 2 Parameterization : SDD Sensor Discordance Detection between channels NF1 Nominal Frequency channel 1 NS1 Nominal Speed channel 1 LSTV1 Low Speed Threshold Value channel 1 STH1 Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection channel 1 NF2 Nominal Frequency channel 2 NS2 Nominal Speed channel 2 LSTV2 Low Speed Threshold Value channel 2 STH2 Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection channel 2 TYP Old or new prediv : 0 : old prediv = 16 ;1 : new prediv = 100. Int Prediv Long ValBrut1, ValBrut2, Factor, LimCpt1, LimCpt2 IF ACQ OR !TS THEN NSS1(K-1) = 0 ; NSS2(K-1) = 0 NV1 = LS1 & 0x0008 (New Value on channel 1) OV1 = LS1 & 0x0004 (Overflow channel 1) WB1 = !(LS1 & 0x0002) (Wire Break detection channel 1) NV2 = LS2 & 0x0008 (New Value on channel 2) OV2 = LS2 & 0x0004 (Overflow channel 2) WB2 = !(LS2 & 0x0002) (Wire Break detection channel 2) Prediv = (LS2 & 0x0001) + ((LS1 & 0x0001)*2) (Predivision and fault information) ValBrut1 = (long (MS1) * 4096) + (LS1/16) IF (OV1) THEN ValBrut1= ValBrut1 + 0x10000000 ValBrut2 = (long (MS2) * 4096) + (LS2/16)



abcd

IF (OV2) THEN ValBrut2= ValBrut2 + 0x10000000 IF CPT1(K) < (2^31) - CYC THEN CPT1(K) = CPT1(K-1) + CYC IF CPT2(K) < (2^31) - CYC THEN CPT2(K) = CPT2(K-1) + CYC ENO = 0 (Init Output valid) CASE PREDIV=0 SDF = 1 (STI module Default) ENO = 1 (Output no valid) RE1 = 120% Speed Output channel 1 RE2 = 120% Speed Output channel 2 LSHT1 = 0 Low Speed High Threshold channel 1 LSHT2 = 0 Low Speed High Threshold channel 2 CASE PREDIV=3 (Predivision factor = 1) Factor=1 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF1)*1000)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF2)*1000)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt1 = ((((60000 * NS1)/ NF1)*1000)/ LSTV1 ) LimCpt2 = ((((60000 * NS2)/ NF2)*1000)/ LSTV2 )

CASE PREDIV=1 (Pre-division factor = 16 or 100) IF TYP==0 Factor=16 ELSE (TYP==1) Factor=100 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF1)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF2)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt1 = ((((60000 * NS1) / NF1)* Factor *1000)/ LSTV1 ) LimCpt2 = ((((60000 * NS2) / NF2)* Factor *1000)/ LSTV2 )

CASE PREDIV=2 (Pre-division factor = 24) Factor=24 SDF = 0 RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF1)*2400)/ ValBrut1) RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF2)*2400)/ ValBrut2)

LimCpt1 = ((((60000 * NS1) / NF1)* 24000)/ LSTV1 ) LimCpt2 = ((((60000 * NS2) / NF2)* 24000)/ LSTV2 )

IF (NV1) THEN IF CPT1(K) < LimCpt1 THEN LSHT1(K)=1 ELSE LSHT1(K)=0

CPT1=0 ELSE IF CPT1(K) > LimCpt1 THEN LSHT1(K)=0 IF (NV2) THEN IF CPT2(K) < LimCpt2 THEN LSHT2(K)=1 ELSE LSHT2(K)=0

CPT2=0 ELSE



abcd

IF CPT2(K) > LimCpt2 THEN LSHT2(K)=0

IF ((WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND (WB2 OR NSS2(K-1))) THEN RE(K)= 120% ; ENO = 1 (Output no valid) ELSE IF ((WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND !(WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)) AND !OV2) THEN RE(K)= RE2 ELSE IF (! (WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND (WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)) AND !OV1) THEN RE(K)= RE1 ELSE IF !(OV1 AND OV2) THEN RE(K)= MAX(RE1,RE2) ELSE RE(K)= 0% ; ENO = 1 (Overflow; Output no valid) SP1 = (RE1(K) * NS1 )/ 100% SP2 = (RE2(K) * NS2 )/ 100% IF |RE1- RE2|>SDD THEN DIS = 1 ELSE DIS = 0 IF (RE1>= STH1) AND TS THEN LimCpt1=CYC + 2*Factor *(10000*10000)/(RE1*NF1) IF (CPT1(K)>LimCpt1) NSS1(K) =1 IF (RE2>= STH2) AND TS THEN LimCpt2=CYC + 2*Factor *(10000*10000)/(RE2*NF2) IF (CPT2(K)>LimCpt2) NSS2(K) =1 IF NF1 < 100 ENO = 1 Output no valid RE1 = 120% Speed Output channel 1 IF NF1 < 100 ENO = 1 Output no valid RE2 = 120% Speed Output channel 2 True table for validity result: SDF WB1 OR NSS1(K-1) OV1 WB2 OR NSS2(K-1) OV2 ENO RE


0

0 1 1 X 1 0 %



abcd



n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value





W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


(0 to 300,00 %) N Y 0

DIS discordance BOOL. Y - N Y 0 SDF STI module Default BOOL. Y - N Y 0 ENO Result Indicator BOOL. Y 1 => RE = 120 % N - Y 0 RE1 Speed Output channel 1 I/D N 0 to 30000

(0 to 300,00 %) N Y 0

SP1 Speed in RPM channel 1 I/D. Y 0 to+30000 RPM N Y 0 NV1 New Value on channel 1 BOOL. N - N Y 0 OV1 Overflow channel 1 BOOL. Y - N Y 0 WB1 Wire Break detection



BOOL. Y - N Y 0


(0 to 300,00 %) N Y 0

SP2 Speed in RPM channel 2 I/D. Y 0 to+30000 RPM N Y 0 NV2 New Value on channel 2 BOOL. N - N Y 0 OV2 Overflow channel 2 BOOL. Y - N Y 0 WB2 Wire Break detection



BOOL. Y - N Y 0

NSS2 No Speed Signal channel 2 BOOL. Y - N Y 0 Parameters

SDD Sensor Discordance Detection level channel 2

I/D N 0 to 5000 (0 to 50.00%)

N 0 Y

NF1 © Nominal Frequency channel 1 (Hz)

D N 100 to+600 000 (10 to 60 000Hz)

Y Y

NS1 © Nominal Speed channel 1 (rpm)

I/D N 0 to+20000 Y Y

LSTV1 Low Speed Threshold Value channel 1 (rph/100)

I/D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100.00rph)

N 0 Y

STH1 Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection channel 1

I/D N 0 to 1000 (0 to 10.00%)

N 0 Y

NF2 © Nominal Frequency channel 2 (Hz)

D N 100 to+600 000 (10 to 60 000Hz)

Y Y

NS2 © Nominal Speed channel 2 (rpm)

I/D N 0 to+20000 Y Y

LSTV2 Low Speed Threshold Value channel 2 (rph/100)

I/D N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100.00rph)

N 0 Y

STH2 Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection channel 2

I/D N 0 to 1000 (0 to 10.00%)

N 0 Y



abcd


n

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

TYP Old or new prediv : 0 : old prediv = 16 1 new prediv = 100

BOOL Y N 0 Y

80.4 Use

80.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) CPT1 Timer (K-1) for LSHT1 detection D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable CPT2 Timer (K-1) for LSHT2 detection D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable





SCSTI2_D().



abcd

Section 81 SELM_(D,R) : BINARY MULTIPLE SELECTION

SELM_D Specification version : 1.5 (09/30/2005) SELM_R Specification version : 1.5 (09/30/2005)

81.1 REPRESENTATION

Example with P1 = 2 (SL2) ; P2 = 5 (SL5) ; P3 = 1 (SL1) ; P4 = 3 (SL3) ; P5 = 4 (SL4)

Priority + Priority - Priority + Priority -



abcd

81.2 FUNCTION

This function block choices with witch input [INx], the output [RE] must be updated in function of the priority and the corresponding selection [SLx] = 1 .

The parameter [P1] is highest priority after is [P2] next 3….

If 2 value of [Px] have the same number or if one parameter is out of range, then the priority is the default case (input1,2,3,4,5).

The input selection [SLx] valid it’s corresponding input value [INx]. If none input selection [SLx] is equal to 1 then the output [RE] is equal to input [IN0].



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 Input value 1 D or R N - Y - N - -

IN2 Input value 2 D or R N - Y - N - -

IN3 Input value 3 D or R N - N 0 N - -




SL1 Selection input value 1

B Y - Y - N - -


B Y - Y - N - -


B Y - N 0 N - -


B Y - N 0 N - -


B Y - N 0 N - -

SL4 = 1 IN4

IN0

SL3 = 1 IN3

SL1 = 1IN1

SL5 = 1IN5

SL2 = 1IN2

RE



abcd

Outputs

RE Output value D or R N - Y - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

P1 Choice of selection of priority 1

W N [ 1 ; 5 ] N 1 N - -


W N [ 1 ; 5 ] N 2 N - -


W N [ 1 ; 5 ] N 3 N - -


W N [ 1 ; 5 ] N 4 N - -


W N [ 1 ; 5 ] N 5 N - -

81.4 USE :


• Scheme : None

• Associated FGT : This block functional can be used with SEQ block for the input calculation.

81.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 5 words and 6 doubles and 5 booleans for SELM_D, 5 words and 6 reals and 5 booleans for SELM_R.



SELM_D() and SELM_R().



abcd

Section 82 SEQ : SEQUENCE FUNCTION

SEQ10, SEQ20, SEQ30, SEQ40, SEQ50, SEQ60 Specification version : 1.3 (02/01/01)

82.1 REPRESENTATION



abcd

82.2 FUNCTION

This function block allows to sequence specific action with step number equal at 10 or 20 or 30 or 40 or 50 and maximum step number equal 60.

In each step it’s possible to reset the sequence at initial step when [RESET] = 1.

The output [RE] sends the number of active step and is updating only if the step is stabilized.

The input [TR_STEPx] send the number of the next step after the step x. If the current step is x and the input [TR_STEPx] is equal to x then the sequence stays at the current step x. Example 1: [TR_STEP5] = 12 and [RE] = 5 that’s mean, the next after step 5 is 12. Example 2: [TR_STEP5] = 5 and [RE] = 5 that’s mean, the step 5 stays active.

The output [RE_T-y] sends the historical step at each state change.

It’s possible to slide on the step without updating output [RE]. In this case, the historical output [RE_T-y] sends the step with sign minus behind number. Example : [RE_T-5] = - 8 that’s mean 5 sample time before the sequence sliding on step 8.

The parameter [INIT_STEP] correspond at the initial step of the block, then the output [RE] is function of this parametre. Example 3: [INIT_STEP] = 22 with [NB_STEP] = 30 then [RE] send the step number betweeen 22 to 52. In this case, the input [TR_STEP1] is the transition after step 22. The defect step is always 1000.

If the sliding is more than 10 steps without stabilization or if [TR_STEPx] is higher than [NB_STEP], then the sequence is in defect and the current output [RE] is equal 1000. It’s possible to leave this problem state by the reset of the sequence [RESET] = 1.

0

2

TR_STEP0 = 2 TR_STEP0 = 5 TR_STEP0 = 10

Go to 5

Go to 10

RE =0

RE =2

RE =10 RE = 5

RESET = 1

RESET = 1 TR_STEP2 = 3

Go to 3

RE =3

RESET = 1



abcd



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

TR_STEP0 Transition from initial step to other step

W N - Y - N - -

TR_STEPx Transition from step x to other step until x equal (NB_STEP-1)

W N - N - N - -

Outputs

RE Current step W N [ 0 ; 1000 ] Y - Y - -

RE_T-1 Active step 1 sample time before

I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -

RE_T-2 Active step 2 sample times before

I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -


I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -


I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -


I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -


I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -


I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -


I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -


I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -


I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -


B N - N 0 Y - -

NB_STEP Number steps of the sequence

W N [ 10 ; 60 ] N 10 Y - -

INIT_STEP Initial steps number W N [ 0 ; 999 ] N 0 Y - -



abcd

82.4 USE :


• Scheme : None

• Associated FGT : This block functional can be used with SELM block for the input calculation and EQM for the output calculation.

82.5 SPECIFICATION



• 22 integers (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10 words for SEQ10, • 22 integers (amongst which 1 state variable) and 20 words for SEQ20, • 22 integers (amongst which 1 state variable) and 30 words for SEQ30, • 22 integers (amongst which 1 state variable) and 40 words for SEQ40, • 22 integers (amongst which 1 state variable) and 50 words for SEQ50, • 22 integers (amongst which 1 state variable) and 60 words for SEQ60.



SEQ10(), SEQ20(), SEQ30(), SEQ40(), SEQ50() and SEQ(60).



abcd

Section 83 SH_(D,R) : SAMPLE AND HOLD

SH_D Specification version : 1.3 (09/30/05) SH_R Specification version : 1.3 (09/30/05)

83.1 REPRESENTATION

83.2 FUNCTION


While validity input [IC] equal 1 then the output [RE] = input [IN]. When the validity input [IC] change from 1 to 0, the input is sample then the output [RE] equal at last input value [IN](t-1), and after the output [RE] stays at this value as long as the validity input [IC] remains 0.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN Input value W,I,L,D,R N - Y - Y - -

IC Valid Input B Y 1 = Input # 1 valid

Y - N - -

Outputs

RE Output result W,I,L,D,R N - Y - Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - -



abcd

83.4 USE :


• Scheme : None


83.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 1 boolean and 1 double (amongst which 1 state variable) for SH_D.

1 boolean and 1 real (amongst which 1 state variable) for SH_R.



SH_D() and SH_R().



abcd

Section 84 SL2 : SELECTOR 2 UNITS


84.1 REPRESENTATION

84.2 FUNCTION

This treatment controls a 2 units system with safety change over, circular permutation and unit number adaptation in function of the process need.

• INITIALIZATION :

The treatment is set in accordance to [INIT] parameter :

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 0, then the combination C12 is selected [C_SEL] set to 0 .

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the combination C21 is selected [C_SEL] set to 1.

The other outputs are set to zero.

• COMBINATION SELECTION :

The 2 combinations [C12_OPE] and [C21_OPE] are exclusives:



abcd

When the input [C12_DMD] is equal to 1, then the combination selection [C_SEL] is seted at 0. When the input [C21_DMD] is equal to 1, then the combination selection [C_SEL] is seted at 1. If the 2 demands [C12_DMD] and [C21_DMD] are equal at 1 at the same time then there is no effect on combination selection [C_SEL] , it’s stays at the last value before that.

• COMBINATION IN OPERATION :

The combination [C12_OPE] is set at 1 when combination selection [C_SEL] = 0 and [AUTO] = 1.


• NUMBER UNITS CALCULATION :

The number of units necessary is calculated in function of inputs [AUT_ON], [AUT_OFF], [AD1_ON], and [AD1_OFF]. The number unit calculation is as following:

Number units calculation

Operator Description Name

IF Start 1st unit AUT_ON

AND NOT Stop all units AUT_OFF

THEN SET One unit requested NEED1 = 1

IF Stop all units AUTO_OFF

THEN RESET One unit requested NEED1 = 0

IF Start 2nd unit AD1_ON

AND NOT Stop 2nd unit AD1_OFF


THEN SET Two units requested NEED2 = 1

IF Stop 2nd unit AD1_OFF

OR Falling edge ( Unit 1 or 2 in operation ) ↓ ( ON1 + ON2 )

OR Stop all units AUT_OFF

THEN RESET Two units requested NEED2 = 0

IF Stop order STP

THEN Number unit running requested = 99 ( remains in state )

NB_UNIT = 99

IF Two units requested NEED2

AND NOT Stop order STP

THEN Number unit running requested = 2 NB_UNIT = 2



abcd



IF One unit requested NEED1

AND NOT Two units requested NEED2



IF NOT

One unit requested NEED1





Convention : In [Cxy_OPE], the “ x letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in first and “ y letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in second. Example [C21_OPE] indicates that is unit 2 in first and 1 in second.

After the selection of combination [Cxy_OPE] and if [AUTO] confirms the AUTO mode, then the [Cxy_OPE] combination is actual and the treatment varies according to [NB_UNIT]:

- If [NB_UNIT] = 0 (Cxy_OPE), then the inactivating maintained demands for the unit x and y are transmitted [OFFx_ORDER] and [OFFy_ORDER].

- If [NB_UNIT] = 1 (Cxy_OPE), then the activating maintained demand for the unit x is transmitted [ONx_ORDER]. [ONx] confirms the unit x active state and reset [ONx_ORDER] demand. Then an inactivating maintained demand for the unit y [OFFy_ORDER] is transmitted.

- If [NB_UNIT] = 2 (Cxy_OPE), then the activating maintained demands for the unit x and y are transmitted [ONx_ORDER] and [ONy_ORDER]. [ONx] and [ONy] confirms the unit x and y active state and reset [ONx_ORDER] and [ONy_ORDER] demands.

- If [NB_UNIT] = 99, then units demands stays in state and no demands are transmitted.


Convention :

The“ X upper case letter ” indicates that the activating demand for the unit X has been made [ONx_ORDER].

The “ y lower case letter ” indicates that the inactivating demand for the unit Y [OFFy_ORDER] is permanently maintained.

- SAFETY CHANGEOVER

C:Xy



abcd

If [NB_UNIT] = 1.When unit in operation fall in problem, then the change-over is made on the first ready unit.

- COMBINATION IN DISCREPANCY

When [NB_UNIT] = 1 and actuator Y in operation and (C:xY) combination selected, then [DISC] information is set. Only the switch over order [PD] will return to normal operation (C:Xy) with two times. [SO_TIME] is minimum time during the 2 units are in operation, and [MIN_TIME] is minimum time running of 1 unit before switch-over.

- COMBINATION IN PROBLEM

If the unit number is not in accordance with the units need [NB_UNIT], then the treatment becomes in disturbance [DITS] with all order inactivated.

Disturbed calculation


IF [ Unit 1 in problem PB1

AND Unit 2 in problem PB2

AND Nb unit running requested = 1 ] NB_UNIT = 1

OR [ (

Unit 1 in problem PB1

OR Unit 2 in problem ) PB2


THEN Selector is disturbed DIST

C:Xy PBx

C:XY C:xY

OFFy_ORDER ONy_ORDER OFFx_ORDER

ONy

C:Xy ONx

C:XY C:xY

OFFy_ORDER ONy_ORDER OFFx_ORDER

PBy

C:Xy( ONx since SO_TIME )

C:XY C:xY

OFFy_ORDER ONx_ORDER OFFx_ORDERDISC

PD & ( ONy since MIN_TIME )

C:xY

OFFx_ORDERDISC

PBx



abcd

While the unit number is not in accordance with the needs (0, 1 or 2) then the treatment stay in the combination in problem status [DIST].


When the function is not in AUTO mode and the combination treatment is not in problem [DIST], then all the outputs are set to zero.

If there is new combination selection ( example C12 to C21 ) then the treatment realize in first all the process modification ( add new unit or change-over on defect ) before change over of the combination.

If [NB_UNIT] value is equal to 99 and the treatment is not [DIST], then the treatment is set in waiting state without changes of unit demands.

GENERATION OF ALARMS, OF VISUALISATION INFO AND MISCELLANEOUS :

[CUR_STEP] indicates the sequence current step number of the treatment.




Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

C12_DMD Combination unit 1 next 2 dmd

B N - Y - Y - -

C21_DMD Combination unit 2 next 1 dmd

B N - Y - Y - -

AUT_ON Start 1st unit B N - Y - Y - -

AUT_OFF Stop all unit B N - Y - Y - -

AD1_ON Start 2nd unit B N - Y - Y - -

AD1_OFF Stop 2nd unit B N - Y - Y - -

STP Stop order B N - N 0 Y - -

PD Switch over order B Y - N 0 Y - -

ON1 Unit 1 started B N - Y - Y - -

PB1 Unit 1 in problem B N - Y - Y - -



AUTO Auto mode B Y - Y - Y - -

Outputs




abcd

C_SEL Combination selected

B N 0 = C12 sel 1 = C21 sel

N - Y - 0

C12_OPE Combination unit 1 next 2 in operation

B N N - Y - 0

C21_OPE Combination unit 2 next 1 in operation

B N N - Y - 0

DIST Combination disturbed

B N N - Y - 0

DISC Combination discrepancy

B N N - Y - 0

NB_UNIT Nb unit running requested

W N N - Y - 0

ON1_ORDER Starting unit 1 order B N Y - Y - 0

OFF1_ORDER Stopping unit 1 order

B N Y - Y - 0



B N Y - Y - 0



abcd


ConnectionDef.

value Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

INIT Initial value B N 0 = C12 sel. 1 = C21 sel.

N 0 Y - -

SO_TIME Minimum time for switch over

D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -

MIN_TIME Minimum time running for unit

D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -


B N - N 0 Y - -

84.4 USE


• Scheme : Example of utilisation with 2 motors with 2 logic orders command.

INIT SO_TIME MIN_TIME RESET SL2 C12_DMD CUR_STEP C21_DMD C_SEL AUT_ON C12_OPE AUT_OFF C21_OPE AD1_ON DIST AD1_OFF DISC STP

INIT ON_TIME OFF_TIME DES_TIME RESET MO2 A_ON_DMD CUR_STEP M_ON _DMD ON_STATE REL_ON OFF_STATE SAF_ON SAF_ON_STATE A_OFF_DMD SAF_OFF_STATE M_OFF _DMD PROBLEM REL_OFF ON_ORDER SAF_OFF

OFF ORDER


OFF ORDER

OR

OR



abcd


84.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 9 booleans (amongst which 2 state variables), 10 integers, 5 words (amongst which 2 state variables) and 6 doubles (amongst which 5 state variables).



SL2().



abcd

Section 85 SL3 : SELECTOR 3 UNITS


85.1 REPRESENTATION

85.2 FUNCTION

This treatment controls a 3 units system with safety change over, circular permutation and unit number adaptation in function of the process need.



If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 0 or <> {0,1,2} , then the combination C123 is selected [C_SEL] set to 0 .




abcd


The other outputs are set to zero.

• COMBINATION SELECTION :

The 3 combinations [C123_OPE] , [C231_OPE] and [C312_OPE] are exclusives:

When the input [C123_DMD] is equal to 1, then the combination selection [C_SEL] is seted at 0. When the input [C231_DMD] is equal to 1, then the combination selection [C_SEL] is seted at 1. When the input [C312_DMD] is equal to 1, then the combination selection [C_SEL] is seted at 2. If the 2 or 3 demands [C123_DMD] , [C231_DMD] and [C312_DMD] are equal at 1 at the same time then there is no effect on combination selection [C_SEL] , it’s stays at the last value before that.

• COMBINATION IN OPERATION :




• NUMBER UNITS CALCULATION :

The number of units necessary is calculated in function of inputs [AUT_ON], [AUT_OFF], [AD1_ON], [AD1_OFF], [AD2_ON], and [AD2_OFF]. The number unit calculation is as following:



abcd



IF Start 1st unit AUT_ON


THEN SET One unit requested NEED1 = 1

IF Stop all units AUTO_OFF

THEN RESET One unit requested NEED1 = 0

IF Start 2nd unit AD1_ON

AND NOT Stop 2nd unit AD1_OFF


THEN SET Two units requested NEED2 = 1

IF Stop 2nd unit AD1_OFF


THEN RESET Two units requested NEED2 = 0

IF Start 3rd unit AD2_ON

AND NOT Stop 3rd unit AD2_OFF


THEN SET Three units requested NEED3 = 1

IF Stop 3rd unit AD2_OFF


THEN RESET Three units requested NEED3 = 0

IF Stop order STP

THEN Number unit running requested = 99 ( remains in state )

NB_UNIT = 99

IF Three units requested NEED3



IF Two units requested NEED2

AND NOT Three units requested NEED3





abcd



abcd



IF One unit requested NEED1





IF NOT

One unit requested NEED1






Convention : In [Cxyz_OPE], the “ x letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in first, “ y letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in second and “ z letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in third. Example [C231_OPE] indicates that is unit 2 in first, 3 in second and 1 in third.

After the selection of combination [Cxyz_OPE] and if [AUTO] confirms the AUTO mode, then the [Cxyz_OPE] combination is actual and the treatment varies according to [NB_UNIT]:

- If [NB_UNIT] = 0 (Cxyz_OPE), then the inactivating maintained demands for the unit x , y and z are transmitted [OFFx_ORDER], [OFFy_ORDER] and [OFFz_ORDER].

- If [NB_UNIT] = 1 (Cxyz_OPE), then the activating maintained demand for the unit x is transmitted [ONx_ORDER]. [ONx] confirms the unit x active state and reset [ONx_ORDER] demand. Then an inactivating maintained demand for the unit y [OFFy_ORDER] and z [OFFz_ORDER] are transmitted.

- If [NB_UNIT] = 2 (Cxyz_OPE), then the activating maintained demand for the unit x and y are transmitted [ONx_ORDER] [ONy_ORDER]. [ONx] and [ONy] confirms the unit x and y active state and reset [ONx_ORDER] and [ONy_ORDER]. Then an inactivating maintained demand for the unit z [OFFz_ORDER] is transmitted.

- If [NB_UNIT] = 3 (Cxyz_OPE), then the activating maintained demands for the unit x , y and z are transmitted [ONx_ORDER], [ONy_ORDER] and [ONz_ORDER]. [ONx], [ONy] and [ONz] confirm the unit x,y and z active state and reset [ONx_ORDER] [ONy_ORDER] and [ONz_ORDER] demands.

- If [NB_UNIT] = 99, then units demands stays in state and no demands are transmitted.



abcd


Convention :

The“ X upper case letter ” indicates that the activating demand for the unit X has been made [ONx_ORDER].

The “ y lower case letter ” and “ z lower case letter ” indicates that the inactivating demand for the unit Y [OFFy_ORDER] and Z [OFFz_ORDER] are permanently maintained.

- SAFETY CHANGEOVER

If [NB_UNIT] = 1.When unit in operation fall in problem, then the changeover is made on the first ready unit.

C:Xyz

C:Xyz PBx

C:XYz C:xYz

OFFy_ORDER OFFz_ORDER

ONy_ORDEROFFz_ORDER

OFFx_ORDEROFFz_ORDER

ONy

C:xyZ

OFFx_ORDEROFFy_ORDER

ONz C:XYZ

ONy_ORDERONz_ORDER

PBy

C:xYz PBy

C:XYz C:Xyz

OFFx_ORDER OFFz_ORDER

ONx_ORDEROFFz_ORDER

OFFy_ORDEROFFz_ORDER

ONx

C:xyZ


ONz C:XYZ

ONx_ORDERONz_ORDER

PBx

C:xyZ PBz

C:XyZ C:Xyz

OFFx_ORDER OFFy_ORDER

ONx_ORDEROFFy_ORDER

OFFy_ORDEROFFz_ORDER

ONx

C:xYz


ONy C:XYZ

ONx_ORDERONy_ORDER

PBx



abcd

If [NB_UNIT] = 2.When unit in operation fall in problem, then the changeover is made on the first ready unit.

- COMBINATION IN DISCREPANCY

When [NB_UNIT] = 1 and actuator Y or Z in operation and (C:xYz),(C:xyZ) combination selected, then [DISC] information is set. Only the switch over order [PD] will return to normal operation (C:Xyz) with two times. [SO_TIME] is minimum time during the 2 units are in operation, and [MIN_TIME] is minimum time running of 1 unit before switchover.

C:Xyz( ONx since SO_TIME )

C:XYz C:xYz


ONx_ORDEROFFz_ORDER


DISC

PD & ( ONy since MIN_TIME )

C:xYz


DISC

PBx

C:XyZ PBz

C:XYZ C:XYz

OFFy_ORDER

ONy_ORDER

OFFz_ORDER

ONy

C:Xyz( ONx since SO_TIME )

C:xYZ

C:xyZ


OFFx_ORDER ONy_ORDER

DISC


DISC

PD & ( ONz since MIN_TIME )

C:xyZ


DISC

PBy

C:XyZ

ONx_ORDEROFFy_ORDER

C:xYz( ONy since SO_TIME )

OFFx_ORDER OFFz_ORDER

DISC

PBx



abcd

When [NB_UNIT] = 2 and actuator Z in operation and (C:XyZ),(C:xYZ) combination selected, then [DISC] information is set. Only the switch over order [PD] will return to normal operation (C:XYz) with two times. [SO_TIME] is minimum time during the 3 units are in operation, and [MIN_TIME] is minimum time running of 1 unit before switchover.

- COMBINATION IN PROBLEM

If the unit number is not in accordance with the units need [NB_UNIT], then the treatment becomes in disturbance [DITS] with all order inactivated.



IF [ Unit 1 in problem PB1




OR [ (


AND Unit 2 in problem ) PB2

OR (



OFFx_ORDERDISC

C:XYz ( ONx since SO_TIME )

C:XYZ C:xYZ

OFFz_ORDER ONx_ORDER

OFFx_ORDER DISC

PD & [( ONy & ONz ) since MIN_TIME ]

C:xYZPBx

OFFy_ORDERDISC

C:XYz ( ONy since SO_TIME )

C:XYZ C:XyZ

OFFz_ORDER ONy_ORDER

OFFy_ORDER DISC

PD & [( ONx & ONz ) since MIN_TIME ]

C:XyZPBy



abcd



OR (




OR [ Unit 1 in problem PB1

OR Unit 2 in problem PB2

OR Unit 3 in problem PB3


THEN Selector is disturbed DIST

While the unit number is not in accordance with the needs (0, 1 ,2 or 3) then the treatment stay in the combination in problem status [DIST].


When the function is not in AUTO mode and the combination treatment is not in problem [DIST], then all the outputs are set to zero.

If there is new combination selection ( example C123 to C231 ) then the treatment realize in first all the process modification ( add new unit or changeover on defect ) before changeover of the combination.

If [NB_UNIT] value is equal to 99 and the treatment is not [DIST], then the treatment is set in waiting state without changes of unit demands.

In case of safety changeover when the treatment is in need 1, and 2 units are in problem then the treatment activates the valid unit.

GENERATION OF ALARMS, OF VISUALISATION INFO AND MISCELLANEOUS :

[CUR_STEP] indicates the sequence current step number of the treatment.


C:Xyz PBx & PBy

C:XyZ C:xyZ


OFFy_ORDERONz_ORDER


ONz



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

C123_DMD Combination unit 1 next 2 next 3 dmd

B N - Y - Y - -


B N - Y - Y - -


B N - Y - Y - -

AUT_ON Start 1st unit B N - Y - Y - -

AUT_OFF Stop all unit B N - Y - Y - -

AD1_ON Start 2nd unit B N - Y - Y - -

AD1_OFF Stop 2nd unit B N - Y - Y - -

AD2_ON Start 3rd unit B N - Y - Y - -

AD2_OFF Stop 3rd unit B N - Y - Y - -

STP Stop order B N - N 0 Y - -

PD Switch over order B Y - N 0 Y - -







AUTO Auto mode B Y - Y - Y - -

Outputs


C_SEL Combination selected

W N 0 = C123 sel1 = C231 sel2 = C312 sel

N - Y - 0

C123_OPE Combination unit 1 next 2 next 3 in operation

B N N - Y - 0


B N N - Y - 0


B N N - Y - 0

DIST Combination disturbed

B N N - Y - 0



abcd


Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

DISC Combination discrepancy

B N N - Y - 0

NB_UNIT Nb unit running requested

W N N - Y - 0



B N Y - Y - 0



B N Y - Y - 0



B N Y - Y - 0

Parameters - - - - - - - - -

INIT Initial value W N 0 = C123 sel.1 = C231 sel.2 = C312 sel.

N 0 Y - -

SO_TIME Minimum time for switch over

D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -

MIN_TIME Minimum time running for unit

D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -


B N - N 0 Y - -

85.4 USE




abcd

• Scheme : Example of utilisation with 3 motors with 2 logic orders command.

INIT SO_TIME MIN_TIME RESET SL2 C123_DMD CUR_STEP C231_DMD C_SEL C312_DMD C123_OPE AUT_ON C231_OPE AUT_OFF C312_OPE AD1_ON DIST AD1_OFF DISC STP

NB UNIT


OFF ORDER


OFF ORDER

OR

OR


OFF ORDER

OR



abcd


85.5 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 10 booleans (amongst which 3 state variables), 10 integers, 6 words (amongst which 2 state variables) and 8 doubles (amongst which 7 state variables).



SL3().



abcd

Section 86 SME*_ (D, DR) : SPEED MEASURE ELABORATION

SME_D, SME1_D, SME1_DR Specification version : O (08/22/08)

86.1 REPRESENTATION



abcd

86.2 Function

• INITIALISATION : During initialisation of CPU the speed measure is lock at 0 during TINIT/100 s, and until SPVx signals are valid : SPV1 for one measure, SPV1 and SPV2 for two measures and 2 of 3 among SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 for three measures.

• NORMAL OPERATION

♦ Chanel validation (x: pour voie 1 / voie 2/ voie3) (y : pour chaîne 1/ chaîne 2)

One channel is no valid when (by priority 1 to 5):

1- Acquisition is in defect.(Hardware) (Status meas. = 10)

2 – The measure is not refresh (software) (Status meas. = 20)

3 – The increasing of speed measure is too fast. (Status meas. = 30)

4 – The decreasing of speed measure is too fast (Status meas. = 40)

5 – The measure is in discrepancy in relation to other (Status meas. = 50)

Control 10 is realized permanently on the measure connected.

Default 20 and 50 are not activated when the measure is lower than 0,25% of nominal speed (NOM)

Default 30 and 40 are not activated when the measure is lower than parameter LOWS.

When one measure is declared in defect, it is don’t used for the elaboration of the measure



abcd

♦ Measures elaboration

Case of three measures (3 or 2 measures valid): The measure is elaborated from the average of X measures valid, if at least two measures are valid.

Case of two measures: The measure is elaborated from the Maximum value of two measures.

Three elaboration are realized.

1. A raw measure elaborate as following V = {nominal speed} * (20 MHz * {division factor}) / ( {nominal frequency} * {speed measure).

2. A filtered measure elaborate from the precedent measure(1) after a first order filter. Never used this output for the acceleration calculation.

3. A sliding average which is the sliding average of n(Max=10) last validated measures.

♦ ELABORATION speed measure valid

This information is active is at least 2 measures on 3 are valid.

♦ ELABORATION of speed standstill

Each variable speed standstill (STDSTILx) is active when its value is lower of NTH parameter.



abcd



Def. Value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y


W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y

SPV1 Speed Measure Validator channel 1

BOOL N 0 = Fault 1 = Right Measure

Y -


W N 0 to 65535 N 0 Y


W N 0 to 65535 N 0 Y



N 1


W N 0 to 65535 N 0 Y


W N 0 to 65535 N 0 Y



N 1


W N 0 to 65535 N 0 Y


W N 0 to 65535 N 0 Y

RST Acknowledge of speed measure in fault

BOOL. N Acquit =1 Y 0 Y

outputs

AVR Raw measure D N 0 to 15000 (0 to 150,00 %)

Y - Y

FLT Filtered measure D N 0 to 15000 (0 to 150,00 %)

N - Y

FLS Sliding measure D N 0 to 15000 (0 to 150,00 %)

N - Y

OM1 Value of speed measure 1 D N 0 to 15000 (0 to 150,00 %)

N - Y


N - Y


N - Y

VLD Speed measure valid BOOL. N Valid =1 N - Y EINIT End of initialisation BOOL. N End=1 N - Y SC1 Status of measure 1 D N 0 to 50

(default type * 10) N - Y

SC2 Status of measure 2 D N 0 to 50 (default type * 10)

N - Y

SC3 Status of measure 3 D N 0 to 50 (default type * 10)

N - Y

C1VLD Speed Measure 1 Valid BOOL. N Valid =1 N - Y



STDSTIL1 Null speed 1 < NTH BOOL. N STANDSTILL =1 N - Y




abcd


Def. Value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value


SDIV DIV dividing factor request BOOL N DIV1 Request=1 N - Y

DEFDIV Dividing factor Alarm W N 0=OK, 1= Card 1 fault, 2=Card 2

fault, 3=Card1&2 faults, 9=TDIVx

factors faults

N - Y


ConnectionDef.

Value Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Parameters

TINIT Initialisation time W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

Y - Y

TFLT First order time constant W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

N 3 x Ts Y ≥ 3 x Ts

NSG Number of measure for sliding

W N 0 to 10 N 2 Y

NTH Number of RPH for standstill

W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 rpm)

Y - Y

DIV1 Division value 1 W N 16 or 100 (3 on SME1_DR)

Y (N on SME1_DR)

- (3 on SME1_

DR)

Y

DIV2 Division value 2 W N 24 (100 on SME1_DR)

Y (N on SME1_DR)

- (100 on

SME1_DR)

Y

NSP Number of speed measure used

W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 10000 rpm)

Y - Y

LOWS Lows speed W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y DISC Max discrepancy beetween

two measure W N 0 to 100

(0 to 100 rpm) Y - Y

FREQ Nominal frequency W N 0 to 30000 (0 to 30000 Hz)

Y - Y

TSPEC Specific time of machine W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 100,00 s)

Y - Y

DECEL Max deceleration of machine

W N 0 to 1000 (0 to 1000 rpm)

Y - Y

NOM Nominal Speed W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 10000 rpm)

Y - Y

TRNG Turning Gear Speed W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 10000 rpm)

Y - Y

FREQMF Frequency Multiplier Factor W N 1 to 10000 (1,10,100,1000,

10000)

N 1 Y

TDIV Speed for dividing factor change

W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 10000 rpm)

N 0 Y

TDIVHY Speed Hysteresis for dividing factor change

W N 0 to 10000 (0 to 10000 rpm)

N 0 Y

86.4 USE :



abcd


• Scheme : None


• Scheme : None

86.5 SPECIFICATION

SME_D and SME1_D blocks are for old STI 161 cards only. SME1_DR block is for STI171 cards : the adaptative factor is only on the STI171 card. It is possible to use this adaptative factor only above the half of nominal speed. It is possible to use the SME1_D or SME1_DR blocks on STI161 card : keep the default values TDIV1 = 9999 and TDIV2 = 0 with SME1_D and TDIV = 0 with SME1_DR for this need.


Internal variables : • 12 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 8 words and 41 doubles (amongst which 33

state variables) for SME_D block. • 14 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 13 words (amongst which 4 state variables) and

47 doubles (amongst which 33 state variables) for SME1_D block. • 14 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 13 words (amongst which 4 state variables), 32

doubles (amongst which 18 state variables) and 15 reals (amongst which 15 state variables) for SME1_DR block.



SME_D() or SME1_D() or SME1_DR().



abcd

Section 87 SNP_CONF : SNP CONF

SNP_CONF : specification version 1.0 (09/17/01)

87.1 REPRESENTATION

87.2 FUNCTION

This block is used to change the SNP address and optionally the configuration of the port1 or the port 2 of the 351 CPU on rack 0, slot 1 with the firmware 9.11.

When the IN input is set to 1 (raising edge), the block changes the SNP slave address and optionally the configuration on the card RACK=0 and SLO=0, on the port specified by the CHA parameter (CHA=1 (port1) or CHA=2 (port2). The new SNP slave address is fixed by the parameter SID.

The parameters are optional when not present the default values are set. When present it is recommended to put constants.

The “change SNP_ID” communication request is not taking into account during 2 seconds after the first cycle.

If the change is not successful, after a delay, the DF fault signal is set to 1



abcd



Range Mand. Connecti

on

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

VAL Validation input on raising edge

B Y - Y Y -

Outputs

DF Fault B Y - N Y - 0

Parameters - - - - - - - -

CHA Channel I N 1-2 Y Y -

SID Slave ID I N 1-255 Y Y -

PM Port Mode I N 0=slave, 1= master 2=peer

N 0 Y

DR Data Rate I N 0=300, 1=600, 2=1200, 3=2400, 4=4800, 5=9600, 6=19200

N 6 Y -

PAR Parity I N 0=none, 1=odd, 2=even

N 1 Y -

FC Flow Control I N 0=HARD 1=NONE 2=SOFT

N 1 Y

TD Turnaround Delay I N 0=none, 1=10ms, 2=100ms, 3=500ms

N 0 Y

TO Time out I N 0=long 1=medium 2=short 3=none

N 0 Y

BPC Bits per Character I N 0=7bits 1=8bits

N 1 Y

SB Stop Bits I N 0=1stopbit 1=2stopbits

N 0 Y

DP Duplex Mode I N 0=2-wire 1=4-wire 2=point to point

N 1 Y -



abcd

87.4 Use

87.5 SPECIFICATIONS


NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R) INP IN at the previous cycle B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

COUNT Count for delay at init B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable Internal variables : 3 booleans and 32 integers.



SNP_CONF().



abcd

Section 88 SOL1 / SOL1W : SINGLE COIL SOLENOID VALVE WITH 1 LOGIC ORDER COMMAND


88.1 REPRESENTATION



abcd

88.2 FUNCTION

This treatment controls a single coil solenoid valve with 1 logic order commands without intermediate position switch.



If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set in valve closed state with the output [OPG_ORDER] set zero.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set in valve opened state with the output [OPG_ORDER] set to 1.


After an opening demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and if release opening [REL_OPG] is present, the maintained valve opening order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER] is present. The open limit switch [OPD] confirms the valve opened [OPG_ST].

After a closing demand (non-latched) [A(M)_CLG_DMD] and if release closing [REL_CLG] is present, the maintained valve closing order is transmitted [OPG_ORDER] not present. The close limit switch [CLD] confirms the valve closed [CLG_ST].

If the two demands (non-latched) [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and [A(M)_CLG_DMD] are present at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_CLG_DMD] have priority.

If the treatment releases a closing or opening demand, it is possible to have the reverse demand.



abcd



- VALVE SAFETY POSITION

If safety opening (latched) [SAF_OPG] is set, the maintained valve opening order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER] is present. the treatment becomes in safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST].

If safety closing (latched) [SAF_CLG] is set, the maintained valve closing order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER] is not present. the treatment becomes in safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST].



If the treatment is in safety [SAF_OPG_ST] or [SAF_CLG_ST], and the [SAF_OPG] and [SAF_CLG] are no more existing, then the valve returns to normal operation.


- VALVE IN PROBLEM

If the control cell is disturbed, [DISTURB] presence, the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the valve is in opening [OPG_ST] or safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] and limit switch [OPD] is lost or [CLD] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the valve is in closing [CLG_ST] or safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] and limit switch [CLD] is lost or [OPD] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].



If the valve opened limit switch is defected [OPD_DEF] or the valve closed limit switch is defected [CLD_DEF] the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the valve opened limit switch [OPD] is present at the same time than the valve closed limit switch [CLD] more than 1 cycle time then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].



abcd

If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], the treatment set the valve [OPG_ORDER] in the safety position defined by the [SFT] parameter ( If SFT = 1 then OPG_ORDER = 1 Else OPG_ORDER = 0 Endif ) and the other outputs are set to zero.


If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], and the problem cause is no more existing, only the contactor return [OPD] or [CLD] and cell is not disturbed [DISTURB] combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the valve in problem state and allows a return to normal operation.



During safety opening or safety closing phase the functional state [SAF_OPG_ST], [SAF_CLG_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_OPG], [SAF_CLG] disappear.


When the treatment changes from degraded mode or safety mode to normal mode, then it will take the corespondent functional states of the limit switch returns and set the [OPG_ORDER] to the corespondent value .

If the valve moves after an opening or closing demand and the treatment receives the reverse demand, then it will immediately react and accept this demand and set the [OPG_ORDER] to the corespondent value









abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs









OPD Fdc open B N - Y - Y -


B Y - N 0 Y - -

CLD Fdc closed B N - Y - Y -


B Y - N 0 Y - -



Outputs






B N N - Y - 0


OPG_ORDER Opening order B Y Y - Y - 0


D N N - Y - 0


D N N - Y - 0


D N N - Y - 0



abcd

Parameters - - - - - - - - -


B N - N 0 Y - -

INIT Initial value B N - Y - Y - -

SFT Safety position B N 1=opening 0=closing

N 0 Y - -


D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -


D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -


D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -


88.4 CONFIGURATION

• TYPE SOL1A : It’s maximal I / O configuration with all position feedback.

• TYPE SOL1B : - Without position feedback : The position feedback is calculated as following: - Without position feedback : If [OPD] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created outside the block. If [CLD] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created outside the block.

• USE :


• Scheme : None



abcd


88.5 SPECIFICATION



• 8 booleans, 10 integers, 3 words (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables) for SOL1 ;

• 8 booleans, 10 integers, 6 words (amongst which 4 state variable) and 10 doubles for SOL1W ;



SOL1().



abcd

Section 89 SOL2 / SOL2W : DUAL COIL SOLENOID VALVE WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS COMMAND


89.1 REPRESENTATION



abcd

89.2 FUNCTION

This treatment controls a dual coil solenoid valve with 2 logic orders commands without intermediate position switch.


If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set in valve closed state with the output [CLG_ORDER] set to 1.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set in valve opened state with the output [OPG_ORDER] set to 1.

If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 2, then the treatment is initialized in accordance with the valve position (the valve stays opened or closed without closing or opening orders).


After an opening demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and if release opening [REL_OPG] is present, the valve opening order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER]. The open limit switch [OPD] confirms the valve opened [OPG_ST] and reset opening order [OPG_ORDER] .

After a closing demand (non-latched) [A(M)_CLG_DMD] and if release closing [REL_CLG] is present, the valve closing order is transmitted [CLG_ORDER]. The close limit switch [CLD] confirms the valve closed [CLG_ST] and reset closing order [CLG_ORDER].

If the two demands [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and [A(M)_CLG_DMD] are present at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_CLG_DMD] have priority.

If the treatment releases a closing or opening demand, it is possible to have the reverse demand after the output [OPG_ORDER] or [CLG_ORDER] is no more present.

The orders [OPG ORDER] and [CLG_ORDER] are exculsives.



- VALVE SAFETY POSITION

If safety opening (latched) [SAF_OPG] is set, the valve opening order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER] is present until the limit switch open [OPD] is true. the treatment becomes in safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] as long as safety opening [SAF_OPG] is set.

If safety closing (latched) [SAF_CLG] is set, the valve closing order is transmitted, [CLG_ORDER] is present until the limit switch close [CLD] is true. the treatment becomes in safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] as long as safety closing [SAF_CLG] is set.



abcd



If the treatment is in safety [SAF_OPG_ST] or [SAF_CLG_ST], and the [SAF_OPG] and [SAF_CLG] are no more existing, then the valve returns to normal operation.


- VALVE IN PROBLEM

If the control cell is disturbed, [DISTURB] presence, the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the valve is in opening [OPG_ST] or safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] and limit switch [OPD] is lost or [CLD] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the valve is in closing [CLG_ST] or safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] and limit switch [CLD] is lost or [OPD] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].



If the valve opened limit switch is defected [OPD_DEF] or the valve closed limit switch is defected [CLD_DEF] the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the valve opened limit switch [OPD] is present at the same time than the valve closed limit switch [CLD] more than 1 cycle time then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].

If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], the valve order (closing or opening) is unchanged, only [PROBLEM] output is present.


If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DISTURB] combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the valve in problem state and allows a return to normal operation.



During safety opening or safety closing phase the functional state [SAF_OPG_ST], [SAF_CLG_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_OPG], [SAF_CLG] disappear .



abcd


When the treatment changes from degraded mode or safety mode to normal mode, it waits a demand or a limit switch return to place it in the corespondent functional states.

If the valve moves after an opening or closing demand and the treatment receives the reverse demand, then is not accepted.







• GENERALITY :

If the input [OPD] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (opening time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the opening order is present as long as the demand is present.

If the input [CLD] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (closing time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the closing order is present as long as the demand is present.



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs











abcd

OPD Fdc open B N - N (*) N -


B Y - N 0 Y - -

CLD Fdc closed B N - N (*) N -


B Y - N 0 Y - -



Outputs






B N N - Y - 0


OPG_ORDER Opening order B N Y - Y - 0

CLG_ORDER Closing order B N Y - Y - 0


D N N - Y - 0


D N N - Y - 0


D N N - Y - 0

Parameters - - - - - - - - -


B N - N 0 Y - -



D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -


D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -


D N Unit 0.01s 100 = 1s

Y - Y - -




abcd

89.4 CONFIGURATION

• TYPE SOL2A : It’s maximal I / O configuration with all position feedback.

• TYPE SOL2B or SOL2C: - Without position feedback : If [OPD] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not applied. If [CLD] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not applied.

89.5 USE :


• Scheme : None


89.6 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : • 11 booleans, 10 integers, 3 words (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10

doubles (amongst which 3 state variables) for SOL2 ; • 11 booleans, 10 integers, 6 words (amongst which 4 state variables) and 10

doubles for SOL2W ;



abcd



SOL2().



abcd

Section 90 SP_D : SET POINT CALCULATION

SP_D Specification version : 1.5 ( 02/01/01)

90.1 REPRESENTATION



abcd

Example with SLOP_AUTO = 10 %/min and SLOP_MANU = 20 %/min

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

100

Tn

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

100

Tn

IN

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

100

Tn

RE HI LO

TV

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

1

Tn

TC

Modification of HI

Modification of LO

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

1

Tn

T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80T0

0

1

Tn

STOP_HIGH STOP_LOW

CMD_HIGH CMD_LOW MANU_FBK

AUTO mode area MANU mode area



abcd

90.2 FUNCTION

This treatment elaborates different type of analog set point : - MST : Manual Setpoint Station. - SPA : SetPoint Adjustable. - SPI : SetPoint Integrator with manual input.

• INITIALIZATION (applicable on MST,SPA,SPI): The output [RE] is set in accordance to the init value [IV] during the first scan.

The operation mode is set in accordance to the [INIT] parameters, manu mode if [INIT] = 0, and auto mode if [INIT] = 1, except SPA block is always in manu mode.

• OPERATION MODE :

There is two operation mode , auto mode and manu mode, and the manu mode have priority on auto mode.

If the input [MANU_P] (latched) or [LOCK_AUT_P] or [MANU] (non-latched operator dmd) is set then the operation mode manu is selected and the output [MANU_FBK] is true.

If the block is in auto mode and the tracking command [TC] is set, the underlying mode will be changed to manual, the output [MANU_FBK] is true. When the tracking command [TC] is reset, the block fall back in auto mode or in manu mode in accordance with specific conditions and the output [MANU_FBK] is false.

If there is no condition of manu mode and input [AUTO_P] (latched) or [AUTO] (non-latched operator dmd) are set then the operation mode manu is unselected and the output [MANU_FBK] is false.

• MANU MODE OPERATION :

In manu mode, the output [RE] is adjusted by the two input commands [CMD_HIGH] and [CMD_LOW] according to the manu slope [SLOP_MANU] in function of type [TY] ( 0 -> %/s , 1 -> %/min) .

If commands [CMD_HIGH] and [CMD_LOW] are present at the same time then the output [RE] stays at the last value and doesn’t move.

• AUTO MODE OPERATION :

In auto mode, the output [RE] follows the input [IN] according to the slope [SLOP_AUTO] in function of type [TY] ( 0 -> %/s , 1 -> %/min).

The increasing of the output [RE] is lock at the last value [RE](t-1) when the input [STOP_HIGH] is true.

The decreasing of the output [RE] is lock at the last value [RE](t-1) when the input [STOP_LOW] is true.



abcd

• TRACKING MODE OPERATION :

If the tracking command [TC] is set, then the output [RE] follows tracking value [TV] without delay. When the tracking command [TC] becomes false then the output [RE] follows the input [IN] according to the slope [SLOP_AUTO] if the auto mode is selected else the output [RE] stays at the last value and wait manu command [CMD_HIGH] and [CMD_LOW].

• GENERAL OPERATION :

The general operations are active in any mode ( auto, manu, tracking mode).

The output [RE] is kept between the specified high [HI] and lower [LO] limits.

If the output [RE] equal high limit [HI] then the output high limit reached [HL] is set to 1.

If the output [RE] equal low limit [LO] then the output low limit reached [LL] is set to 1.

If the low limit [LO] is greater than high limit [HI] then the output [RE] is equal to high limit and the high reached [HL] and low limit reached [LO] are set to 1.

It’s possible to modify the specific limit [HI] [LO] during operation, in this case the output [RE] is kept between these new limits.



abcd



Def. value

Mand. Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

AUTO_P Auto process dmd B Y - N 0(*) Y - -

MANU_P Manu process dmd B Y - N 0(*) Y - -

LOCK_AUT_P Lock auto process dmd

B Y - N 0(*) Y - -

MANU Manu operator dmd B Y - N 0(*) Y - -

AUTO Auto operator dmd B Y - N 0(*) Y - -

IN Input I,D Y - N RE(t-1) Y - -

SLOP_AUTO Slope in auto mode W,D N %/min or %/s see TY

N 10% = 1000

Y - -

STOP_HIGH Stop increasing B Y - N 0 Y - -

STOP _LOW Stop decreasing B Y - N 0 Y - -

CMD_HIGH Higher command B Y - N 0 Y -

CMD_LOW Lower command B Y - N 0 Y - -

SLOP_MANU Slope in manu mode

W,D N %/min or %/s see TY

N 10% = 1000

Y - -

TC Tracking command B Y - N 0 Y - -

TV Tracking value I,D Y - N 0 Y - -

Outputs

RE Output I,D Y Y Y - IV

LL Low limit active B Y N Y - -

HL High limit active B Y N Y - -

MANU_FBK Feedback manu mode

B Y N Y - -

Parameters - - - - - - - -

INIT Initial operation mode

B Y N 0 Y 0 = manu 1 = auto

-

TY Slope scale B N 0-> %/s 1-> %/min

N 0 Y - -

IV Initial value I,D Y N 0 Y - -

LO Low limit value I,D Y N maxi of I,D Y - -

HI High limit value I,D Y N mini of I,D

Y - -

(*) If [AUTO_P],[MANU_P],[LOCK_AUT_P] , [AUTO] and [MANU] are missing then the function block stays in accordance to the [INIT] parameter.



abcd

90.4 CONFIGURATION

Usually, the input used is function of type of setpoint as followings:

Type MST : All outputs ,all parameters and inputs following are used. AUTO_P, MANU_P, LOCK_AUT_P, MANU,AUTO, IN, SLOP_AUTO, CMD_HIGH, CMD_LOW, SLOP_MANU, TC, TV.

Type SPA : All outputs ,all parameters and inputs following are used. IN, CMD_HIGH, CMD_LOW, SLOP_MANU, TC, TV.

Type SPI : All outputs ,all parameters and inputs following are used. AUTO_P, MANU_P, LOCK_AUT_P, IN, SLOP_AUTO, STOP_HIGH, STOP_LOW, SLOP_MANU, TC, TV.

90.5 USE


• Scheme : Operation mode scheme


90.6 SPECIFICATION


Internal variables : 15 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 7 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).

≥ 1

&

RSNOT

MANU_P

LOCK_AUT_P

TC

≥ 1 MANU_FBK

S

R

≥ 1AUTO_P

AUTO

INITMANU



abcd



SP_D().



abcd

Section 91 SPEED_C : SPEED CONSIGNATOR

SPEED_C Specification version : 1.2 (04/24/02)


91.2 Function

This FB is specially specified for elaborate the speed set point with : 3 stages; 4 Temperature levels with time ratios ; 4 critical speeds ; Init from speed measurement ; Output states for logical treatment. S1RQ or S2RQ or S3RQ provoke set point value decreasing if this is bigger than S1S or S2S Over speed test is possible by manual order if OST input is set. Manual orders are possible with 2 point to point inputs : DSR and ISR, or from DCS with speed target, SPT and pulse validation, TPV. Stage requests, Init Command, Reset, Freeze, and pulse validation are pulse input Inputs:

SPM : SPeed Measurement. S1RQ : Stage 1 Request. S2RQ : Stage 2 Request. S3RQ : Stage 3 Request.



abcd

AUT : full AUTo Request. DSR : Decrease Speed Request. ISR : Increase Speed Request. OST : Over Speed Test. SPT : Speed Target. STV : Speed Target Validation. TL1 : Temperature Level 1. TL2 : Temperature Level 2. TL3 : Temperature Level 3. IC : set point Init. on speed measurement Command. FRZ : FReeZe set point evolution. RST : ReSeT set point value.

Parameterization : S1S,: Stage 1 Speed. S1G: Stage 1 Gradient, S1W : Stage 1 Waiting time. S2S: Stage 2 Speed, S2G: Stage 2 Gradient, S2W : Stage 1 Waiting time. S3S,: Stage 3 Speed. S3G: Stage 3 Gradient, MSS : Manual +/- Speed Slow slope. MSF : Manual +/- Speed Fast slope. CSG: Critical Speed Gradient, C1S : Critical speed 1 Start. C1E : Critical speed 1 End. C2S : Critical speed 2 Start. C2E : Critical speed 2 End. C3S : Critical speed 3 Start. C3E : Critical speed 3 End. C4S : Critical speed 4 Start. C4E : Critical speed 4 End. T1R : Temperature 1 Rising time ratio. T1S : Temperature 1 Stage time ratio. T2R : Temperature 2 Rising time ratio. T2S : Temperature 2 Stage time ratio. T3R : Temperature 3 Rising time ratio. T3S : Temperature 3 Stage time ratio.

Outputs: RE : output set point value. TS1,: Target Stage 1. S1I,: Stage 1 In progress. S1R,: Stage 1 Reached. WS1: Waiting time on stage 1. TS2,: Target Stage 2. S2I,: Stage 2 In progress.



abcd

S2R,: Stage 2 Reached. WS2: Waiting time on stage 2. TS3,: Target Stage 3. S3I,: Stage 3 In progress. S3R,: Stage 3 Reached. DSI: Decrease Speed In progress. FAM: Full Auto Mode. ISI: Increase Speed In progress. NVS: No null Value Set point. CSI: Critical speed In progress. ENO: Error Output (Disorder or out of range parameters or input ). Input action function of state

No action Critical speed (CSI) SxI or FAM (up) SxI (down) Target speed in progress DSI (manual) ISI (manual) RST X X X X X X X FRZ X X X X X X IC X X(not when WSx) X X X STV X X X X ISR X X X X DSR X X X X X SxRQ X X(when WSx finished) X X AUT X X X X IF(INIT OR RST) THEN INTERN_ST=RE=RE10P6=0 ;

TS1=S1I=S1R=TS2=S2I=S2R=TS3=S3I=S3R=FAM=DSI=ISI=WS1=WS2= NVS= CSI=ENO=0

IF ((C1S>C1E) OR (C2S>C2E) OR(C3S>C3E) OR(C4S>C4E) ENO = 1 ; /*Disorder Critical speed parameters ELSE IF( CriticalSpeed (S1S) OR CriticalSpeed (S2S) OR CriticalSpeed (S3S) OR

(S1S>100%) OR (S2S>100%) OR (S3S>100%)). ENO = 1 /*Disorder stage speed parameters ENDIF IF (elaborated parameter (SxG, TxR, TxW, TxS,…)out of range) ENO=1 ELSE IF (ENO) RE =0 ELSE IF (FRZ AND (INTERN_ST <100)) /*Freeze request and not critical speed THEN /*Freeze set point evolution. ELSE S1I= S2I= S3I=DSI=ISI= 0 SWITCH (INTERN_ST) Case 0 (No action) /*Input treatment: IF (IC) THEN NVS=1 IF (!CriticalSpeed (SPM)) RE =SPM; ELSE IF (RE < SPM) THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM) ELSE RE = StopCritical (SPM) ENDIF



abcd

IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSEIF (STV AND (RE != SPT)) : /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSEIF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSEIF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM=0. IF (RE = S1S) TS1 = 0 ELSE IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE <= S2S) INTERN_ST= 6. ELSE IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF ELSEIF (S2RQ) THEN TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM=0. IF (RE = S2S) TS2 = 0 ELSE IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ELSEIF (S3RQ) THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2=FAM=0. ELSE IF (AUT) THEN FAM = 1; TS1= TS2= TS3 =0. IF (TS3 OR FAM) IF (RE = S3S) TS3 = 0 ELSE IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G;



abcd

ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE < S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 3. /*Stage 3 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S3G; ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF ENDCase0 Case 1 (Stage 1 Increase) IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1=1 ; TS2=TS3=FAM=0. IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2=1 ; TS1=TS3=FAM=0. IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3=1 ; TS1=TS2=FAM=0. IF (AUT) THEN FAM=1 ; TS1=TS2=TS3=0. Case 101 (Stage 1 Increase And Critical speed) S1I=1 IF ((INTERN_ST=101) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM)) THEN RE=RE+CSG(CYC) /*Critical speed gradient. CSI =1 /*Critical speed indication. ELSE IF (DSR) . /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0 ELSE IF (IC) THEN NVS=1 IF (!CriticalSpeed (SPM)) RE =SPM; ELSE THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM) ENDIF ELSE IF (STV) /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request THEN INTERN_ST=10; ; Temp=0 TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ENDIF IF ((INTERN_ST!=101) AND (INTERN_ST!=1)) BREAK IF (INTERN_ST=1) RE=RE+ Temp (CYC) /*Stage 1 gradient. IF (RE >= S1S) THEN RE = S1S IF (CriticalSpeed (RE) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM)) THEN INTERN_ST=101;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=1;CSI=0 IF (RE = S1S) THEN S1R=1 ; S1I=0 IF (TS1) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS1=0. ELSEIF (FAM)



abcd

THEN INTERN_ST=4; WS1=1. IF (TL3) Temp= (S1W *T3S)/10000; ELSEIF(TL2) Temp= (S1W *T2S)/10000; ELSEIF(TL1) Temp= (S1W *T1S)/10000; ELSE Temp= S1W; ENDIF ELSEIF (TS2 OR TS3) INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ENDIF ENDIF ENDIF ENDCase1 ENDCase101 Case 2 (Stage 2 Increase) IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1=1 ; TS2=TS3=FAM=0. IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2=1 ; TS1=TS3=FAM=0. IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3=1 ; TS1=TS2=FAM=0. IF (AUT) THEN FAM=1 ; TS1=TS2=TS3=0. Case 102 (Stage 2 Increase And Critical speed) S2I=1 IF ((INTERN_ST=102) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM)) THEN RE=RE+CSG(CYC) /*Critical speed gradient. CSI =1 /*Critical speed indication. ELSE IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (IC) THEN NVS=1 IF (!CriticalSpeed (SPM)) RE =SPM; ELSE RE = StartCritical (SPM) ENDIF ELSE IF (STV) /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2=TS3=FAM=0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0 TS1=TS2=TS3=FAM=0. ENDIF IF ((INTERN_ST!=102) AND (INTERN_ST!=2)) BREAK IF (INTERN_ST=2) RE=RE+ Temp (CYC) /*Stage 2 gradient. IF (RE >= S2S) THEN RE = S2S; ENDIF IF (CriticalSpeed (RE) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM)) THEN INTERN_ST=102;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=2;CSI=0



abcd

IF (TS1) INTERN_ST=6; Temp=0; TS2= TS3=FAM=0. IF (RE = S2S) THEN S2R=1 ; S2I=0 IF (TS2) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS2=0. ELSEIF (FAM) THEN INTERN_ST=5; WS2=1. IF (TL3) Temp= (S2W *T3S)/10000; ELSEIF(TL2) Temp= (S2W *T2S)/10000; ELSEIF(TL1) Temp= (S2W *T1S)/10000; ELSE Temp= S2W; ENDIF ELSEIF (TS3) INTERN_ST= 3. /*Stage 3 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S3G; ENDIF ENDIF ENDIF ENDCase2 ENDCase102 Case 3 (Stage 3 Increase) IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1=1 ; TS2=TS3=FAM=0. IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2=1 ; TS1=TS3=FAM=0. IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3=1 ; TS1=TS2=FAM=0. IF (AUT) THEN FAM=1 ; TS1=TS2=TS3=0. Case 103 (Stage 3 Increase And Critical speed) S3I=1 IF ((INTERN_ST=103) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM)) THEN RE=RE+CSG(CYC) /*Critical speed gradient. CSI =1 /*Critical speed indication. ELSE IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3=0. ELSE IF (IC) THEN NVS=1 IF (!CriticalSpeed (SPM)) RE =SPM; ELSE THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM) ENDIF ELSE IF (STV) /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; ; Temp=0 TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ENDIF IF ((INTERN_ST!=103) AND (INTERN_ST!=3)) BREAK



abcd

IF (INTERN_ST=3) RE=RE+ Temp (CYC) /*Stage 3 gradient. IF (RE >= S3S) THEN RE = S3S IF (CriticalSpeed (RE) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM)) THEN INTERN_ST=103;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=3;CSI=0 IF (RE = S3S) THEN S3R=1 ; S3I=0 IF (TS3 OR FAM) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS3=0; FAM=0. ENDIF ENDIF IF (TS1 OR TS2). INTERN_ST=7; Temp=0; TS3=0. ENDIF ENDCase3 ENDCase103 Case 4 (Waiting Stage 1) S3R= S2R=0. S1R= WS1=1. /*Input treatment: IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3=FAM=0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (STV) : /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; = TS2= TS3= FAM =0. ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM =0. ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2= FAM =0. ENDIF IF (Temp > CYC AND FAM) THEN Temp= Temp - CYC ELSE IF (FAM OR TS2 OR TS3). THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE INTERN_ST=0; Temp=0; TS1= 0. ENDIF ENDIF ENDCase4 Case 5 (Waiting Stage 2 )



abcd

S1R= S3R=0. S2R= WS2=1. /*Input treatment: IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM =0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM =0. ELSE IF (STV) : /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM =0. ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM =0. ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM =0. ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2= FAM =0. ENDIF IF (Temp > CYC AND FAM) THEN Temp= Temp - CYC ELSE IF (TS3 OR FAM). THEN INTERN_ST= 3. /*Stage 3 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S3G; ELSE IF (TS1). INTERN_ST=6; Temp=0; TS2= 0. ELSE INTERN_ST=0; Temp=0; TS2= 0. ENDIF ENDIF ENDCase5 Case 6 (Stage 1 Decrease) /*Input treatment: IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (STV) : /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM = 0. IF (RE <= S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R;



abcd

ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (AUT) THEN FAM = 1; TS1= TS2= TS3 =0. ENDIF IF (TS3 OR FAM) THEN. IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE < S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 3. /*Stage 3 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S3G; ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF IF(INTERN_ST!=6) Break. Case 106 (Stage 1 Decrease And Critical speed) S1I=1 RE=RE-CSG(CYC) /*Critical speed gradient for decreasing stage. IF (RE <= S1S) THEN RE = S1S; S1R=1 ; S1I=0 IF (TS1) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS1=0. ENDIF ELSE IF (CriticalSpeed (RE)) THEN INTERN_ST=106;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=6;CSI=0 ENDIF ENDCase6 ENDCase106 Case 7 (Stage 2 Decrease) /*Input treatment:



abcd

IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (STV) : /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3=0. ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (AUT) THEN FAM = 1; TS1= TS2= TS3 =0. ENDIF IF (TS3 OR FAM) THEN. IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE < S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 3. /*Stage 3 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S3G; ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF IF(INTERN_ST!=7) Break. Case 107 (Stage 2 Decrease And Critical speed) S2I=1 RE=RE-CSG(CYC) /*Critical speed gradient for decreasing stage. IF (RE <= S2S) THEN RE = S2S; S2R=1 ; S2I=0 IF (TS2) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS2=0. ELSEIF (TS1) THEN INTERN_ST=6; TS2=0. ENDIF ELSE IF (CriticalSpeed (RE)) THEN INTERN_ST=107;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=7;CSI=0



abcd

ENDIF ENDCase7 ENDCase107 Case 8 (Stage 3 Decrease) /*Input treatment: IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (STV) : /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM = 0. ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM = 0. ENDIF IF(INTERN_ST!=8) Break. S3I=1 RE=RE-CSG(CYC) /*Critical speed gradient for decreasing stage. IF (RE <= S3S) THEN RE = S3S; S3R=1 ; S1I=0 IF (TS3 OR FAM) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS1=0. ELSE IF (TS2 OR TS1) THEN INTERN_ST=7. ENDIF ENDIF ENDCase8 Case 9 (Manual Decrease) /*Input treatment: IF (IC) THEN NVS=1 IF (!CriticalSpeed (SPM)) RE =SPM; ELSE IF (RE < SPM) THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM) ELSE RE = StopCritical (SPM) ENDIF ENDIF IF (!DSR) /* Ending Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=0; Temp=0. ENDIF IF (ISR) /* Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (STV) : /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM=0. IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R;



abcd

ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE <= S2S) INTERN_ST= 6. ELSE IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM=0. IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2=FAM=0. ELSE IF (AUT) THEN FAM = 1; TS1= TS2= TS3 =0. ENDIF IF (TS3 OR FAM) IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE < S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 3. /*Stage 3 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S3G; ELSE IF (RE = S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 0.



abcd

ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF IF(INTERN_ST!=9) Break. Case 109 (Manual Decrease And Critical speed) IF(INTERN_ST=109) RE=RE-CSG(CYC) /*Critical Slope gradient for Target speed mode. ELSE IF (Temp < 1000) /*1000ms Temp = Temp+ CYC. RE=RE-MSS(CYC) /*Manual Slow Slope gradient for 1st second order. ELSE RE=RE-MSF(CYC) /*Manual Fast Slope gradient after 1st second order. ENDIF ENDIF IF (CriticalSpeed (RE) THEN INTERN_ST=109;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=9;CSI=0 IF (RE <=0%) THEN RE = 0%; ENDIF ENDCase9 ENDCase109 Case 10 (Manual Increase ) /*Input treatment: IF (IC) THEN NVS=1 IF (!CriticalSpeed (SPM)) RE =SPM; ELSE IF (RE < SPM) THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM) ELSE RE = StopCritical (SPM) ENDIF ENDIF IF (!ISR) /* Ending Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=0; Temp=0. ENDIF IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (STV) : /*Speed Target Validation. THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM=0. IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE <= S2S) INTERN_ST= 6. ELSE IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7.



abcd

ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM=0. IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2=FAM=0. ELSE IF (AUT) THEN FAM = 1; TS1= TS2= TS3 =0. IF (TS3 OR FAM) IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE < S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 3. /*Stage 3 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S3G; ELSE IF (RE = S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 0. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF IF(INTERN_ST!=10) Break. Case 110 (Manual Increase And Critical speed)



abcd

IF(INTERN_ST=110) RE=RE+CSG(CYC) /*Critical Slope gradient for Target speed mode. ELSE IF (Temp < 1000) /*1000ms Temp = Temp+ CYC. RE=RE+MSS(CYC) /*Manual Slow Slope gradient for 1st second order. ELSE RE=RE+MSF(CYC) /*Manual Fast Slope gradient after 1st second order. ENDIF ENDIF IF (CriticalSpeed (RE) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM)) THEN INTERN_ST=110;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=10;CSI=0 IF (!OST AND (RE >=100%)) THEN RE = 100%; ELSE IF (RE >120%) THEN RE = 120%; ENDIF ENDCase10 ENDCase110 Case 11 (Target In progress) /*Input treatment: IF (IC) THEN NVS=1 IF (!CriticalSpeed (SPM)) RE =SPM; ELSE IF (RE < SPM) THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM) ELSE RE = StopCritical (SPM) ENDIF ENDIF IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request. THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0. ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM=0. IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE <= S2S) INTERN_ST= 6. ELSE IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM=0. IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R).



abcd

IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2=FAM=0. ELSE IF (AUT) THEN FAM = 1; TS1= TS2= TS3 =0. ENDIF IF (TS3 OR FAM) IF (RE < S1S) THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S1G; ELSE IF (RE < S2S) THEN INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S2G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S2G; ELSE IF (RE < S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 3. /*Stage 3 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R). IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T3R; ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T2R; ELSEIF(TL1 AND(T1R!=0)) Temp= (S3G *10000)/ T1R; ELSE Temp= S3G; ELSE IF (RE = S3S). THEN INTERN_ST= 0. ELSE INTERN_ST= 8. ENDIF IF(INTERN_ST!=11) Break. Case 111 (Target In progress And Critical speed) IF ((RE < SPT) AND (OST OR (SPT<=100%))) IF (CriticalSpeed (SPT)) SPT = StartCritical (SPT) IF(INTERN_ST=11) RE=RE+MSF(CYC) /*Manual Fast Slope gradient for Target speed mode. ELSE



abcd

RE=RE+CSG(CYC) /*Critical Slope gradient for Target speed mode. ENDIF IF (RE >= SPT) THEN RE = SPT; INTERN_ST=0 ELSE IF (CriticalSpeed (RE) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM)) THEN INTERN_ST=111;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=11;CSI=0 ENDIF ELSEIF (RE >= SPT) IF (CriticalSpeed (SPT)) SPT = StopCritical (SPT) RE=RE-MSF(CYC) /*Manual Fast Slope gradient for Target speed mode. IF (RE <= SPT) THEN RE = SPT; INTERN_ST=0 ELSE IF (CriticalSpeed (RE)) THEN INTERN_ST=111;CSI=1 ELSE INTERN_ST=11;CSI=0 ENDIF ENDIF ENDCase11 ENDCase111 IF (RE = S3S) S3R=1. ELSE IF (RE = S2S) S2R=1. ELSE IF (RE = S1S) S1R=1. ENDIF ENDIF



abcd



g Range Mand

.Connecti

on

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

Inputs SPM SPeed Measurement. D N 000 to+32000 ; (0,00 to 320,00 %) Y Y S1RQ Stage 1 Request. BOOL. Y 0->1 for request N 0 Y S2RQ Stage 2 Request. BOOL. Y 0->1 for request N 0 Y S3RQ Stage 3 Request. BOOL. Y 0->1 for request N 0 Y AUT Full auto request. BOOL. Y 0->1 for request N 0 Y DSR Decrease Speed Request. BOOL. Y 1 for request N 0 Y ISR Increase Speed Request. BOOL. Y 1 for request N 0 Y OST Over Speed Test BOOL. Y 1 for request N 0 Y SPT Speed Target D. N 0 to+12000 ; (0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y STV Speed Target Validation BOOL. Y 0->1 for Validation N 0 Y TL1 Temperature Level 1 for speed

gradient and waiting time ratios . BOOL. Y 1 for ratio request N 0 Y

TL2 Temperature Level 2. for speed gradient and waiting time ratios .

BOOL. Y 1 for ratio request N 0 Y

TL3 Temperature Level 3. for speed gradient and waiting time ratios .

BOOL. Y 1 for ratio request N 0 Y

IC set point Init. on speed measurement Command.

BOOL. Y 0->1 for Init command. N 0 Y

FRZ FReeZe set point evolution. BOOL. Y 0->1 for Freeze N 0 Y RST ReSeT set point value BOOL. Y 0->1 for Reset N 0 Y Outputs

RE output set point value. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0 to 120,00 %) Y Y 0 TS1 Target Stage 1. BOOL Y 1 if target set point is Stage 1 by

S1RQ input N Y 0

S1I Stage 1 In progress. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is going to Stage 1 N Y 0 S1R Stage 1 Reached. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is equal to stage 1

value N Y 0

WS1 Waiting time on Stage 1 in progress.

BOOL Y 1 if waiting time on stage 1 ended and no more action in progress

N Y 0

TS2 Target Stage 2. BOOL Y 1 if target set point is Stage 2 by S2RQ input

N Y 0


value N Y 0

WS2 Waiting time on Stage 2 in progress.

BOOL Y 1 if waiting time on stage 1 ended and no more action in progress

N Y 0

TS3 Target Stage 3. BOOL Y 1 if target set point is Stage 3 by S3RQ input

N Y 0


value N Y 0

FAM Full Auto Mode in progress. BOOL Y 1 if target set point is Stage 3 by AUT input (with waiting stage)

N Y 0

DSI Decrease Speed In progress. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is decreasing by manual order

N Y 0

ISI Increase Speed In progress. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is increasing by manual order

N Y 0

NVS No null Value Set point. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is not equal to 0 N Y 0 CSI Critical speed In progress BOOL Y 1 if set point value or Speed

measurement is in one of critical speed ranges

N Y 0



abcd


Range Mand.Connecti

on

Def. value

Mand. Data

Advis. Param. value

First scan value

ENO Error Output (Disorder or out of range parameters or input ).

BOOL Y 1 if Error N Y 0

Parame ters

S1S Stage 1 Speed. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) Y Y S1G Stage 1 Gradient, D N 1 to+10000 ;

(0,01 to 100,00 %/min) Y Y

S1W Stage 1 Waiting time. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0 to 10000 s) N 0 Y S2S Stage 2 Speed, D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N S1S Y S2G Stage 2 Gradient, D N 1 to+10000

(0,01 to 100,00 %/min) N S1G Y

S2W Stage 2 Waiting time. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0 to 10000 s) N 0 Y S3S Stage 3 Speed. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N S2S Y S3G Stage 3 Gradient, D N 1 to+10000

(0,01 to 100,00 %/min) N S2G Y

MSS Manual +/- Speed Slow slope. D N 1 to+10000 (0,01 to 100,00 %/min)

N S1S Y

MSF Manual +/- Speed Fast slope. D N 1 to+10000 (0,01 to 100,00 %/min)

N MSS Y

CSG Critical Speed Gradient, D N 1 to+30000 (0,01 to 300,00 %/min)

N S1S Y

C1S Critical speed 1 Start. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y C1E Critical speed 1 End. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y C2S Critical speed 2 Start. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y C2E Critical speed 2 End. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y C3S Critical speed 3 Start. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y C3E Critical speed 3 End. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y C4S Critical speed 4 Start. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y C4E Critical speed 4 End. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y T1R Temperature 1 Rising time ratio. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0,0 to 100,00 %) N 1000

0 Y

T1S Temperature 1 Stage time ratio. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0,0 to 100,00 %) N 10000

Y

T2R Temperature 2 Rising time ratio. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0,0 to 100,00 %) N 10000

Y


Y

T3R Temperature 3 Rising time ratio. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0,0 to 100,00 %) N 10000

Y


Y

91.4 SPECIFICATIONS



TS1 Target Stage 1. B - Redundant Variable TS2 Target Stage 2. B - Redundant Variable TS3 Target Stage 3. B - Redundant Variable FAM Full Auto Mode B - Redundant Variable

INTERNAL_ST Internal State variable I - Redundant Variable RE RE memorisation D - Redundant Variable



abcd

Temp

Current Cunt down Tempo memorisation when Fb is waiting and current gradient function of warming

level when increasing to stage

D - Redundant Variable

RE10P6 Internal count for precision D - Memorisation but no redundant variable ENO Default output B - Memorisation but no redundant variable

Internal variables : 31 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 1 integer (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables).



SPEED_C().



abcd

Section 92 TIME_METER_L : TIME METER IN SECONDS

TIME_METER_L Specification version : 1.0 (10/22/08)


92.2 Function

This block counts the seconds spent since January 1st, 1970.

INITIALIZATION : The block output is positioned in accordance with the normal operation : it is necessary to wait for 30 secondes the calculation of algorithm before the right value in seconds since January 1st, 1970.

NORMAL OPERATION : The block outputs are established as follows :

• if the target is a C8075 CPU the meter LS_8075_M and MS_8075_M come from the meters of L101FS_ANA_GLB table (LS in 1072 and MS in 1071) and are used as inputs;

• if the target is a MFC3000 CPU the meter MFC3000_M comes from NA001C_TIME_SEC and is used as input ;

• The memorization and/or the reset is carried out when MEM_RESET is at 1 : when the value is at 0, the block begins to counting : When MEM_RESET is at 1, the block is initialized with the value of meter ( LS_8075_M & MS_8075_M or MFC3000_M regarding the target CPU where the block is used) by adding the value of the PRESET ;

• RE_MTR is the value to be reached for Meter in seconds ;

• TIME_METER is the spent time since January 1st, 1970 ;

• REM_HOUR and REM_MINUT are the remaining time until the value to reach ;

• SPEN_HOUR and SPEN_MINUT are the spending time since the beginning of the counting of the block ;

• When the value RE_MTR is reached, the flag REAC_VALUE rises from 0 to 1 ;



abcd



Default Value

Mandatory Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

LS_8075_M MS_8075_M MFC3000_M

Input Less Significant C8075 Meter Input Most Significant C8075 Meter Input MFC3000 Meter

Word Word Double

N N N

[0 ;65535] [0 ;65535] [-2147483648 ; +2147483647]

N N N

0 0 0

N N N

- - -

- - -

Outputs

REAC_VALUE

TIME_METER

REM_HOUR

REM_MINUT

SPEN_HOUR

SPEN_MINUT

Flag for reached value Value of Meter in seconds Remaining Hours Remaining Minuts Spending Hours Spending Minuts

Boolean Long Integer Integer Integer Integer

N N N N N N

[ ]1;0 [0 ; +4294967295] [-32768 ; +32767] [-32768 ; +32767] [-32768 ; +32767] [-32768 ; +32767]

Y N N N N N

Y Y Y Y Y Y

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

Parameters

MEM_RESET RE_MTR PRESET

Memorization and/or Reset Value to be reached for Meter in seconds Value in seconds to preset

Boolean Long Long

N N N

[ ]1;0 [0 ; +4294967295] [0 ; +4294967295]

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

- - -

- - -



abcd

92.4 Use




It is necessary to choose the right meter variable regarding the target CPU (L101FS_ANA_GLB for C8075 or NA001C_TIME_SEC for MFC3000).




One state variable (a long). Internal variables :

• 4 words, 1 double and 8 longs ;



None.



abcd

| Endif Endif



abcd



Default Value

Mandatory Data

Advised parameters

value

First scan value

Inputs

IN1 IN2

Input 1 Input 2

ANY_NUM

Y Y

] [+∞∞− ;

Y N

- 0

N N

-

-

Outputs

RE

Output or Result

Boolean

Y

[ ]1;0

Y

Y

-

0

Parameters

TH HY TY

Threshold value Hysteresis value Direction or Type

ANY_NUM ANY_NUM Boolean

N N N

] [+∞∞− ; [ [+∞;0 [ ]1;0

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

- - -

- - -

This block can be real, integer or double integer. IN1 to 2, TH & HY are the same type for each type of block. RE & TY are boolean type for each type of block

THTH - HY

1

RE

ΣIN

HY

TY = 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

0

RE

ΣINTH TH + HY

HY

TY = 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 70



abcd

93.4 Use



IN1 to 2 : INPUT : ANY_NUM input, IN1 mandatory. RE : OUTPUT : boolean output, mandatory and memory. TH : TRESHOLD VALUE : ANY_NUM input. HY : HYSTERESIS VALUE : ANY_NUM input. TY : DIRECTION or TYPE DEFINITION : boolean input.

Detection direction: if TY = 0 falling detection, if TY = 1 rising detection


[HY] parameter must be positive, else the output will be set to the two’s complement of [TY] parameter. This block is not an historical block.




The ouput is a state variable. Internal variables :

• 2 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 3 doubles for THR_D() ; • 2 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 3 reals for THR_R() ;



THR_D() and THR_R().



abcd

Section 94 V_VIEW : VARIABLE VIEWER

V_VIEW Specification version : 1.0 (04/24/03)


94.2 Function

This function is used to view and adjust value of any variable in a diagram. User defines in the parameter “CONFIG”, which is an array, a serie of informations that allows to obtain the sought-after value.

Array : CONFIG Variable type Memory type

Address of variable Min value Max value

Bit position (if visualisation of a bit) Value to put in the Watch Window (or VISUREC) for “Variable Type”:

• INTEGER : 0 • DOUBLE : 1 • BOOLEAN : 2

Value to put for “Memory Type”:

• % I : 1 • % R : 2 • % AI : 3 • % M : 4



abcd

• % Q : 5 • % AQ : 6

The minimum and maximum values allow making a linear conversion, thus precise the value to visualise. RES Min value of selected variable is 0, and, RES Max value of selected variable is 32 000. Bit position is used when user wants to know, state of a bit of a word (variable with Type = 2), or state of a boolean variable.



Connection Def. value

Mand. Data


First scan value

Inputs Outputs RES Result I/D N 0 to 32000 pts Y - Y 0 DEFAULT Default BOOL N N - Y 0 Parameters CONFIG Array of 6 words LONG N 0 to 65 535 Y - Y DC Disable config BOOL N 1=disable Y - Y

94.4 Use

94.4.1 Parameters to initialise

94.4.2 Arguments description

94.4.3 Recommendations

94.5 SPECIFICATIONS :


Internal variables : None



abcd



V_VIEW ( ).

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library...

Documents

Transcript of CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library...